Home

MELSEC iQ-R Temperature Control Module User`s Manual

1. 160 280 to 299 System area m 118H to 12BH 300 12CH All Control mode selection 0 Setting O O 301 12DH All Sampling cycle selection 0 Setting O I O 302 12EH All Automatic setting at input range change 0 Setting Or Or 303 12FH All Setting variation rate limiter setting selection 0 Setting Ori O 304 130H All Control output cycle unit selection setting System area 0 Setting Or PPOs 305 131H All Moving average processing setting 0 Setting FOr I 306 132H All PID continuation flag 0 Setting Or Or 307 133H All Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 0 Setting Or NO 308 134H All Manipulated value resolution change for output with System area 0 Setting OHO ery another analog module 309 135H All Cold junction temperature compensation selection 0 Setting olol 310 to 399 System area SES S 136H to 18FH 400 190H CH1 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor SS 1 TCRT 401 191H CH1 Alert definition 0 Monitor O 402 192H CH1 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor 0 403 193H CH1 Manipulated Manipulated value for heating System area 0 Monitor SoS value MV MVh 404 194H CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor G E 405 195H CH1 Transistor Heating transistor output flag Open side 0 Monitor SO out
2. 130 82H CH4 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Setting setting setting setting setting 131 83H CH4 Proportional Heating Proportional Proportional 30 Setting band P setting proportional band P setting band P band Ph setting setting 132 84H CH4 Integral time l Integral time I Integral time I Integral time 1 240 Setting setting setting setting setting 133 85H CH4 Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time 60 Setting D setting D setting D setting D setting 134 86H CH4 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 Alert set value 0 Setting i 13 135 87H CH4 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert set value 2 Alert set value 0 Setting 2 2 5 136 88H CH4 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 Alert set value 0 Setting 3 3 137 89H CH4 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 Alert set value 0 Setting 4 45 138 8AH CH4 Upper limit Heating upper Upper limit System area 1000 Setting output limiter limit output output limiter limiter 139 8BH CH4 Lower limit System area Lower limit System area 0 Setting output limiter output limiter 140 8CH CH4 Output variation Output variation Output variation System area 0 Setting amount limiter amount limiter amount limiter 141 8DH CH4 Sensor correction value settin
3. 715 2CBH CH4 System area Cooling System area Close side 0 Monitor gt transistor output transistor output flag flag 716 to 718 System area as fe 2CCH to 2CEH 719 2CFH All System area Cooling method setting System area 0 Setting O IO JO 720 2D0H CH1 System area Cooling proportional band Pc System area 30 Setting O IO setting 721 2D1H CH1 System area Cooling upper limit output limiter System area 1000 Setting O IO I 722 2D2H CH1 System area Cooling control output cycle setting System area 30 17 Setting O lo J 300 8 723 2D3H CH1 System area Overlap dead band setting System area 0 Setting O IO 724 2D4H CH1 Manual reset amount setting System area 0 Setting O IO 725 2D5H CH1 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting 0 Setting O IO JIO 726 2D6H CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value 0 Setting O IO IO 727 2D7H CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value 0 Setting O IO JO 728 2D8H CH1 Process value PV scaling value 0 Monitor gt 729 2D9H CH1 Derivative action selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 730 2DAH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O IO temperature rise group setting 731 2DBH CH1 Simultaneous System ar
4. Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 bO CH1 Input range upper limit When the temperature process value PV has exceeded the temperature measuring range of the set input range b1 CH1 Input range lower limit When the temperature process value PV has fallen below the temperature measuring range of the set input range b2 b3 Fixed to 0 Not used b4 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit When the variation amount of the temperature process value PV is equal to or larger than the rate alarm upper limit value b5 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit When the variation amount of the temperature process value PV is equal to or smaller than the rate alarm lower limit value b6 b7 Fixed to 0 Not used b8 CH1 Alert 1 When Alert 1 has occurred Page 67 Alert Function b9 CH1 Alert 2 When Alert 2 has occurred Page 67 Alert Function b10 CH1 Alert 3 When Alert 3 has occurred Page 67 Alert Function b11 CH1 Alert 4 When Alert 4 has occurred Page 67 Alert Function b12 CH1 Heater disconnection When a heater disconnection has been detected 47 Page 81 Heater Disconnection detection Detection Function b13 CH1 Loop disconnection When a loop disconnection has been detected Page 86 Loop Disconnection detection Detection Function b14 CH1 Output off time current error When an output off time current error has been detected Page 85 Output Off t
5. 908 38CH CH3 Upper limit Heating upper Upper limit System area 1000 Setting output limiter limit output output limiter limiter 909 38DH CH3 Lower limit System area Lower limit System area 0 Setting output limiter output limiter 910 38EH CH3 Output variation Output variation Output variation System area 0 Setting amount limiter amount limiter amount limiter 911 38FH CH3 Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 912 390H CH3 Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 913 391H CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter setting variation setting variation setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature rise 2 rise 2 5 rise rise 2 9 914 392H CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation O Setting rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature drop drop 35 drop drop 915 393H CH3 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse Direct reverse 1 Setting action setting action setting acti
6. 1 L1H L1 CH1 OPEN L1H L1H CH1 OPEN 2 L1C L2 CH1 CLOSE Lic Lic CH1 CLOSE 3 L2H L3H CH2 OPEN L2H L3 CH2 OPEN 4 L2C L3C CH2 CLOSE L2C L4 CH2 CLOSE 5 COM COM COM COM COM COM 6 NC CH2A NC MT2A NC CH2A Not used Not used NC 7 CH1 CH1B CH1 CH1B CH1 CH1B CH1A CH1A CH1A 8 CH2 CH2B MT2 MT2B CH2 CH2B CH2A MT2A CH2A 9 CH1 CH1b CH1 CH1b CH1 CH1b CH1B CH1B CH1B 10 CH2 CH2b MT2 MT2b CH2 CH2b CH2B MT2B CH2B 11 NC CH1A NC CH1A NC CH1A CH1b CH1b CH1b 12 CJ CJ CJ CH2b MT2b CH2b 13 NC NC NC MT3A CH3A MT3A 14 CJ CJ CJ MT4A CH4A MT4A 15 MT3 CH3 MT3 MT3B CH3B MT3B 16 MT4 CH4 MT4 MT4B CH4B MT3B 17 MT3 CH3 MT3 MT3b CH3b MT3b 18 MT4 CH4 MT4 MT4b CH4b MT4b d buffer memory areas that can be used in this function The following lists the parameters and buffer memory areas that can be used in this function HParameter Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting e Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting in Application Setting e Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting e Number of moving averaging in Application Setting e Temperature conversion setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting e Cold Junction Temperature Compensation Selection in Application Setting the R6OTCTRT2TT2 and R60TCTRT2TT2BW only e Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting of Rate alarm in Application Setting e Rate alarm warni
7. Bit data from b15 to b3 are fixed to 0 bO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter This bit turns on when the simultaneous temperature rise parameters are calculated by the calculation completion simultaneous temperature rise AT b1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter This bit turns on when the simultaneous temperature rise parameters cannot be calculated calculation error status by the simultaneous temperature rise AT b2 Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status This bit turns on when the simultaneous temperature rise AT was not able to be executed b3 to b15 Fixed to 0 Not used The values of CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 This area is enabled only for the following channels CH1 to CH4 of when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 of when the mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following lt Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag 413 613 813 1013 CHO AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag in the Q 573 605 637 669 compatible mode 228 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buf
8. Non alert status Alert status rt mode and related settings The following table shows the alert modes and the related settings described in this section Enabled or used O Disabled or not used Input alert Upper limit input alert Lower limit input alert Deviation alert Upper limit deviation alert Oloo 000 O OO KOJO Upper limit deviation alert use set value SV setting value O O O O Lower limit deviation alert Lower limit deviation alert O Oo O O use set value SV setting value Upper lower limit deviation Oo O O O alert Upper lower limit deviation O O G O alert use set value SV setting value Within range alert O O Within range alert use set O O value SV setting value 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function 1 26 Rate Alarm Function The temperature process value PV is monitored every rate alarm alert detection cycle When the variation from the previously monitored value is greater than the rate alarm upper limit value or smaller than the rate alarm lower limit value an alert occurs The rate alarm is helpful to monitor the change of the temperature process value PV within a limited range Rate alarm alert detection cycle Value times set for Rate alarm warning detection period of Rate alarm in Application Setting x Sampling cycle 500ms 4 channels or 250ms 4 channels The temperature
9. 2220000000 13 Start I O of slave module with inter module peak current suppression function enabled 303 Start I O of slave module with inter module simultaneous temperature rise function enabled 305 319 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover July 2015 SH NA 081536ENG A First edition Japanese manual number SH 081534 A This manual confers no industrial property rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2015 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 320 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gr
10. 264 CH1 Control output cycle setting 248 CH1 Control response parameter 249 CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting 261 CH1 Cooling method setting 261 CH1 Cooling method setting Q compatible mode Siam Roh enue dees her gh Ok ke E Gates keh A 261 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 239 CH1 Cooling transistor output flag 225 CH1 Cooling upper limit output limiter 260 CH1 Decimal point position 218 CH1 Derivative action selection 262 CH1 Derivative time D setting 236 CH1 Direct reverse action setting 256 CH1 Disturbance judgment position 283 CH1 During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable 274 CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag a iriged chaste E ee ate Aaa aah hae 232 CH1 Feed forward control forced start status 230 CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal A eke tiaras Gear een ea ee ta ahs dake eee 285 CH1 Feed forward control READY flag 231 CH1 Feed forward value 286 CH1 Feed forward value memory read command gS aha ooops aur Gh nae Pes alana AA eo a a 240 CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag 230 CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection 287 CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 295 CH1 Heater disconnection judgment mode 296 CH1 Heating control output cycle setting 24
11. 762 2FAH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO O temperature rise temperature rise group setting group setting 763 2FBH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting OO temperature rise temperature rise gradient data gradient data 764 2FCH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O G temperature rise temperature rise dead time dead time 765 2FDH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O RO temperature rise temperature rise AT mode AT mode selection selection 766 2FEH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor pS temperature rise temperature rise status status 767 2FFH CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O IO O rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting time setting time setting 768 300H CH4 System area Cooling System area 30 Setting O Q proportional band Pc setting 769 301H CH4 System area Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting Oe Oo limit output limiter 770 302H CH4 System area Cooling control System area 30 17 Setting O O J output cycle 300 18 setting 771 303H CH4 System area Overlap dead System area 0 Setting O IO band setting 772 304H CH4 Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset System area 0 Settin
12. Un G3600 Error history No 1 lt 17th error 1st e gt Un G3610 Error history No 2 2nd error Un G3620 Error history No 3 3rd error Un G3750 Error history No 16 16th error Point f ee e When the storage areas for the error history are full data in Error history No 1 Un G3600 to Un G3609 is overwritten in order and recording of error history continues The history data before the data overwriting is deleted The same processing is executed to the alarm history e The registered error history is cleared by powering off of the temperature control module or resetting the CPU module 122 1 FUNCTIONS 1 38 Error History Function 1 39 Event History Function The errors or alarms occurred and operations executed on the temperature control module are collected as event information into the CPU module The CPU module collects the information of the event that occurred in the temperature control module and stores the information in the data memory in the CPU module or an SD memory card The event information collected by the CPU module can be displayed on the engineering tool and the occurrence history can be checked in chronological order System Error A self diagnostics error detected in each module Warning An alarm detected in each module Information A normal detection of the information that is not to be classified as an error or alarm or an operation t
13. sasad gt Executed by the temperature control module Completion of the temperature rise does not set CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G414 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 As shown in the figure above the simultaneous temperature rise function raises the temperature to a certain point and Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is set during the temperature rise After the point the temperature rises based on the PID constants of CH1 and Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is set For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following K Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status 414 614 814 1014 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise status in the Q compatible mode 734 750 766 782 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 229 rd control forced start status The feed forward control forced start status can be checked in this area When the temperature control module starts the feed forward control after CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 is set to Feed forward control forced start 1 Forced start in progress 1 will be stored in this area e 0 Forced start stop e 1 Forced start in progress Buffer memory address The f
14. Setting Temperature process 1 value PV A Set value r Set value oa SV 3 Set value 1 4 SV 1 mat i i gt Time i 11 minute i gt 4 3 3 1 Setting change rate limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting 2 Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop of Limiter setting in Application Setting 3 Setting change rate limiter unit time setting of Limiter setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 3 1 18 Setting Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function 5 1 19 Sensor Correction Function When there is an error between the temperature process value PV and actual temperature due to measurement conditions this function corrects the error The following two types are available Normal sensor correction one point correction function Sensor two point correction function Point P In the Q compatible mode set a value within the range of 5000 to 5000 50 00 to 50 00 to the full scale of the set input range e When the sensor correction is executed with the engineering tool the memory having the capacity of 700MB or larger is required Check the memory in use has the capacity of 700MB or larger and execute the sensor correction Normal sensor correction one point correction function This function uses the value set in Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting as the error correction value for correcting the error Ex When a value wit
15. CHO Alert 1 mode setting 533 733 933 1133 CHO Alert 1 mode setting in the Q compatible mode 192 208 224 240 This area is disabled for the following modes and channels e Heating cooling control normal mode position proportional control normal mode CH3 CH4 e Mix control normal mode CH2 Alert mode and alert set value Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 1 selected in this setting Set a value in CH1 Alert set value 1 Un G434 CH1 Alert set value 1 Un G434 corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 1 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 267 Setting range The following table lists setting values and setting ranges of alert set values in each alert mode 0 No alert 1 Upper limit input alert Value within the temperature measuring range of the set input range 2 Lower limit input alert 3 Upper limit deviation alert Full scale to Full scale 4 Lower limit deviation alert 5 Upper lower limit deviation alert 0 to Full scale 6 Within range alert 7 Upper limit input alert with standby Value within the temperature measuring range of the set input range 8 Lower limit input alert with standby 9 Upper limit deviation alert with standby Full scale to Full scale 10 Lower limit deviation alert with standby 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby 0 to Full scale 12 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time
16. ting cooling control mix control The following shows the relation among the setting error and the operation of the CPU module CPU module RUN The temperature judgment and warning judgment are executed and the external output is executed Status Stop error The temperature judgment and warning judgment stop and The temperature judgment and The temperature the external output is turned off warning judgment depend on judgment and warning the stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed basic parameters in and the external output Application Setting and the is executed external output are turned off Operation of the RUN STOP_ The temperature judgment and The temperature The temperature judgment and The temperature CPU module warning judgment depend on the judgment and warning warning judgment depend on judgment and warning stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed the stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed basic parameters in Application and the external output basic parameters in and the external output Setting and the external output is executed Application Setting and the is executed are turned off external output are turned off Resetting The module is inoperative and does not execute external outputs nal control The following shows the relation among the setting error and the operation of the CPU module CPU modu
17. 211 Interrupt factor mask N 200005 210 Interrupt factor reset request n 210 Latest address of alarm history 203 Latest address of error history 202 Latest alarm code 000000005 202 Latest error code 2020000005 202 Lower limit deviation alert 69 M MAN mode shift completion flag 205 Manipulated value resolution change T for output with another analog module 216 f Memory s PID constants read completion flag 206 Temperature conversion completion flag 205 Memory s PID constants read write completion flag Temperature conversion completion flag Q compatible mode 0005 208 Q compatible mode rarna teens 205 Memory s PID constants write completion flag 207 Temperature conversion setting 259 Module READY flag 000 147 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Moving average processing setting 245 pripis Dette tent eee 216 Moving average processing setting monitor 204 Two position control 002 eee ee 15 N U Number of slave modules with inter module peak Upper limit deviation alert EEE EE TEE 69 current suppression function enabled 303 Upper lower limit deviation alert 70 Number of slave modules with inter module simultaneous temperature rise function enabled WwW est Ea E Ae tanaeat a ena guataratatgesie
18. Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value The setting range of the alert set value is Full scale of the input range to the full scale of the input range Page 68 Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter Lower limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or smaller than the alert set value the system issues a deviation alert Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A Set value sv Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value f 0 gt Time 0 r r gt Time Alert set value Alert status Alert status L Non alert status 7 J Alert status L Non alert status 7 Alert status 14 Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value The setting range of the alert set value is Full scale of the input range to the full scale of the input range Page 68 Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function 69 Upper lower limit deviation alert When one of the following conditions is satisfied the system issues a deviation alert e Deviation E gt Alert set value e Deviation E lt Alert set value Tem
19. disconnection disconnection detection dead detection dead band band 939 3ABH CH3 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting OO MOHA 940 3ACH CH3 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting O O0 0 941 3ADH CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting O O O 942 3AEH CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting COIG 943 3AFH CH3 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting Or VO mode selection mode mode selection mode selection selection 944 3BOH CH3 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting O O s error judgment error judgment error judgment error judgment time time time time 945 3B1H CH3 During AT loop System area During AT loop System area 0 Setting G E disconnection disconnection detection detection function enable function enable disable disable 946 3B2H CH3 AT bias AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting olol 947 3B3H CH3 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 0 Setting Oo backup setting backup setting backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID constants of PID of PID constants of PID constants constants 948 3B4H CH3 Self tuning System area Self tuning System area 0 Setting O O setting setting 949 3B5H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting OO O PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV sca
20. CH1 Direct reverse action setting Select whether to use CH1 with direct actions or reverse actions Select direct actions for the cooling control Select reverse actions for the heating control For details on the direct reverse action selection function refer to the following C5 Page 49 Direct reverse Action Selection Function 256 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Direct reverse action setting 515 715 915 1115 CHO Direct reverse action setting in the Q compatible mode 54 86 118 150 Setting range e 0 Direct action 1 Reverse action Default value The default value is Reverse action 1 CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting To prevent chattering of the transistor output in the two position control set the adjustment sensitivity dead band for the set value SV Temperature process vane PV Adjustment sensitivity dead band Set value SV gt i i i gt Time Transistor output OFF For details on the two position control refer to the following K Page 15 Control Method Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 516 716 916 1116 CHO Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting in the Q compatible mode 46 78 110 142 HSetting range
21. Un G306 Page 215 PID continuation flag CH1 PID control forced stop command YC Page 157 PID control forced stop command CH1 Stop mode setting Un G503 Page 247 CH1 Stop mode setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 21 9 Conditions to execute not to execute the temperature judgment The following table lists the conditions used to determine whether to execute the temperature judgment Executed O Not executed x Setting mode at power on Stop 0 Continue 1 Off On Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode during Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 operation ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Setting mode after Stop 0 Off On Stop 0 operation Monitor 1 Alert 2 Continue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 O O xX O O O xX O CO x O O OC x 1 For each timing refer to the following lt Page 155 Setting operation mode command When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 has been set to Unused 1 the temperature judgment is not executed even though the above conditions have been satisfied lt Page 246 CH1 Unused channel setting Temperature process value PV A detected temperature value to which the sensor correction has been executed is stored in this area The value to be stored differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Dec
22. X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Not divided OH taneous temperature rise group setting Set a group to execute the simultaneous temperature rise for each channel The simultaneous temperature rise function adjusts the simultaneous temperature rise completion time of the channels in the same group When the control mode is the heating cooling control or position proportional control this setting is ignored For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following C Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Simultaneous temperature rise group setting 553 753 953 1153 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise group setting in the Q compatible mode 730 746 762 778 ESetting range for the standard control e 0 No simultaneous temperature rise e 1 Group 1 selection e 2 Group 2 selection Setting range for the mix control only CH3 and CH4 0 No simultaneous temperature rise e 1 Simultaneous temperature rise 280 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Setting range for the standard control when the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function is enabled e 0 No simultaneous temperature rise e 1 Group 1 selection e 2 Group 2 selection e 3 Group 3 selection e 4 Group 4 selection e 5 Group 5 selection e 6 Group 6 selection e
23. 1 The disturbance suppression function does not operate because the deviation is less than 5 C 2 The disturbance suppression function operates because the deviation is 5 C or larger Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Disturbance judgment position 557 757 957 1157 CHO Disturbance judgment position in the Q compatible mode 1044 1060 1076 1092 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 283 HSetting range The setting range is Full scale of the input range to the full scale of the input range C F The setting range depends on the setting of CH1 Input range Un G51 The disturbance suppression function does not operate when 0 is set Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Point e When Automatic setting at input range change Un G302 has been set to Enable 1 changing the value in CH1 Input range Un G501 sets 0 in this area e When Automatic setting at input range change Un G302 has been set to Disable 0 the value in CH1 Disturbance judgment position Un G557 may be out of the setting range Default value The default value is 0 284 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buf
24. 275 Engineering tool aana saaa 12 Error addressee airea aaa eoa a eaa 202 Eroria g ee oraaa a a a 149 Error history cacou paa siena gaa aaa 305 Error reset command naasna naana 155 Expanded Modes masata spd sada a ia a E aa 14 Feed forward value memory read completion flag Sand a E e aap e n tal a aeaa A n a eb ae 209 Function extension bit monitor Q compatible mode aala ia 4 ii ie Sea a ia HA E 307 Hardware error flag n naaa naaa 149 Heater disconnection correction function selection r Gets a as E hala aan ade 294 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count 294 Heating cooling control 2005 13 HOLD CLEAR setting Q compatible mode 241 InpUtalert 4 pact ween dey ad taeda Pleat ees 67 Inter module peak current suppression function enable disable monitor 302 Inter module peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor 302 Inter module peak current suppression function state monitor 2 0002 00 eee 302 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable monitor 304 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor 304 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function state monitor 02 20000 eee eee 303 Interrupt factor detection flag Nn 203 Interrupt factor generation setting n
25. 276 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Precautions When this command has been set to Enable 1 do not execute the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the non volatile memory A e Changing a set value in a buffer memory area e Memory backup Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function Default setting registration gt Page 156 Default setting registration command e Changing the value to Disable 0 during the auto tuning CH1 Self tuning setting Set an operation of the self tuning in this area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following L Page 42 Self tuning Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Self tuning setting 548 748 948 1148 CHO Self tuning setting in the Q compatible mode 574 606 638 670 Setting range e 0 Do not execute ST e 1 Starting ST Only PID constants are calculated e 2 Starting ST Only simultaneous temperature rise parameters are calculated e 3 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameters are calculated e 4 Starting ST Vibration Only PID constants are calculated for both The values of CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 used by the simultaneous temperature rise function For details on the simultaneous temperature rise functio
26. C 100 to 199 When the output temperature unit is Fahrenheit F 200 to 299 Other analog modules such as an A D converter When the unit is digit module are used e Setting value R 0 to 1700 C 1 1 1700 0 0 to 3000 F 1 105 3000 0 K 0 to 1300 ge 1 2 default value 1300 0 0 to 500 C 1 11 500 0 0 to 800 G 1 12 800 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 36 4000 0 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 38 4000 2000 0 0 to 500 0 ge 0 1 40 5000 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 41 8000 0 200 0 to 1300 0 C 0 1 49 13000 2000 0 to 1000 F 1 100 1000 0 0 to 2400 F 1 101 2400 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 130 10000 0 242 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas J 0 to 1200 C 1 3 1200 0 0 to 500 C 1 13 500 0 0 to 800 C 1 14 800 0 0 0 to 400 0 ka 0 1 37 4000 0 0 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 42 5000 0 0 0 to 800 0 C 0 1 43 8000 0 200 0 to 1000 0 C 0 1 50 10000 2000 0 to 1000 oF 1 102 1000 0 0 to 1600 oF 1 103 1600 0 0 to 2100 F 1 104 2100 0 0 0 to 1000 0 F 0 1 131 10000 0 T 200 to 400 C 1 4 400 200 0 to 200 C 1 19 200 0 0 to 400 C 1 20 400 0 200 to 200 C 1 21 200 200 200 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 39 4000 2000 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 45 4000 0 300 to 400 F 1 110 400 300 0 to 700 oF 1 109 700 0 0 0 to 700 0 F 0 1 132 7000 0 S 0 to 1700 eC 1 15 1
27. Page 153 Setting change completion flag 16 Turn on and off Setting change command YB lt Page 157 Setting change command 17 Shift the mode to the operation mode Turn off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 Page 155 Setting operation mode command 18 Check that the ERR LED is off When the ERR LED cannot be turned off retry the setting from Step 4 or 9 Point e When a CHO Sensor two point correction setting error error code 1A AOH occurs during the sensor two point correction correctly configure the setting for the sensor two point correction The value set for the sensor two point correction when an error occurred is not written to the temperature control module To use the value set for the sensor two point correction even after the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cleared turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 1 FUNCTIONS 61 1 19 Sensor Correction Function 1 20 Primary Delay Digital Filter By setting the primary delay digital filter a temperature process value PV with smoothed transient noise can be output Temperature a When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is not set 1 Time Temperature a When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is set Time Set the time for the temperature process value PV to change by 63 3 in the primary delay digital filter Temperatu
28. System area en me AOH to A3H 164 A4H All Alert dead band setting 5 Setting m coe 165 A5H All Number of alert delay 0 Setting O 166 A6H All Heater disconnection output off time current error System area 3 Setting O detection delay count 167 A7H All Temperature rise completion range setting 1 Setting Or MRO e A 168 A8H All Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting OF Or 169 A9H All PID continuation flag 0 Setting Or On I Ti 170 AAH All Heater disconnection correction function selection System area 0 Setting GG 171 to 174 System area So Sn ABH to AEH 175 AFH All Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 0 Setting On Os i 176 BOH All CT monitor method selection System area 0 Setting 177 B1H CH1 Manipulated Manipulated value for heating System area 0 Monitor value MV for MVh for output with another output with analog module another analog module 178 B2H CH2 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor 2 value MV for value for value for output with heating MVh heating MVh another analog for output with for output with module another analog another analog module module 179 B3H CH3 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor SS PS value MV for value for value MV for output with heating MVh output with another analog for output with another analog module another analog module modul
29. yy 248H to 253H 596 254H CH2 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop 0 Setting O JO J 597 to 604 System area S eee 255H to 25CH 605 25DH CH2 ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor IO temperature rise parameter calculation flag 606 25EH CH2 Self tuning System area 0 Setting O O setting 607 25FH CH2 Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor IO 608 260H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting 1O O O O 609 261H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 610 262H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JIO APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 611 263H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 612 264H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 613 265H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor 614 266H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 615 267H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor
30. 431 d to control methods CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting in the R mode 439 Fix the setting to 0 0 to the full scale of the input range C F CH1 Integral time l setting in the R mode 432 A set value is ignored Fix the setting to 0 1 to 3600 s CH1 Derivative time D setting in the R mode 433 A set value is ignored A set value is ignored Fix the setting to 0 1 to 3600 s 1 to 3600 s CH1 Manual reset amount setting 517 A set value is ignored Hin the standard control or heating cooling A set value is ignored control Setting range 1000 to 1000 100 0 to 100 0 in increments of 0 1 Default value 0 0 The temperature control module automatically sets optimum PID constants when the following functions are used e Auto Tuning Function 5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function e Self Tuning Function lt 3 Page 42 Self tuning Function 1 FUNCTIONS 2 4 1 2 Control Method 22 1 3 Sampling Cycle Switching Function In the temperature control module a measured temperature value is stored into CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 every sampling cycle In addition the use of the primary delay digital filter smoothens the temperature process value PV and its drastic change can be absorbed Sampling cycle Select 250ms or 500ms as a sampling cycle HHow to set the sampling cycle
31. CHO Feed forward control READY flag in the Q compatible mode 1458 1459 1460 1461 Turning off CH1 Feed forward control READY flag Un G417 At the following timing CH1 Feed forward control READY flag Un G417 turns off e At power on e During the disturbance suppression e When the action conditions of the disturbance suppression function have not been satisfied e When the temperature process value PV has responded in a reverse direction of the disturbance judgment position and goes outside the disturbance judgment width e When the setting of CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 is changed from No automatic setting 0 to Automatic setting 1 The tuning is executed on the disturbance after the change mPrecautions This function uses a noise filter to avoid a false detection for the disturbance judgment Thus if the temperature fluctuation caused by disturbance is steep in terms of time the disturbance judgment may delay APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 231 CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag When the deviation E enters the disturbance judgment position and the temperature process value PV is judged to be stable enough It may take about 60 seconds to judge the stability while the action conditions of the disturbance suppression function have been satisfied this flag turns on For details on the disturbance suppression function refer to the following K Page 111 Distu
32. E Auto tuning i Loop disconnection detection dead band setting j AT bias setting E Temperature rise completion j Auto tuning mode selection E Simultaneous temperature rise Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PF Auto tuning j Enable disable the loop disconnection detection f j Auto tuning mode selection AT abnormal completion judement time Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of Pi Disturbance suppuression function e a 1 Select Temperature trace of Temperature Control Module and click the OK button 2 Select the module to configure the temperature control setting and click the OK button 3 Select Monitor data write from the following XZ Setting gt Monitor data write 4 Select the parameter to be changed from Add to to click the button 5 The parameter is added in View 6 Click the OK button 1 FUNCTIONS 37 1 11 Auto Tuning Function 38 Name Color Value Parameter CH1Temperature process value PV a oc 7 FF CH2Temperature process value PV a we ooo CH8Temperature process value PV a OC CH4Temperature process value PV a e CH ITarget value S V setting a 50 C setting a ive CH8Tareet value S setting E 0C CH4Tareet value S V setting a ike CH1Loop disconn
33. Feed forward control forced start status System area 0 Monitor O 1451 5ABH CH2 Feed forward control forced start Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O status control forced start status 1452 5ACH CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O control forced control forced control forced start status start status start status 1453 5ADH CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O control forced control forced control forced start status start status start status 1454 5AEH CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag System area 0 Monitor O 1455 5AFH CH2 Feed forward value tuning flag Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O value tuning flag 1456 5BOH CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O value tuning flag value tuning value tuning flag flag 1457 5B1H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O value tuning flag value tuning value tuning flag flag 1458 5B2H CH1 Feed forward control READY flag System area 0 Monitor 1459 5B3H CH2 Feed forward control READY flag Feed forward System area 0 Monitor control READY flag 1460 5B4H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor control READY control READY control READY flag flag flag 1461 5B5H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor control READY control READY control READY flag flag flag 1462 5B6H
34. Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters PI control PI control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to P control and thereby corrects an offset remaining deviation that remains when the temperature is stable By setting the integral time 1 properly the temperature process value PV matches with the set value SV Setting method in the R mode Set each item as follows CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Any value 7 Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Any value lt 5 Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 Any value Page 235 CH1 Integral time I setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 0 Os lt Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting Setting method in the Q compatible mode Set each item as follows e Proportion Belt P Setting Any value e Integration Time I Setting Any value Differentiation Time D Setting Os T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters PD control PD control is a control method in which the derivative time D is set in addition to P control The control mechanism is the same as P control Set
35. Un G518 AT Bias of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting Unused channel setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Cold Junction Temperature Compensation Selection in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Auto Tuning Function 39 Out of the temperature measuring range If CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 exceeds the temperature measuring range CH1 Input range upper limit Un G401 bO or CH1 Input range lower limit Un G401 b1 is on the auto tuning ends in failure Time for the temperature process value PV to reach the set value SV for the first time or a half cycle of the hunting of the temperature process value PV When the following time exceeds the value set for Auto tuning forced termination time setting of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting the auto tuning ends in failure Time from the start of the auto tuning until CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 reaches the set value SV for the first time A half cycle of the hunting of CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 Calculation value of PID constants after auto tuning in the R mode When a calculation value of PID constants after auto tuning exceeds one of the following ranges the auto tuning ends in failure e CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 0 1 to the full scale of the input range C F e CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 1 to 3600 s e CH1
36. When 0 is set overshoots are not suppressed Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting The temperature process value PV are smoothed and sudden changes are absorbed by using the primary delay digital filter Temperature A When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature a When the primary delay process value PV digital filter is set gt Time The time for the temperature process value PV to change by 63 3 can be set by the primary delay digital filter setting filter setting time Temperature A process value PV When the primary delay digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature A i process value PV i When the primary delay digital filter is set i i i 1 gt Time gt t 1 1 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G563 288 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Primary delay digital filter setting 563 763 963 1163 CHO Primary delay digital filter setting in the Q compatible mode 48 80 112 144 ESetting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 100 1 to 100s When 0 is set the primary delay digital filter processing is not executed Default value The default value is 0 The primary delay digital filter processing is disabled 11 Sensor corr
37. e Manipulated value resolution change for output with another analog module Un G308 Page 216 Manipulated value resolution change for output with another analog module When the device that executes heating or cooling can receive only analog inputs use other analog modules such as a D A converter module to convert digital inputs to analog output values Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module 407 607 807 1007 CHO Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module in the Q 177 178 179 180 compatible mode 224 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas f value for heating MVh for output with another analog module The values storedi in inthe following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules on the system such as a D A A converter module and stored in this buffer memory area CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh 403 Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh For details on this area refer to the following K Page 224 CH1 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh for output with another analog 407 607 807 1007 module CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh for output with another analog 177 178 179 1
38. interrupt pointer Specify an interrupt pointer number to start when an interrupt factor is detected For details on interrupt pointers refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application 124 1 FUNCTIONS 1 40 Interrupt Function Point e When Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 has been set to Disable 0 no interrupt request is sent to the CPU module e To reset an interrupt factor set Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 to Reset request 1 until Interrupt factor detection flag n Un G5 to Un G20 changes to No interrupt factor 0 Interrupt factors are reset only when Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 changes from No reset request 0 to Reset request 1 e The same setting of Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 can be set to multiple interrupt pointers When an interrupt of Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 that has been set to multiple interrupt pointers occurs interrupt programs are executed following the priority of the interrupt pointers For the priority of interrupt pointers refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application e When Condition target channel setting n Un G264 to Un G279 has been set to All channels 0 an interrupt detection target has been set to each channel of Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 and alerts occur in mu
39. setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 152 98H CH4 Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 153 99H System area 154 9AH CH4 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting disconnection disconnection alert setting alert setting APPENDICES 186 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 155 9BH CH4 Loop System area Loop System area 480 Setting O O disconnection disconnection detection detection judgment time judgment time 156 9CH CH4 Loop System area Loop System area 0 Setting O O disconnection disconnection detection dead detection dead band band 157 9DH CH4 Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel 0 Setting Or Oo setting setting setting setting 158 9EH CH4 Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Setting VO constants read constants read constants read constants read command command command command 159 9FH CH4 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 0 Setting Oe a backup setting backup setting backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID constants of PID of PID constants of PID constants constants 160 to 163
40. 0 ccc eens 52 1 18 Setting Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function 0 0 cece eee eee 53 1 19 Sensor Correction FUNCTION 2 6 6 0 0 00 ec ee eee eee eee ee eae ee ed Rew ee ee 54 1 20 Primary Delay Digital Filter 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 62 1 21 Moving Average Processing 0 00 ccc ee eee eee 63 1 22 Scaling Function 3 0s ccc0cie creases ceee s tee pence see eeeeeeeber E choca teeisenee eds 63 1 23 ON Delay Output Function o c5 5 ccoce seks poweb sede se ap emienbc agen be poids bbe Ow rE 65 1 24 Input output with Another Analog Module Function 0 00 c eee eee eee 66 1 25 Aler FUNCHON 32 20 8ccccceniin hee oe ede eh eee EE ee a ee OR PE ee eee eee 67 1 26 Rate Alarm FUN Ctionl s scebboikseeresi eee dae eee eee eed es eam em nee eee Ea E 77 1 27 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 00 cee eee eee eee eee 81 1 28 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function 00 0 cee eee eee eee 85 1 29 Loop Disconnection Detection Function 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 86 1 30 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function 0 000 e eee eee eee 88 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function 00 0 cece ec eee eee eee 90 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 0c cece cette eee 95 1 33 Inter module Link Function 000 cece eee eee eee teen eee eeee 106 Inter module peak current suppression function 1 2 2 0 tees 106 Inter module simultane
41. 20030 Information Online module change The online module change has been executed 20100 Information Error clear An error clear request has been issued 1 FUNCTIONS 1 39 Event History Function 1 23 1 40 Interrupt Function This function starts an interrupt program of the CPU module when an interrupt factor such as an error alarm or a shutoff of the external power supply is detected Up to 16 interrupt pointers per module can be used in the temperature control module Operation Detection of interrupt factors When an interrupt factor occurs an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module at the same time as Interrupt factor detection flag n Un G5 to Un G20 is turned to Interrupt factor 1 Resetting an interrupt factor When Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 corresponding to a generated interrupt factor is set to Reset request 1 the specified interrupt factor is reset and Interrupt factor detection flag n Un G5 to Un G20 is set to No interrupt factor 0 Setting method To use the interrupt function set Condition target Channel specification target Interrupt factor transaction setting and Interrupt pointer with the engineering tool After configuring the settings write the project and enable the settings T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Interrupt setting The following table lists the items in the Inter
42. 249 F9H CH4 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting Or OF Ory 250 FAH CH4 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting OO Or 251 FBH CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting Or Ox O 252 FCH CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting OHONO 253 to 255 System area Se Se S FDH to FFH 256 100H CT1 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor SS Oo 257 101H CT2 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor e 258 102H CT3 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor 259 103H CT4 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor Oo 260 104H CT5 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor _ O 261 105H CT6 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor SS 12 262 106H CT7 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor Sees fee iG 263 107H CT8 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor SS iO 264 108H CT1 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting 265 109H CT2 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting OO 266 10AH CT3 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting Oe Or fr 267 10BH CT4 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting Qe ee 268 10CH CT5 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting Or Or i 269 10DH CT6 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting IO 270 10EH CT7 CT input channel as
43. 754 2F2H CH3 System area Cooling control System area 30 17 Setting output cycle 300 18 setting 755 2F3H CH3 System area Overlap dead System area 0 Setting band setting 756 2F4H CH3 Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset System area 0 Setting amount setting amount setting amount setting 757 2F5H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling function enable function enable function enable function enable disable setting disable setting disable setting disable setting 758 2F6H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling lower limit value lower limit lower limit value lower limit value value 759 2F7H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling upper limit value upper limit upper limit value upper limit value value 760 2F8H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Monitor PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling value value value value 761 2F9H CH3 Derivative Derivative Derivative System area 0 Setting action selection action action selection selection APPENDICES 194 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas
44. CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Un G512 Page 254 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Page 255 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter When a value out of the setting range is set in this area an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs and the following operations will be executed Error flag X2 turns on An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Proportional band P setting Set the proportional band P to execute the PID control The proportional band P is the deviation width of the deviation E necessary for the manipulated value MV to vary within the range of 0 to 100 In a proportional action the relation between changes in the deviation E and the manipulated value MV can be expressed as follows MV K E Kp is a proportional gain The following formula shows the proportional band P 1 P K e 100 P When the value of the proportional band P increases the proportional gain Kp decreases Therefore the variation of the manipulated value MV becomes small compared to the variation of the
45. Full scale to Full scale 13 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time 0 to Full scale 15 Upper limit deviation alert set value SV used Full scale to Full scale 16 Lower limit deviation alert set value SV used 17 Upper lower limit deviation alert set value SV used 0 to Full scale 18 Within range alert set value SV used 19 Upper limit deviation alert with standby set value SV used Full scale to Full scale 20 Lower limit deviation alert with standby set value SV used 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby set value SV used 0 to Full scale 22 Upper limit deviation alert with standby second time set value SV Full scale to Full scale used 23 Lower limit deviation alert with standby second time set value SV used 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with standby second time set 0 to Full scale value SV used Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs and the temperature control module operates with the previous values Turning on and off Setting change command YB after the occurrence of an error and setting a value within the range operate the temperature control module with the
46. Latest address of error history Latest address of error history in the Q compatible mode 1536 The latest alarm code detected by the temperature control module is stored For details refer to the following lt Page 143 List of Alarm Codes Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Latest alarm code Latest alarm code in the Q compatible mode 1538 202 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas larm history Among Alarm history Un G3760 to Un G3919 the buffer memory address where the latest alarm code has been stored is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Latest address of alarm history 4 Latest address of alarm history in the Q compatible mode 1539 p tion flag n The detection status of an interrupt factor is stored 0 No interrupt factor 1 Interrupt factor When an interrupt factor occurs an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module at the same time as Interrupt factor detection flag n Un G5 to Un G20 is turned to Interrupt factor 1 n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Interrupt factor detection flag 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 n Interrupt factor detection flag 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 30
47. MV Un G403 e CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh Un G403 e CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Un G408 For details refer to the following K Page 66 Output Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Manipulated value resolution change for output with another analog module 308 Manipulated value resolution change for output with another analog module in 181 the Q compatible mode Setting range e 0 0 to 4000 e 1 0 to 12000 e 2 0 to 16000 e 3 0 to 20000 e 4 0 to 32000 The manipulated values MV to which the resolutions have been reflected are stored in the following buffer memory areas e CH1 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G407 e CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh for output with another analog module Un G407 e CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module Un G409 Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 0 to 4000 0 21 6 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Sc Id junction temperature compensation selection Select whether to execute the cold junction temperature compensation with standard terminal blocks terminal block converter A module for temperatu
48. Month day 131H Hour minute 1234H Second 56H Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code 6H Sunday 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 and Saturday 6 Millisecond upper Stored in BCD code 7H Millisecond lower 89H 1 Value stored when an error occurs at 12 34 56 789 on Saturday January 31 2015 The start address of the error history where the latest error has been stored can be checked in Latest address of error history Un G2 The start address of the alarm history where the latest alarm has been stored can be checked in Latest address of alarm history Un G4 120 1 FUNCTIONS 1 38 Error History Function When the third error occurred The third error is stored in Error history No 3 and 3620 the start address of Error history No 3 is stored in Latest address of error history Un G2 Latest address of error history Un G2 3620 Un G3600 Error history No 1 Liserr Error history No 2 m Error history No 3 Un G3610 _Un G3620 Empty Un G3750 Error history No 16 Empty 1 FUNCTIONS 1 38 Error History Function 1 21 When the 17th error occurred The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and 3600 the start address of Error history No 1 is stored in Latest address of error history Un G2 Latest address of error history Un G2 3600
49. O O O 550 226H CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value 0 Setting O O O 551 227H CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value 0 Setting O IO IO 552 228H CH1 Peak current System area 0 Setting O O O suppression control group setting 553 229H CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting 1O O O O temperature rise group setting 554 22AH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting 1O O O temperature rise gradient data 555 22BH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O temperature rise dead time 162 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 556 22CH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO temperature rise AT mode selection 557 22DH CH1 Disturbance judgment position System area 0 Setting O O IO 558 22EH CH1 Set value return adjustment System area 0 Setting O IO 559 22FH CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal System area 0 Setting O 560 230H CH1 Feed forward value System area 0 Setting O IO 561 231H CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection System area 0 Setting O 562 232H CH1 Overshoot suppression level setting 0 Setting O IO 563 233H
50. Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Interrupt reissue request 0 Set the factor to detect interrupts 0 Disable Error flag Hardware error flag Temperature rise completion flag Temperature conversion completion flag Alert definition Input error Alert definition Rate alarm Alert definition Alert 1 Alert definition Alert 2 Alert definition Alert 3 Alert definition Alert 4 oo N OD Om A WwW Dh Alert definition Heater disconnection including output off time current errors N Alert definition Loop disconnection The R60TCTRT2TT2BW and R60TCRT4BW only When a value other than the above has been set a condition target setting range error error code 181 AH occurs When an input signal X or buffer memory area set in Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 turns on an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 APPENDICES 214 4 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Condition target setting n 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 Condition target setting n in the Q compatible mode Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command
51. System area Control motor 10 Setting time 929 3A1H CH3 System area Integration 1500 Setting output limiter setting APPENDICES 170 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 930 3A2H CH3 System area Valve operation 0 Setting 0O Ory setting during CPU module STOP 931 3A3H CH3 Alert dead band Alert dead band Alert dead band Alert dead band 5 Setting On Os setting setting gt setting setting 932 3A4H CH3 Number of alert Number of alert Number of alert Number of alert 0 Setting OL Oe p delay delay delay delay 933 3A5H CH3 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting oO O setting setting 4 5 setting setting 934 3A6H CH3 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting Or Or ee setting setting 4 5 setting setting 4 9 935 3A7H CH3 Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting OOS setting setting 4 5 setting setting 9 936 3A8H CH3 Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting On WO Or setting setting 4 5 setting setting 9 937 3A9H CH3 Loop System area Loop System area 480 Setting OP O ra disconnection disconnection detection detection judgment time judgment time 938 3AAH CH3 Loop System area Loop System area 0 Setting O Oh
52. band setting band setting 111 6FH CH3 Control output Heating control Control output System area 30 17 Setting O Jo j J cycle setting output cycle cycle setting 300 8 setting 112 70H CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting Or Or o 113 71H CH3 Control Control Control Control 0 Setting Or Or response response response response parameter parameter parameter parameter gt 114 72H CH3 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting OO fee pe mode shift mode shift mode shift 115 73H CH3 MAN output MAN output MAN output System area 0 Setting OIO setting setting setting 116 74H CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O O rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter setting variation setting variation setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature rise 1 rise 1 rise 1 rise 117 75H CH3 AT bias AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting o lo 118 76H CH3 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse Direct reverse 1 Setting OO action setting action setting action setting 119 77H CH3 Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting OP Or setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 120 78H CH3 Lower limit Lower li
53. e 1 Disable Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Disable 1 H1 Rate alarm alert detection cycle Set the checking cycle of the temperature process value PV at the occurrence of a rate alarm Set the frequency of checks in increments of sampling cycles The checking cycle can be calculated by the following formula e Rate alarm alert detection cycle Set value of Rate alarm alert detection cycle x Sampling cycle Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Rate alarm alert detection cycle 540 740 940 1140 CHO Rate alarm alert detection cycle in the Q compatible mode 202 218 234 250 Setting range The setting range is 1 to 6000 times Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 1 check the value every sampling cycle 1 Rate alarm upper limit value Set the rate alarm upper limit value Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Rate alarm upper limit value 541 741 941 1141 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value in the Q compatible mode 203 219 235 251 Setting r
54. gt FF control PID control 1 PID control no return adjustment 2 Return adjustment value Small 3 Return adjustment value Large 412 1 FUNCTIONS 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function Parameters and buffer memory addresses The following shows the parameters and buffer memory addresses to be set in the disturbance suppression function Disturbance judging position of Disturbance suppression function in Application Setting Set value SV restitution adjustment of Disturbance suppression function in Application Setting CH1 Feed forward value Un G560 Page 286 CH1 Feed forward value CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 45 Page 287 CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Setting method 1 Set Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting and PID constants XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters For the setting calculation of PID constants the auto tuning can be executed 2 Set Disturbance judging position and Set value SV restitution adjustment of Disturbance suppression function in Application Setting XD Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Disturbance suppression function Set the deviation Set value SV Process value PV for Disturbance
55. has been set to 10 s and CH1 Integration output limiter setting Un G529 has been set to 1000 100 0 the operation is as follows if the opposite side output close side output is turned on while the open side output ON time is being integrated The close side integrated value is expressed in the ratio of the close side output ON time to the control motor time Close side integrated value Close side output ON time Control motor time x 100 Open side output Open side output Close side output 2 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds Reset of the open side integrated value open side integrated gt Stop gt open side integrated gt Stop gt The close side integrated value newly value 30 value 80 becomes 20 264 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Integration output limiter setting 529 729 929 1129 CHO Integration output limiter setting in the Q compatible mode 1042 1058 1074 1090 Setting range Set a value within the range of 0 to 2000 0 0 to 200 0 for the setting value of CH1 Control motor time Un G528 0 0 Integration output limiter function OFF Default value The default value is 1500 150 0 Set the AT of the open side output and close side output of when the control stops STOP Buffer m
56. used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws connector screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification parameter change forced output or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so
57. 0 1s or 1s as the unit of the transistor output ON OFF cycle e 0 1s cycle e 1 0 1s cycle Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Control output cycle unit selection setting 304 Default value The default value is 1s cycle 0 When the control output cycle unit has been changed the control output cycle setting heating control output cycle setting and cooling control output cycle setting are overwritten with their default values A set value discrepancy error control output cycle unit selection setting error code 1920H occurs right after the control output cycle unit selection setting change To clear the error turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and register the parameter after the change in the non volatile memory iverage processing setting Set whether to enable or disable the moving average processing e 0 Enable e 1 Disable Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Moving average processing setting 305 Default value The default value is 0 PID continuation flag Set the operation status at the time when the mode has shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode when Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off For details on the relation between the setting of this flag and the control status refer to the following e PID control 5 Page
58. 1 i I 1 i i Li i i 1 I gt Time i Y i i 1 i aes gt boo a a a a 1 1 1 Do 1 1 M AT start 1 When the process value PV exceeds the set value SV the elapsed time is cleared and monitoring continues Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Auto tuning error judgment time 544 744 944 1144 CHO Auto tuning error judgment time in the Q compatible mode 1049 1065 1081 1097 HSetting range The setting range is 1 to 120 min Default value The default value is 120 min me Juring AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable Set whether to enable or disable the loop disconnection detection function during auto tuning AT For details on the during AT loop disconnection detection function refer to the following lt Page 88 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable 545 745 945 1145 HSetting range 0 Disable 1 Enable Default value The default value is Disable 0 274 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode set whether to enable or disable the loop disconnection detection function during auto tuning AT A For detail
59. 100 0A 3 In the Q compatible mode this setting is enabled only when CT1 CT selection Un G2046 has been set to CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 Page 298 CT1 CT selection Page 299 CT1 CT selection Q compatible mode Correspondence between each CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT1 2062 288 CT2 2063 289 CT3 2064 290 CT4 2065 291 CTS 2066 292 CT6 2067 293 CT7 2068 294 CT8 2069 295 HSetting range The setting range is 600 to 9999 Default value The default value is 800 APPENDICES 301 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas fe dule peak current suppression function state monitor The status of the inter module peak current suppression function can be checked The status of the inter module peak current suppression function of the channel corresponding to each bit is stored e 0 Stop e 1 In execution b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 O CH4CH3 CH2 CH1 Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Inter module peak current suppression function state monitor 2100 Inter module peak current suppression function state monitor in the Q 1280 compatible mode o dule peak current suppression function enable disable monitor Whether the inter module peak current suppression function is enabled or disabled can be checked 0 Disable e 1 Enable For de
60. 20 Lower limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value 22 Upper limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value 23 Lower limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value 1 FUNCTIONS 71 1 25 Alert Function 72 Even though the temperature process value PV or deviation E has been in an alert status when the mode is shifted from the setting mode to the operation mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned off and on this condition is ignored and no alert occurs The alert function can be disabled until the temperature process value PV or deviation E goes out of the condition in which an alert occurs When the alert mode has been set to Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait Deviation E Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 Temperature process value PV set value SV 1 A 0 gt Time 0 gt Time Alert set value Alert set value A i Wait operation region l Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status 14 Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value Page 68
61. 244 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas BResolution The resolution is applied to the values stored and the values set in particular buffer memory areas as described in the following table Resolution Stored value Setting value 1 A value in increments of 1 C F or digit is stored Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit 0 1 A value in increments of 0 1 C F or digit the value multiplied Set a value in increments of 0 1 C F or digit the value by 10 is stored multiplied by 10 For the buffer memory areas to which this setting is applied refer to the following K Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position When the input range automatic change setting has been set to Enable 1 Automatic setting at input range change in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b0 in the Q compatible mode When the input range is changed the following buffer memory areas are set automatically depending on a selected temperature sensor Set the buffer memory areas again if necessary CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Un G511 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Un G512 CH1 Set value SV setting Un G430 CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 only R mode CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 only R mode CH1 Alert set value 1 Un G434 CH1 Alert set value 2 Un G435 CH1 Alert set value 3 Un G436 CH1 Alert set value 4 Un G437 CH1 Cooling proportiona
62. 39 27H All Automatic setting monitor at input range change 0 Monitor SS 40 28H All Setting variation rate limiter setting selection monitor 0 Monitor SS St 41 29H All Control output cycle unit monitor System area 0 Monitor SSS 42 2AH All Moving average processing setting monitor 0 Monitor SSS 43 2BH All Temperature conversion completion flag 0 Monitor 0 44 2CH All MAN mode shift completion flag System area 0 Monitor fo 45 2DH All Cold junction temperature process value 0 Monitor 46 2EH All Memory s PID constants read completion flag 0 Monitor S yp 47 2FH All Memory s PID constants write completion flag 0 Monitor SS a n 48 30H All Feed forward value memory read completion flag System area 0 Monitor SS a a 49 to 123 System area 31H to 7BH 124 to 139 All Interrupt factor mask n 0 Setting SS 7CH to 8BH 140 to 155 System area SS a 8CH to 9BH 156 to 171 All Interrupt factor reset request n 0 Setting 9CH to ABH 172 to 199 System area SSeS ae ir ACH to C7H 200 to 215 All Interrupt factor generation setting n 0 Setting SS Or C8H to D7H 216 to 231 System area D8H to E7H 232 to 247 All Condition target setting n 0 Setting oO E8H to F7H 248 to 263 System area S S F8H to 107H 264 to 279 All Condition target channel setting n 0 Setting Se 108H to 117H APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 159
63. 7D0H All Heater disconnection output off time current error System area 3 Setting O IO detection delay count 4 2001 7D1H All Heater disconnection correction function selection System area 0 Setting O JO J 2002 7D2H All CT monitor method selection 4 System area 0 Setting O lo J 2003 7D3H System area a a a es E 2004 7D4H CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 4 System area 0 Setting O IO 2005 7D5H CH1 Heater disconnection judgment mode System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2006 7D6H System area SS SS a 2007 7D7H CH2 Heater disconnection alert System area System area 0 Setting O setting 14 2008 7D8H CH2 Heater disconnection judgment System area System area 0 Setting O IO JO mode 2009 7D9H System area SS S a Ea 2010 7DAH CH3 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting O IO disconnection disconnection alert setting 4 alert setting 4 2011 7DBH CH3 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting O IO JO disconnection disconnection judgment mode judgment mode 2012 7DCH System area SHS S S Ea 2013 7DDH CH4 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting O IO disconnection disconnection alert setting 4 alert setting 4 2014 7DEH CH4 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting O IO JIO disconnection di
64. 923 1123 Setting range e OH Air cooling 1H Water cooling e 2H Linear Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Air cooling OH CH1 Cooling method setting Q compatible mode Set a cooling control method in the heating cooling control Select a cooling method suitable for cooling characteristics of devices The following figure shows the channel assignment of this buffer memory area b15 to b12 b11 to b8 amp b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 For details on the cooling method setting function refer to the following K Page 30 Cooling Method Setting Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling method setting in the Q compatible mode 719 Setting range e OH Air cooling e 1H Water cooling e 2H Linear APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 261 Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Air cooling OH H1 Ic band setting Configure the overlap dead band setting For details on the overlap dead band function refer to the following lt Page 25 Overlap dead Band Function Buffer memory address The following shows t
65. A aA 134 When the RUN LED flashes or turns Off 0 2 teens 134 Whenithe ERR LED turns O s 24 06 s csccee bee see ceed eed bd Oke eee EEE tee ee ee ea 134 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes 0 00 0 00 cece cette eee 135 When the HBA LED turns on 1 2 0 0 eee ne nee Eaa i r 135 3 2 Checking the Modulle Status 05 cc s c0 dagoeereecciccd sei gop gre pine n E e a E Ee D 136 3 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom 0 c ccc eee eee eee eee eens 137 3 4 Listof Error COGGS 3c cvacscitn ha ee eae te Se ie eae et ee Ree a eee eae EE 139 3 5 Listof Alarm CodeS aie cscte kite eiid a hate Sanh code ea E E emanate ema g E E E a E ete ata a Ea 143 APPENDICES 144 Appendix 1 Module Label lt i ic0c 2 000 sn oie eeees iedeen eee oe eee Es Cee ee Cee eee eels 144 Appendix 2 VO Sig al ix so occe sedis cite e ce eee eee ein eo a eee eee ace ee ad ete 146 histor O SignalS i44 tacietad eaa E hontai ea the edad aa dd dees abet 146 Details of input signalS c2 sions eee ee ka tered eu On ea dee RDA RE ee ee eee 147 Details of OUtputSigQnalS cccccacn pea dreeaeeede ded orbs FRR pene Greg ae eae AAG e ee Pee 155 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory AreaS 00 0c cece eee eee eee 158 List of buffer memory addresses 1 0 eee ee 158 Details of buffer memory addresses 0 0 0 0c nent ees 202 Appendix 4 PIDecciccecciccenembineawekeeemeeue ne choke aed ee enema dened Rema ee eerie nes 310 PIDiCONMHOL cainnt eke dee da Gare ad Hah E
66. Buffer Memory Areas 173 1037 40DH CH4 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 Alert set value 0 Control 45 4 9 1038 40EH CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Control process value process value process value process value PV for input PV for input PV for input PV for input with another with another with another with another analog module analog module analog module analog module 1039 40FH CH4 System area Cooling System area System area 30 Control proportional band Pc setting 5 1040 410H CH4 Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Control constants read constants read constants read constants read command command gt command command 1041 411H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Control value memory value memory value memory read command read read command command gt 1042 to 1099 System area 412H to 44BH 1100 44CH CH4 HOLD CLEAR setting 0 Setting 1101 44DH CH4 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting 7 TCRT 1102 44EH CH4 Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel 0 Setting setting setting setting setting 1103 44FH CH4 Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting setting setting setting setting 1104 450H CH4 Control output Heating control Control output System are
67. CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 Page 246 CH1 Unused channel setting Setting operation mode command Y1 Page 155 Setting operation mode command PID continuation flag Un G306 5 Page 215 PID continuation flag CH1 PID control forced stop command YC lt Page 157 PID control forced stop command CH1 HOLD CLEAR setting Un G500 15 Page 241 CH1 HOLD CLEAR setting For details refer to the following PID control Page 19 Condition to execute the PID control Temperature judgment Page 219 CH1 Alert definition Alert judgment Page 74 Condition for alert judgment Default value The default value is Monitor 1 The default value is Monitor 1 Thus sensor input disconnections are detected in channels to which no temperature sensors have been connected and the ALM LED flashes When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 has been set to Unused 1 control in CH1 is not executed For the channels to which no temperature sensors have been connected set CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 to Unused 1 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 247 i ut cycle setting Set the pulse cycle ON OFF cycle of the transistor output Manipulated value MV FF Transistor output 9 Control output cycle The ON time of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated value MV calculated by a PID operati
68. CHO Close side transistor output flag 410 610 810 1010 CHO Close side transistor output flag in the Q compatible mode 712 713 714 715 1 In GX Works3 CHO Cooling transistor output flag is displayed as the sample comment of CHO Close side transistor output flag CH1 Self tuning flag The execution status of the self tuning can be monitored in this area For details on the self tuning function refer to the following Page 42 Self tuning Function b15 to b10 b9 b8 b7 to b2 b1 bO o lololo o o lolo lo olo o y T v F Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 One of the following values is stored in each bit e 0 Off e 1 On bO PID auto correction This bit turns on after PID constants are corrected by the This bit turns off after one of the following operations is status self tuning executed b1 Simultaneous This bit turns on after the simultaneous temperature rise When Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned temperature rise parameters are corrected by the self tuning onang off and the made shifts to the setingmode parameter correction When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 is set to status Unused 1 When CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is turned off and on e When CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 is set to Do not execute ST 0 This bit turns off in the following cases as well e When the self tuning has started
69. CT7 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O IO 2061 80DH CT8 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O IO 2062 80EH CT1 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 2063 80FH CT2 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 2064 810H CT3 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 2065 811H CT4 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 2066 812H CT5 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O O 2067 813H CT6 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O O 2068 814H CT7 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O O 2069 815H CT8 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O 0 2070 to 2099 System area SSS 816H to 833H 2100 834H All Inter module System area 0 Monitor IO peak current suppression function state monitor 2101 835H All Inter module System area 0 Monitor I gt peak current suppression function enable disable monitor 4 78 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 2102 836H All Inter module System area Monitor SS lS o peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor 2103 837H All Number of slave System area Monitor SS PS modul
70. Cancel the reset Ze 9 11 Click the OK button i Correction value registration completed Cnn 12 Click the Close button unregistered condition setting value will back to the previous one lowing operation ess the Register button to register the correction value ner is OFF eset 13 Click the Yes button Exit the sensor correction setting Are you sure you want to continue 14 Click the Yes button Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode c a When the initial setting has been configured for Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting the value set for Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting is used instead of the correction value determined in Step 9 by executing the following operations Turning off and on the power e Resetting and clearing the reset of the CPU module To use the correction value determined in Step 9 after the above operations are executed correct the value set for Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting and write the value to the programmable controller Before correcting the value set for Sensor Correction Value Setting check the temporal operation to be executed after the correction with the setting determined in Step 9 1 FUNCTIONS 1 19 Sensor Correction Function m Procedure for executing the sensor correction one point correction when using a program C
71. Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Sampling cycle selection HHow to check the sampling cycle The sampling cycle in execution can be checked in Sampling cycle monitor Un G38 1 4 Control Output Cycle Unit Selection Function This function is used to switch the unit for the control output cycle between 1s and 0 1s When 0 1s is set as the control output cycle more precise control can be executed The control output cycle is the ON OFF cycle of transistor output for the temperature control function Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Control output cycle unit selection setting Point The setting range and default value of the control output cycle depends on this setting 15 Page 215 Control output cycle unit selection setting e A setting value discrepancy error error code 1920H occurs right after changing this setting To recover from the error status turn on and off Set value backup instruction Y8 Then register the new setting in the non volatile memory 1 FUNCTIONS 1 3 Sampling Cycle Switching Function 1 5 Whether to clear or hold the transistor output status when a CPU stop error occurs or when a CPU module is turned from HOLD CLEAR Function RUN to STOP can be selected
72. Derivative time D setting Un G433 0 to 3600 s Calculation value of PID constants after auto tuning in the Q compatible mode When a calculation value of PID constants after auto tuning exceeds one of the following ranges the auto tuning ends in failure e Proportion Belt P Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 0 1 to 1000 0 e Integration Time I Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 1 to 3600s Differentiation Time D Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 0 to 3600s Point When the auto tuning ends in failure due to the calculation value of PID constants as described above check the system configuration Select a suitable heater capacity or others When temperature control points are close between channels the auto tuning may not be completed due to a heat interruption if the auto tuning is executed to all channels in a batch In this case execute the auto tuning by one channel to prevent from receiving heat interruptions Change of the upper limit setting limiter or lower limit setting limiter and set value SV When the set value SV goes out of the setting range due to a change in one of the following parameters the auto tuning ends in failure e Upper Limit Setting Limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting e Upper Limit Setting Limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Other conditions in the R mode In
73. G566 to No request 0 45 Page 290 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 9 Input the correction gain value Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value Set the temperature process value corresponding to the input for ensor two point correction gain value 10 Set the t t lue PV ding to the input for CH1 S two point tion gain val corrected value Un G571 Page 293 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 11 Set CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G567 to Latch request 1 lt Page 291 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 12 Check that CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion Un G420 becomes Latch completed 1 1 Page 232 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored in CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G570 Page 292 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 13 Set CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G567 to No request 0 Page 291 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 14 Turn off and on Setting change command YB lt Page 157 Setting change command 15 Check that Setting change completion flag XB is on
74. O PV scaling PV scaling value value 613 265H CH2 AT simultaneous System area 0 Monitor O temperature rise parameter calculation flag 614 266H CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor O temperature rise status 615 267H CH2 Feed forward control forced start Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O status control forced start status 616 268H CH2 Feed forward value tuning flag Feed forward System area 0 Monitor O value tuning flag 617 269H CH2 Feed forward control READY flag System area 0 Monitor O 618 26AH CH2 Feed forward control forced start READY flag System area 0 Monitor O 619 26BH CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor O 620 26CH CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor O 621 to 629 System area 26DH to 275H 630 276H CH2 Set value SV setting Set value SV Set value SV 0 Control O setting setting 631 277H CH2 Proportional Heating Heating Heating 30 Control O band P setting proportional proportional proportional band Ph band Ph band Ph setting setting setting 632 278H CH2 Integral time I setting Integral time I Integral time 1 240 Control O setting setting 633 279H CH2 Derivative time D setting Derivative time Derivative time 60 Control O D setting 7 D setting 634 27AH CH2 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 0 Control O 17 635 27BH CH2 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert
75. OFF Buffer memory User setting value Default value write completion flag X9 OFF registration During default setting Executed in a program Executed by the temperature control module Unused channel For unused channels where temperature sensors are not connected set CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 to Unused 1 after the completion of the writing of the default values When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 is not set to Unused 1 the ALM LED flashes For details on the unused channels refer to the following L Page 31 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Default value write completion flag X9 152 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal Setting value backup failure flag Turning off and on Setting value backup command Y8 writes the data in the buffer memory to the non volatile memory This A flag turns on when the writing to the non volatile memory has failed ON Setting value backup command Y8 OFF During write to memory Setting value backup completion flag X8 OFF ON j a Setting value backup failure flag es XA OFF During write an to memory Error detection of write to memory Executed in a program eon gt Executed by the temperature control module After turning on Setting value backup comma
76. PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other sa
77. PV before a change of the set value SV has been stable for two minutes or longer Point When the starting ST is started when the temperature process value PV has not been stable incorrect PID constants may be calculated Execute the starting ST after the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function Operation with vibration ST This section describes the operation of when a control response is oscillatory vibration ST With vibration ST PID constants are automatically corrected to settle a vibration when a control response becomes oscillatory due to some causes such as the change of the characteristics of a controlled object and operation conditions The following describes the operations of the module with vibration ST The listed operations are under the state where the temperature is being controlled with the set PID constants 1 CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned off CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns on Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag Page 150 Auto tuning status 2 PID constants are calculated based on a response waveform 3 When a control response is poor PID constants are calculated based on the response waveform and are set in the buffer memory CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned on When a control response is good CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO keeps off and the PID constants are not
78. Rate alarm i Time Change of detection 1 temperature period process value PV C ae a em ie te ecm Rate alarm limit Change of upper temperature value process value PV Pe em a a ei a a a a mm ee Rate alarm lower limit value gt ON Time CHO Rate alarm upper limit OFF 4 i b4 of Un G5 to Un G8 r ON CHO Rate alarm lower limit re llc ll b5 of Un G5 to Un G8 CHO Alert occurrence flag 7 A XnC to XnF SEE ioe 1 FUNCTIONS 1 26 Rate Alarm Function Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Rate alarm Precautions When the resolution is 1 the temperature process value PV of the temperature control module is the actual temperature that was rounded off The temperature process value PV the actual temperature that was rounded off is also used for the judgment of the occurrence of a rate alarm ex A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value to monitor that the temperature process value PV is rising within a specified range Change of temperature process value PV C A Rate alarm upper limit value 20 0 C 10 0 C X Rate alarm lower limit value m gt Time Ex A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value to monitor that th
79. Set value Temperature process value PV SV change After set value E SV change Alert region 9 Alert set value Set value SV 14 Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value Page 68 Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter When the set value SV of a deviation alert is changed the temperature process value PV goes into the alert area Thus the system goes into an alert status To prevent the case above alert outputs can be suspended ESetting method Select one of the following alert modes 12 Upper limit deviation alert with re wait 13 Lower limit deviation alert with re wait 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert re wait 22 Upper limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value 23 Lower limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value 24 Upper lower limit deviation alert with re wait use set value SV setting value When Setting change rate limiter setting in Base Setting has been set an alert with re wait cannot be enabled even though one of the following alert modes is selected 12 Upper limit deviation alert with re wait 13 Lower limit deviation alert with re wait 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with re wait The re wait function is used to prevent the occurrence of an alert when the set value SV is changed When Setting change rate limiter setting in Ba
80. Specified Program double click Group n n 1 to 64 and set a value of 1 to 64 4 32 2 PARAMETER SETTING 2 5 Refresh Settings Refresh processing time The refresh processing time us is included in the scan time of the CPU module For the scan time refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application The refresh processing time us for refresh settings is as follows e Refresh processing time us Refresh read transfer to the CPU time The refresh read time varies depending on the refresh destination selected in Target The following te table lists the refresh read time of when the RnCPU is used R60TCTRT2TT2 R60TCRT4 24 64us R60TCTRT2TT2BW R60TCRT4BW 26 02us R60TCTRT2TT2 Q compatible mode R60TCRT4 Q compatible mode 50 12us R60TCTRT2TT2BW Q compatible mode REOTCRT4BW Q compatible mode 51 50us n Target is Device The prem read time is calculated from the number of items with refresh settings and their number of transfers words For the calculation method refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application For calculation replace the items in a calculation formula with the following items in Description Number of items with refresh settings Number of devices in use Refresh time for 1st to nth setting items A 0 05us per word 1 The value is the time of when the ROCPU is used For the R60TCTRT2TT2 read re
81. Suppression Function 1 36 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function This function backs up data in buffer memory areas to the non volatile memory The backed up data is transferred from the non volatile memory to the buffer memory when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is canceled Thus temperatures can be controlled without writing data when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is canceled Target buffer memory areas Refer to the list of buffer memory addresses Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses Writing data to the non volatile memory This function can be used to back up the data that was directly written to the buffer memory areas using the PID constants set by the auto tuning function and the engineering tool When the data is written to the non volatile memory and the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is canceled the values in the buffer memory areas are not required to be set again Point For the functions whose PID constants are automatically backed up after the auto tuning refer to the following K5 Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses To write data to the non volatile memory turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 When writing the data to the non volatile memory is completed Setting value backup completion flag X8 turns on Temperature control module CPU module 1 Setting va
82. System area 0 Monitor SSS lS MVc 705 2C1H CH2 System area Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor S re value for cooling value for cooling MVc MVc 3 706 2C2H CH3 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor SS Se value for cooling MVc 707 2C3H CH4 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value for cooling MVc 708 2C4H CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling System area 0 Monitor 5 e MVc for output with another analog module 709 2C5H CH2 System area Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor e value for cooling value for cooling MVc for output MVc for output with another with another analog module analog module 710 2C6H CH3 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor S value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module 711 2C7H CH4 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor Ss ar value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module 712 2C8H CH1 System area Cooling transistor output flag Close side 0 Monitor transistor output flag 713 2C9H CH2 System area Cooling Cooling Close side 0 Monitor fe transistor output transistor output transistor output flag flag flag 714 2CAH CH3 System area Cooling System area Close side 0 Monitor i a transistor output transistor output flag flag APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas
83. When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated under the following conditions When the maximum ramp is not determined When the output saturation time is short The temperature control module turns on CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status Un G413 b1 CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 Control status PID control EA Auto tuning X PID control CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient va data Un G554 and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise 0 ri dead time Un G555 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise y ON parameter calculation error status OFF Un G413 b1 gt Executed in a program man gt Executed by the temperature control module Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting with self tuning The control response at the temperature rise is constantly monitored during self tuning and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated based on the characteristics of a controlled object For details on the self tuning function refer to the following K Page 42 Self tuning Function Operation with the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting with self tuning The temperature control module operates as follows Operation of the temperature control module 1 When the self tuning has been normally started C
84. X1 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 b0 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status Un G411 b1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status Un G411 b9 CH1 Self tuning error Un G411 b10 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion Un G413 b0 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status Un G413 b1 Self tuning start OFF OFF Dead time ON Maximum gradient Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning Simultaneous Auto tuning waveform Time temperature rise AT start ON Eu pofoo ne a a ON OFF O iz OFF CH1 Self tuning flag Un G411 OFF CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise OFF PTE ee tan fel ee eee parameter calculation flag Un G413 1 FUNCTIONS 4 03 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function When CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 is turned off and on in the setting mode and the mode is shifted to the operation mode After the mode is shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned off and on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and PID constants are changed by the auto tuning Temperature A Auto tuning waveform process value
85. a controlled object this function allows PID constants to be automatically changed Unlike the auto tuning function a response waveform observation is monitored and PID constants are automatically calculated and set This function facilitates an object to be controlled with the most suitable PID constants all the time without disturbance Differences between auto tuning and self tuning The following table lists the differences between auto tuning and self tuning Item Auto tuning Self tuning Calculation of PID constants Execution method The manipulated value MV is turned on or off and PID constants are calculated based on the hunting cycle and amplitude of the temperature process value PV to the set value SV Turning off and on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 starts the auto tuning and changes PID constants upon completion PID constants are calculated based on the oscillation that occurred in some situations such as after the control has just started the set value SV has been changed and when a control response is oscillatory The temperature control module constantly monitors the control response PID constants are calculated and changed when the control response is slow Control response PID constants are calculated based on the control response of when the manipulated value MV is turned on or off Therefore the control may become unstable PID constants are calculated based on the control r
86. and CH4 cannot be assigned to this setting e In the mix control CH2 cannot be assigned to this setting a Select the current sensor CT to be connected to CT1 in the R mode Setting range e 0 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A e 1 CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A e 2 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A e 3 CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 298 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Correspondence between each CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT1 2046 CT2 2047 CT3 2048 CT4 2049 CT5 2050 CT6 2051 CT7 2052 CT8 2053 Setting current sensors CT and buffer memory areas Set the following buffer memory areas as follows according to the specifications of the current sensor CT to be used Products of CTL 12L 8 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 Setting not required U R D Co LTD CTL 6 P H CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A Setting not required 1 CTL 6 S H CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A Setting not required z 1 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to Setting not required 100 0A 2 CTL 12 S56 10 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to Setting not required 100 0A 2 Other current sensors CT CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 3 Set the number of second winding turns Current sensors CT depending on the specifications of the whose number of second current sensor CT used winding turns is 6
87. and on e When CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 is set to Do not execute ST 0 This bit turns off in the following cases as well e When the self tuning has started by the change of the set value SV When the temperature process value PV becomes out of the stable state and the vibration ST has started b11 to b15 Fixed to 0 Not used The values of CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 Page 282 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Page 282 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 2 When this bit turns on under any condition other than the ones described above check the contents of the following table according to the setting of CH1 Self turning setting Un G548 1 Starting ST Only PID constants are calculated e Check if wiring is correct in control loop both and execute the control e Set CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 to 4 Starting ST vibration ST Only PID constants are calculated for 3 Starting ST PID constants and simultaneous temperature rise parameters are calculated e Check if wiring is correct in control loop When the simultaneous temperature rise parameters have been calculated save the calculated parameters After that set CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 to 4 Starting ST Vibration ST Only PID constants are calculated
88. and set value SV restoration adjustment e The proportional band P is changed e The integral time I is changed e The derivative time D is changed e The output limiter is changed The overlap dead band setting is changed in the heating cooling control e The control response parameter is changed e The set value SV is changed The sensor correction value and the primary delay digital filter setting are changed e The disturbance judgment position is changed The following figure shows the stop caused by the change of the integral time I derivative time D or the output limiter Forced starting signal Bottom value detection Disturbance judgment position exceeded Set value SV Disturbance judgment position FF value addition 1 2 1 Even though the following items are changed in this area the operation does not stop However when the integral time and derivative time D have been set to 0 the operation stops Integral time I Derivative time D Output limiter 2 When the following items are changed in this area the operation stops Integral time I e Derivative time D e Output limiter BEBE rn EE When a feed forward value has been applied by CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 the operation does not stop even though the integral time I derivative time D and output limiter are changed 1 FUNCTIONS 1 35 Disturbance
89. are output within the range of 0 to 100 For values smaller than 0 and larger than 100 refer to the following e Values smaller than 0 0 e Values larger than 100 100 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value MV 403 603 803 1003 CHO Manipulated value MV in the Q compatible mode 13 14 15 16 HManipulated value MV and control output cycle A manipulated value MV is the ON time of CH1 Control output cycle setting Un G504 displayed in percentage Page 248 CH1 Control output cycle setting e A manipulated value for heating MVh is the ON time of CH1 Heating control output cycle setting Un G504 displayed in percentage Page 249 CH1 Heating control output cycle setting A manipulated value for cooling MVc is the ON time of CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting Un G522 displayed in percentage Page 261 CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting When 600 60 0 has been stored in CH1 Manipulated value MV Un G403 and the value in the following buffer memory area has been set as follows e CH1 Control output cycle setting Un G504 30s ON time of transistor output Control output cycle setting s x Manipulated value MV 30 x 0 6 18 s ON time of the transistor output is 18s Transistor output becomes the pulse that is on for 18s and off for 12s on i 18s 60 12s 40 Transist
90. been connected Off No alert has occurred HBA LED Indicates the heater disconnection detection status or the output off time current error status of the R60TCTRT2TT2BW and R60TCRT4BW On A heater disconnection or an output off time current error has been detected Off No heater disconnection or output off time current error has occurred 1 For details refer to the following Page 139 List of Error Codes When the RUN LED flashes or turns off When the RUN LED flashes or turns off check the following items Is the power supplied Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module is within the rated range Is the capacity of the power supply module enough Calculate the current consumption of the installed CPU module I O module and intelligent function module to check whether the power capacity is sufficient Has a watchdog timer error occurred Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again e Replace the temperature control module Is replacing the module allowed in the process of the Perform the online module change For details refer to the following online module change LA MELSEC iQ R Online Module Change Manual When the ERR LED turns on When the ERR LED turns on check the following items Has an error occurred Check Latest error code Un GO and take a corrective action described in List of Error Codes lt Page 139 List of Error Codes Is the cold j
91. been set for CT selection of CT setting and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnections Reference heater current value x CHO Heater disconnection alert setting is smaller than 0 1A e In addition an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs when 1 CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A has been set for CT selection of CT setting and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnections Reference heater current value x CHO Heater disconnection alert setting is smaller than 0 01A In the Q compatible mode e An out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs when 0 CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A or 2 Use CT Ratio Setting 0 0 to 100 0A has been set for CT selection of CT setting and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnections Reference heater current value x CHO Heater disconnection alert setting is smaller than 0 1A e In addition an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs when 1 CTL 6 P CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A has been set for CT selection of CT setting and the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnections Reference heater current value x CHO Heater disconnection alert setting is smaller than 0 01A 1 FUNCTIONS 1 27 Heater Disconnection Detection Function connection correction function When a heater voltage drops a heater current is
92. been set to Requested 1 do not execute the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the non volatile memory e Changing set values in the buffer memory read from the non volatile memory by using this command e Memory backup Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function Default setting registration Page 156 Default setting registration command Point This command is enabled in both the setting mode and operation mode However this command is disabled while CH1 Feed forward value tuning execution status Un G416 b1 is on Default value The default value is Not requested 0 CH1 HOLD CLEAR setting Set whether to hold or clear the transistor output status when a stop error occurs in the CPU module or when the CPU module is turned from RUN to STOP For the status of the temperature control module of when this setting is configured refer to the following K Page 23 HOLD CLEAR Function e 0 CLEAR e Other than 0 HOLD Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO HOLD CLEAR setting 500 700 900 1100 Default value The default value is CLEAR 0 HOLDI CLEAR setting Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode set whether to hold or clear the transistor output status when a stop error occurs in the CPU module or when the CPU module is turned from RUN to STOP For the status of the temperature control module of when this setting is configured ref
93. by the change of the set value SV e When the temperature process value PV becomes out of the stable state and the vibration ST has started b2 to b7 Fixed to 0 Not used b8 Self tuning disable This bit turns on when the self tuning was not able to be This bit turns off after one of the following operations is status executed executed When Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off and the mode shifts to the setting mode When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 is set to Unused 1 When CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is turned off and on e When CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 is set to Do not execute ST 0 This bit turns off when all the conditions that disable the execution of the self tuning are cleared For conditions that disable the execution of the self tuning refer to the following lt Page 46 Conditions in which the self tuning is not executed 226 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status This bit turns on when the simultaneous temperature rise parameters cannot be calculated by the self tuning b10 Self tuning error This bit turns on after one of the following operations is executed during the self tuning 2 Changing the set value SV setting only during the start up Changing PID constants Changing the setting variation rate limiter Changing the outp
94. calculation values are stored into the following buffer memory areas CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G439 CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 e CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G537 A value that is twice as large as the value in CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 is automatically set However when this setting has been set to Os at the auto tuning the loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Auto Tuning Function 35 Backing up calculation values at the completion of the auto tuning When the following setting has been configured to Valid at the start of the auto tuning values are automatically backed up in the non volatile memory T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Application Setting gt Auto tuning setting gt Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants To read the calculation value from the non volatile memory to the buffer memory set CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 to Requested 1 Page 239 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Point To use the PID constants stored in the buffer memory in the Q compatible mode even after power off follow the methods below e Use
95. changed the related buffer memory data is automatically changed to prevent the values in those buffer memory areas from being out of the setting range The following figure shows the setting timing 1 2 CH1 Input range Un G501 Before change After change ON Setting change command YB OFF Buffer memory set automatically User setting x naa ON i Setting change completion flag XB OFF Sampling cycle 500ms 500ms 500ms Reflect Reflect Executed in a program Executed by the temperature control module 1 Output signals and values in buffer memory areas are read when the processing by 250ms or 500ms is started 2 Change the values in buffer memory areas that are automatically set after the processing every 250ms or 500ms and turn on and off Setting change command YB 1 The cycle to be used depends on the setting of Sampling cycle selection in Base Setting Buffer memory areas to be automatically set Refer to the following C Page 245 When the input range automatic change setting has been set to Enable 1 Automatic setting at input range change in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b0 in the Q compatible mode Setting method Configure the setting as follows Tf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Automatic setting at input range change 2 1 FUNCTIONS 5 1 17 A
96. constants Un G547 CH1 Write completion flag Un G47 b4 0 ON CH1 Write failure flag Un G47 b12 OFF Auto tuning completion Auto tuning completion Write failure Write normal completion Executed in a program led gt Executed by the temperature control module After writing of data to the non volatile memory has been completed successfully CH1 Write completion flag Un G47 b0 turns on CH1 Write completion flag Un G47 bO turns off when the setting of CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 is changed from Enable 1 to Disable 0 When writing of data to the non volatile memory has failed CH1 Write failure flag Un G47 b8 turns on and the temperature control module operates with the PID constants calculated in the previous auto tuning The LED status remains CH1 Write failure flag Un G47 b8 turns off after writing of data in the channel 1 is completed successfully When writing of data has failed turn off and on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 to execute the auto tuning again If writing of data fails even after the execution of the auto tuning a hardware failure has occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Point Whether the automatic backup is completed successfully or not can be checked by referring to this flag at the completion of the auto tuning Precautions After checking that one of the following flags is on se
97. data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function state monitor 2170 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function state monitor in the Q 1350 compatible mode APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 303 10dule simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable monitor Whether the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function is enabled or disabled can be checked 0 Disable e 1 Enable For details on the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following K Page 108 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable monitor 2171 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable monitor in 1351 the Q compatible mode oy r module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor Whether the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function has been set to Master or Slave can be checked e 0 Slave e 1 Master For details on the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following K5 Page 108 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of t
98. deviation E APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 233 When the value of the proportional band P decreases the proportional gain Kp increases Therefore the variation of the manipulated value MV becomes large compared to the variation of the deviation E The following figure shows the proportional band P in a reverse action Manipulated value Mv Deviation E 100 Manipulated value MV to deviation E Temperature 0 gt process value PV Current temperature Set value process value PV SV 4 gt Proportional band P Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Proportional band P setting 431 631 831 1031 CHO Proportional band P setting in the Q compatible mode 35 67 99 131 Setting range e In the R mode 0 to the full scale of the input range C F In the Q compatible mode 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Ex In the Q compatible mode when the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas the proportional band P becomes 60 C e CH1 Input range in the Q compatible mode Un G32 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C e CH1 Proportional band P setting in the Q compatible mode Un G35 100 10 0 Full scale x Proportional band P setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 1 60 C HTwo position control Set
99. e In the R mode 0 to the full scale of the input range C F In the Q compatible mode Set a value within the range of 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 to the full scale of the input range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas e CH1 Input range Un G501 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G46 10 1 0 Full scale x Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 400 0 C 200 0 C x 0 01 6 0 C The dead band is the set value SV 3 0 C Default value In the R mode For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW the default value is 5 5 C For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW the default value is 5 0 5 C In the Q compatible mode The default value is 5 0 5 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 257 41 l reset amount setting Set the travel amount of the proportional band P For details on the manual reset function refer to the following K Page 28 Manual Reset Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manual reset amount setting 517 717 917 1117 CHO Manual reset amount setting in the Q compatible mode 724 740 756 772 ESetting range Set a value within the range of 1000 to 1000 100 0 to 100 0 The same setting range is applied to the standard control and heating cool
100. e R60OTCRT4BW Setting range The setting range is 0 to 100 Point An out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs when the current value to be used as a judgment value to detect heater disconnections Reference heater current value x CHO Heater disconnection alert setting is smaller than 0 1A or 0 01A For details on the setting refer to the following lt Page 81 Setting method APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 295 Ex To generate a heater disconnection alert when CT1 Heater current process value Un G2030 becomes 80 8 0A or lower while CT1 Reference heater current value Un G2054 has been set to 100 10 0A set the following value e CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting Un G2004 80 Heater Reference heater _ Heater current F current value process value 100 80 disconnection 100 x 100 100 x 100 80 alert setting Reference heater current value 100 When 0 is set heater disconnection detections and output off time current error detections are not executed Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Heater disconnection judgment mode Set whether to execute the heater disconnection judgment in the normal mode or the high accuracy mode For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following lt Page 81 Heater Disconnection Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address
101. expanded mode 4 is set this area becomes a system area Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Position proportional control expanded mode 6 When Position proportional control normal mode 5 is set this area becomes a system area Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Position proportional control normal mode 5 When Position proportional control expanded mode 6 is set this area becomes a system area n in this table indicates an interrupt setting value n 1 to 16 This value is displayed only in the master module of the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function When multiple master modules have been set 0 is stored in this area This value is displayed only in the master module of the inter module peak current suppression function When multiple master modules have been set 0 is stored in this area Enabled only when the R60TCTRT2TT2BW or R60TCRT4BW is used When the control output cycle unit selection setting is 1s cycle When the control output cycle unit selection setting is 0 1s cycle APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas The following table describes the items 1 to 5 in the list of buffer memory addresses 1 Automatic setting target 2 Target saved in the non volatile memory 3 Default setting registration command 4 Setting change command 5 Auto refresh BUn GO
102. following conditions Temperature process value PV Set value SV e CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 has been set to 0 0 0 Page 258 CH1 Manual reset amount setting Manipulated value Manipulated value for heating MVh for cooling MVc 100 p Temperature process 0 value PV Set value SV lt 4 rid gt Heating proportional Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc Heie te tvels cee eet eee eels 1 A value to be actually output is within the output limiter range set in Upper limit output limiter and Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Page 129 Application Setting Setting method in the R mode Set each item as follows CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Any value Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Any value Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 0 Os Page 235 CH1 Integral time I setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 0 Os lt Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting 1 FUNCTIONS 17 1 2 Control Method 18 Setting method in the Q compatible mode Set each item as follows e Proportion Belt P Setting Any value e Integration Time I Setting Os Differentiation Time D Setting Os XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt
103. for both and execute the control When the simultaneous temperature rise parameters have not been calculated check if wiring is correct in control loop Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Self tuning flag 411 611 811 1011 CHO Self tuning flag in the Q compatible mode 575 607 639 671 This area is enabled only for the following channels e CH1 to CH4 of when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 of when the mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 227 value PV scaling value When the temperature process value PV scaling function is enabled a scaled temperature process value PV is stored For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following K5 Page 63 Scaling Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Process value PV scaling value 412 612 812 1012 CHO Process value PV scaling value in the Q compatible mode 728 744 760 776 ir nultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag The status of when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning calculates the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is stored in this area e 0 Off e 1 On b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0 olofofofofofofofofofofofo
104. for the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW only Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor Other than above A hardware failure has occurred in the temperature control module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative ing does not start When the auto tuning does not start CHO Auto tuning status X4 to X7 does not turn on check the following items Have the auto tuning start conditions been met Refer to Auto Tuning Function and check whether all the conditions have been met Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Has the auto tuning ended abnormally Refer to Conditions where auto tuning ends abnormally and check whether the auto tuning has ended abnormally If it has ended abnormally remove the cause Then execute auto tuning again Page 34 Auto Tuning Function n ing is not completed When the auto tuning is not completed CHO Auto tuning status X4 to X7 remains on and does not turn off check the following items Is Memory s PID constants write completion flag on Set CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants to Disable 0 and turn off Memory s PID constants write completion flag Has CHO Memory s PID constants read command been set to Requested 1 Set CHO Memory s PID constants read command to Not requested 0 Has a correct set value SV been set Is the manipulated value MV still 0 Set the set value SV to the
105. gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters gt Proportion Belt P Setting For cooling Configure the setting as follows XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters gt Cooling proportional band Pc setting 110 1 FUNCTIONS 1 34 Proportional Band Setting Function 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function This function quickly damps the temperature change caused by disturbance while a temperature is in a stable state To control the temperature fall bottom caused by the disturbance execute the feed forward control FF control After the bottom control the control mode returns to the normal PID control Restriction The disturbance suppression function cannot be used in the position proportional control Set value SV _ Disturbance judgment position 1 FF control 2 PID control Ex This function is good to the devices to which a disturbance periodically is generated as shown below Injection molding machine e Semiconductor manufacturing equipment plate for heating wafers e Packaging machine Disturbance has occurred 1 Set value SV Process value without disturbance SO suppression function Process value with disturbance suppression function 1 Overshoots after the bottom control are suppressed 2 The
106. hardware failure occurs in the temperature control module WDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Hardware error flag X3 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal 1 49 This signal turns on when users execute the auto tuning of each channel or when the temperature control module executes the self tuning CH1 X4 X4 X4 X4 On During auto tuning self tuning CH2 x5 X5 x51 x5 Off The auto tuning self tuning has not 7 been executed or is completed CH3 X6 x6 X6 xe CH4 x7 x7 x7 x7 1 Available only in the expanded mode HExecution of auto tuning To execute the auto tuning turn on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 This signal is on during the auto tuning and automatically turns off at the completion of the auto tuning ON CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF Executed in a program Snes gt Executed by the temperature control module For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following lt gt Page 34 Auto Tuning Function This signal turns on when the self tuning starts This signal automatically turns off at the completion of the self tuning Set a self tuning option in CH1 Self tuning setting Un G548 The self tuning can be executed only in the standard control For details on the self tuning function refer to the following gt Page 42 Self tuning Function MDevice No The follow
107. heater current value CT ratio setting 6 Seta judgment value to detect heater disconnections and output off time current errors as a rate of the reference heater current value in Heater disconnection alert setting of Heater disconnection detection setting in Application Setting XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting ltem CH1 CH2 Heater disconnection detection setting Set the heater disconnection detection Heater disconnection alert setting 90 0 0 7 Set how many times heater disconnections are detected successively to regard the heater as disconnected for Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count of Heater disconnection detection setting in Application Setting Heater disconnection output off time curente 3 Times Heater disconnection correction function selectior 0 OFF Point e The standard setting value for Heater disconnection alert setting of Heater disconnection detection setting in Application Setting is 80 However the current value may significantly change depending on the characteristics of a heater or how the heater is used Check that there is no problem in the actual system In the R mode e An out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs when 0 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 2 CTL 12 36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A or 3 Use CT Ratio Setting 0 0 to 100 0A has
108. input signal Setting change completion flag XB APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal 1 53 When an alert has occurred in CH1 the al For the conditions where this flag turns off refer to the following lt gt Page 74 Condition in which CH1 Alert flag XC turns off The following table lists the flags and buffer memory addresses of alert definitions for each channel ert definition is stored in CH1 Alert definition Un G401 and this flag turns on CH1 XC Un G401 Off No alert has occurred CH2 XD Un G601 On An alert has occurred CH3 XE Un G801 CH4 XF Un G1001 ON CH1 Alert flag XC CH1 Alert definition Un G401 0 X detected alert definition Executed by the temperature control module Device No The following shows the device number of this input signal Alert flag XC XD XE XF APPENDICES 1 54 Appendix 2 1 O Signal Details of output signals This section describes the details of the output signals of the temperature control module to the CPU module The I O numbers X Y described in this section are for the case when the start I O number of the temperature control module is set to 0 Setting operation mode command Use this signal to select the setting mode or the operation mode e Off Setting mode On Operation mode Some buffer memory areas can be set only in the setting mode The settings of four channels are configured in a batch Buffer
109. inter module link function a system bus error has been detected Take measures to reduce noise Check that the base unit and extension cables have been properly connected and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU module When the same error occurs again the possible cause is a module failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1AD2H Multiple module interaction function system error 3 At the initialization of the inter module link function an abnormal response has been detected in the data communication between the master temperature control module and the other temperature control modules Take measures to reduce noise Check that each module has been properly connected and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU module When the same error occurs again the possible cause is a module failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 List of Error Codes 141 Error code Error name Description and cause Action 1AEOH Peak current When the inter module peak current suppression When the inter module peak current suppression suppression function function has been enabled two or more temperature function has been enabled for multiple modules set only master duplication control modules have been set as master modules one module as the master module Page 106 Inter error between module peak current sup
110. is stable within this area output is not executed for a slight change in the temperature resulting in energy saving Ex When the following values have been set Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C e Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 200 0 C e Overlap dead band setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting 15 0 C The range of 200 0 C to 215 0 C is the dead band area The temperature where a cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 215 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where a cooling operation starts to the lower temperature side of the set value SV produces a dead band area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Manipulated value ifor heating MVh 0 Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 for cooling MVc 0 manipulated value for heating MVh 0 100 Cooling starts at 215 0 C Heating Temperature 0 gt process value PV Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling 100 Point f In the Q compatible mode set 2 5 for Overlap dead band setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting 400 C 200 C x 0 025 15 C 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Overlap dead Band Function Dead b
111. is stored The value is not changed from 0 When the auto tuning ends in failure The temperature control module operates as follows e An auto tuning error occurs e CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off The PID constants are not set Checking the completion of the auto tuning The completion of the auto tuning can be checked by turning on and off CH1 Auto tuning status X4 Adjustment after auto tuning To change the control response for the PID constants calculated by the auto tuning change the setting in the following parameter Control Response Parameters of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Point f In the system where a temperature rises rapidly the auto tuning may not be executed properly due to the excessive temperature rise during the auto tuning Create a program that executes the auto tuning in combination with the alert function that stops the auto tuning when an alert occurs during the auto tuning During AT loop disconnection detection function For details on the during AT loop disconnection detection function refer to the following C Page 88 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function 1 FUNCTIONS 41 1 11 Auto Tuning Function 42 1 12 Self tuning Function The temperature control module constantly monitors the control state When the control system is oscillatory just after the control start owing to the set value SV change or fluctuation of characteristics of
112. le Pema Ween GaN Seed yhte 310 PID Operation scra nee ee nae ae p nesedia ees be Rae Dede eA ee oe Eee ee et tee cede key 312 Actions of the temperature control module 1 0 2 2 0000 c cent e ee ae 313 Proportionalaction P action i sc c cece erdeat eyed oe ne piba a Pade deere ae a a ated E baud eben 314 Integral action I action 6 teens 315 Derivative action Daction ciitadocs ede raa edhe ded geen Ried esate aead thts eoew ed ited gd 316 PID ACHON 62s ieee tae Rae dae bee dae ae Krd d dee dd Gh eee Ree de eet ata awe tad 316 INDEX 317 REVISIONS 2 2 3 0 25 bec yee debe Reb d aa paced E dda ee sere de eh ee Ree dhe E 320 WARRANT Y e enoaan tetas a DEO A R na chp E EE ad ss nce pbk ose ene nee Ok ae 321 TRADEMARKS o iiia dele aed wee ee a ade ere ec EE eee bale dee wee ee 322 11 12 RELEVANT MANUALS Sa C MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Functions parameter settings troubleshooting I O signals and buffer memory Print book Manual Application of the temperature control module SH 081536ENG this manual e Manual EPUB PDF MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Specifications procedures before operation wiring and operation examples of Print book Manual Startup the temperature control module e Manual SH 081535ENG EPUB PDF e Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool e Manual has the following fea
113. limiter 76 4CH CH2 Output variation amount limiter Output variation System area 0 Setting Q Oe e amount limiter 77 4DH CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting Or Or ipa 78 4EH CH2 Adjustment sensitivity dead band Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting IO S setting sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting 79 4FH CH2 Control output Heating control Heating control System area 30 17 Setting OPO o cycle setting output cycle output cycle 300 18 setting setting 80 50H CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting Oo Oe 81 51H CH2 Control response parameter Control Control 0 Setting Or fOr response response parameter parameter 82 52H CH2 AUTO MAN mode shift AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting I0 mode shift 83 53H CH2 MAN output setting MAN output System area 0 Setting OD ee setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 183 84 54H CH2 Setting variation rate limiter setting Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting variation rate limiter temperature rate limiter rate limiter rise 1 setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature rise 3 10 rise 1 85 55H CH2 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting 86 56H CH2 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse 1 Setting action setting action
114. lt 5 Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 Any value lt 3 Page 235 CH1 Integral time 1 setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 Any value Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting Setting method in the Q compatible mode Set each item as follows e Proportion Belt P Setting Any value e Integration Time I Setting Any value e Differentiation Time D Setting Any value XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters Condition to execute the PID control Whether PID control is executed or not depends on the following settings e Setting operation mode command Y1 e PID continuation Flag of Control basic parameters in Application Setting e CH1 PID control forced stop command YC Stop mode setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting The following table shows the relation between each setting and the execution of PID control Executed O Not executed x Setting mode at power on Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x Operation mode during operation Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 O ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x Setting mode after operation Stop 0 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x Cont
115. memory Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Memory s PID constants read command 440 640 840 1040 CHO Memory s PID constants read command in the Q compatible mode 62 94 126 158 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 239 Buffer memory areas to store set values in the non volatile memory The following table lists the buffer memory areas from which set values are read CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G439 Page 239 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 Page 235 CH1 Integral time l setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G537 Page 270 CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Setting range e 0 Not requested e 1 Requested Precautions When this command has been set to Requested 1 do not execute the following operations An incorrect value may be stored in the non volatile memory e Changing set values in the buffer memory read from the non volatile memory by using this command e Memory backup Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function e Default setting registra
116. memory areas that can be set only in the setting mode The temperature control module has parameters that can be changed only when Setting operation mode command Y1 is off For the parameters that can be changed only in the setting mode refer to the following When the parameters are changed in the operation mode a write error in the operation mode error code 1900H occurs K Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses MDevice No The following shows the device number of this output signal Setting operation mode command Y1 pun Error reset command Use this signal to turn off Error flag X2 and to reset Latest error code Un GO For how to reset an error refer to Error flag X2 lt 7 Page 149 Error flag Device No The following shows the device number of this output signal Error reset command Y2 Auto tuning command Use this signal to start the auto tuning for each channel Turning off and on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 starts the auto tuning and turns on CH1 Auto tuning status X4 After the auto tuning is completed CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off Keep CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 on during the auto tuning and turn off the signal at the completion of the auto tuning If CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 is turned on and off during the auto tuning the auto tuning will stop When the auto tuning has stopped the PID constants in the buffer memory do not change If O has been set for P
117. module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Alert setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function Alert set value According to a selected alert mode set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 1 Un G401 b8 to CH1 Alert 4 Un G401 b11 turn on Up to 4 items can be set Set Alert set value 1 to Alert set value 4 by the following procedure Alert set values 1 to 4 correspond to the alert modes of Alert 1 to 4 XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Alert setting Setting an alert dead band When the temperature process value PV or deviation E is close to the alert set value the status may changes repeatedly between the alert status and non alert status due to inconsistent inputs In this case by setting an alert dead band repetition of the status change caused by inconsistent inputs can be prevented Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Alert setting gt Alert dead band setting Ex When the alert mode has been set to Upper Limit Input Alert When a value other than 0 C has been set for Alert dead band setting of Alert setting in Application Setting the system issues an alert when the input upper limit becomes equal to or greater than the alert set value When the value becomes equal t
118. module operates when the self tuning is not executed CH1 Auto tuning status X4 i OFF i i i Control status i control i 1ON CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 OFF 1 1 When the temperature control starts the set value SV is changed or vibration is detected When the simultaneous temperature rise parameter cannot be calculated The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated under the following conditions When the maximum ramp is not determined When the output saturation time is short The temperature control module turns on CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status Un G411 b9 ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF fy S T r Control status PID control BA Self tuning X PID control 1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status Un G411 b9 OFF 1 aa gt Executed by the temperature control module 1 When the temperature control starts the set value SV is changed or vibration is detected Point To turn off CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status Un G411 b9 set the following Set Do Not Run the ST for Self tuning setting in Application Setting To calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter execute the self tuning again Howe
119. not used CH1 Lower limit output limiter Un G509 is disabled even a value has been set HTwo position control In the two position control this setting is disabled Manual control In the manual control this setting is disabled Default value The default value is 1000 100 0 260 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 41 Cooling control output cycle setting Set the pulse cycle ON OFF cycle of the transistor output The ON time of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated value for cooling MVc calculated by a PID operation When the manipulated value for cooling MVc is stable pulses are repeatedly output in the same cycle For details on this area refer to the following K Page 248 CH1 Control output cycle setting Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling control output cycle setting 522 722 922 1122 CHO Cooling control output cycle setting in the Q compatible mode 722 738 754 770 oling method setting Set a cooling control method in the heating cooling control Select a cooling method suitable for cooling characteristics of devices For details on the cooling method setting function refer to the following K Page 30 Cooling Method Setting Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling method setting 523 723
120. of the auto tuning The setting is enabled However when the output variation amount limiter setting is changed during the auto tuning appropriate PID constants may not be calculated Therefore adjusting the output variation amount during the auto tuning is not recommended Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Set the upper limit value of the set value SV Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Upper limit setting limiter 511 711 911 1111 CHO Upper limit setting limiter in the Q compatible mode 55 87 119 151 ESetting range The value is within the temperature measuring range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 5 Page 242 CH1 Input range Configure the settings that satisfy the following conditions e CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Un G512 lt CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Un G511 When the above conditions are not satisfied CHO Upper lower limit setting limiter error error code 1A1MH occurs 1 2 Input lower limit Input upper limit Set value SV setting range 4 gt 1 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Un G512 2 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Un G511 Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e No deci
121. process value PV values in the set value temperature process value data storage area y Output the manipulated value MV Convert manipulated value MV obtained by the PID operation to transistor output on time and output it PID control simple two degree of freedom The temperature control module operates in simple two degree of freedom In the simple two degree of freedom PID control the parameters of the two degree of freedom PID control are simplified and used for control In the simple two degree of freedom PID control the module controls target objects using not only PID constants but also a control response parameter The parameter can be set to fast normal or slow This setting can change the form of response to the change of the set value SV maintaining response to the disturbance in a good condition Page 51 Simple Two degree of freedom Fast x Normal Set value Set value SV SV oe Slow Response to the change Response to the disturbance of the set value SV The following describes the difference between the one degree of freedom PID control two degree of freedom PID control and simple two degree of freedom APPENDICES 31 0 Appendix 4 PID MOne degree of freedom PID control and two degree of freedom PID control e General PID control is called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to improve the res
122. range error A indicates that the interrupt setting corresponding to the error is as follows 0 Setting 1 to F Setting 16 1900H Write error in the Writing a value to the area where writing is allowed only Follow the instructions below to reset the error operation mode in the setting mode was attempted in the operation 1 Change the mode to the setting mode mode 2 Set the correct value and turn on and off Setting change command YB When switching the mode from the operation mode to the setting mode check that PID continuation flag is Stop 0 and turn on and off Setting operation mode command Y1 1910H Set value The current control mode is different from the one Turn on and off Setting value backup command Y8 discrepancy error backed up in the non volatile memory because the control mode control mode was changed 1920H Set value The current control output cycle unit is different from the discrepancy error one backed up in the non volatile memory because the control output cycle control output cycle unit was changed unit selection setting 1930H Set value The current sampling cycle is different from the one discrepancy error backed up in the non volatile memory because the sampling cycle sampling cycle was changed 1940H Setting change error The setting value has been changed while Default After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 during default setting setting registration command Y9 is on change the sett
123. result AMV exceeds the neutral band output to the control motor starts The following figure shows an ON timing example of open close outputs when the control motor time is 100 seconds and the open close output neutral band is 2 0 Sampling cycle Addition of AMV _ gt Oe as aha ll era ee EA EE Ae as Neutral band 0 af sea atthe Sat ek ole eS Nea ee See eh fae Addition of AMV v OPEN Turn on the open side y Turn on the close side 1 CLOSE 2 1 When the operation result AMV is larger than 1 the open side output turns on 2 When the operation result AMV is smaller than 1 the close side output turns on APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 263 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Open close output neutral band setting 527 727 927 1127 CHO Open close output neutral band setting in the Q compatible mode 1040 1056 1072 1088 Setting range 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 Default value The default value is 20 2 0 CH1 Control motor time Set the control motor rotation time from the full open state to the full closed state Check the specifications of the control motor used before setting a value Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH
124. ro error judgment error judgment error judgment error judgment time time gt time time 1145 479H CH4 During AT loop System area During AT loop System area 0 Setting O O disconnection disconnection detection detection function enable function enable disable disable 1146 47AH CH4 AT bias AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting Oo o 1147 47BH CH4 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 0 Setting Ds backup setting backup setting backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID constants of PID of PID constants of PID constants constants 1148 47CH CH4 Self tuning System area Self tuning System area 0 Setting Or 1 0 setting setting 1149 47DH CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting O O lO PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling function enable function enable function enable function enable disable setting disable setting disable setting disable setting 1150 47EH CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting O O PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling upper limit value upper limit upper limit value upper limit value gt value 1151 47FH CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting O JO JO PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling lower limit value lower limit lower limit value lowe
125. that the terminal block or the cold junction temperature compensation resistor has not been disconnected or loose e Power off and on the module When the same error occurs again the possible cause is a module failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1 The address of buffer memory area where a value out of the setting range is set can be checked with Error address Un G1 142 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 List of Error Codes 3 5 List of Alarm Codes If an alarm occurs in operation of the temperature control module the alarm code of the alarm is stored into Latest alarm code Un G3 of the buffer memory Turning on and off Error reset command Y2 clears the alarm code in Latest alarm code Un G3 O in alarm codes This symbol indicates the number of the channel where an alarm has occurred Alarm code Alarm name Description and cause Action 0800H CHO Process value PV out of The temperature process value PV After the temperature process value PV falls within the input range upper limit has exceeded the temperature setting range turn on and off Error reset command Y2 measuring range that was set as the to clear the alarm code stored in Latest alarm code input range Un G3 0810H CHO Process value PV out of The temperature process value PV er the temperature piocess value PV falls within the input range lower limit is below
126. the proportional band P to 0 For details on the two position control refer to the following K Page 15 Control Method Default value In the R mode For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R6O0TCTRT2TT2BW the default value is 30 30 C For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW the default value is 30 3 0 C In the Q compatible mode The default value is 30 3 0 234 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas When the proportional band P has been set to 0 the auto tuning cannot be executed To execute the auto tuning set the proportional band P to a value other than 0 For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Set the heating proportional band Ph to execute the PID control For details on this area refer to the following lt gt Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Heating proportional band Ph setting 431 631 831 1031 CHO Heating proportional band Ph setting in the Q compatible mode 35 67 99 131 Setting range In the R mode 0 to the full scale of the input range C F In the Q compatible mode 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 HTwo position control Set the heating proportional band Ph to 0 For details on the two position control refer to the following K Page 15 Control Method Def
127. to Within temperature rise completion range 1 after the temperature rise completion set the time in CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G507 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature rise completion range setting 506 706 906 1106 Temperature rise completion range setting in the Q compatible mode 167 Setting range In the R mode When the temperature unit of the input range is C When the temperature unit of the input range is F 1 C to 100 C 1 F to 100 F When the input range is for another analog module input 1 to 100 e In the Q compatible mode When the temperature unit of the input range is C 1 C to 10 C When the temperature unit of the input range is F 1 F to 10 F Other than above 1 to 10 of full scale Default value The default value is 1 ture rise completion soak time setting Set the time taken to set CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G404 to Within temperature rise completion range 1 after the completion of the temperature rise Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature rise completion soak time setting 507 707 907 1107 Temperature rise completion soak time setting in the Q compatible mode 168 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 min Default v
128. tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto tuning status X7 CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status CH4 Auto tuning status X8 Setting value backup completion Setting value backup completion Setting value backup completion Setting value backup completion flag flag flag flag xg Default value write completion Default value write completion Default value write completion Default value write completion flag flag flag flag XA Setting value backup failure flag Setting value backup failure flag Setting value backup failure flag Setting value backup failure flag XB Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag Setting change completion flag XC CH1 Alert flag CH1 Alert flag CH1 Alert flag CH1 Alert flag XD CH2 Alert flag CH2 Alert flag CH2 Alert flag CH2 Alert flag XE CH3 Alert flag CH3 Alert flag CH3 Alert flag CH3 Alert flag XF CH4 Alert flag CH4 Alert flag CH4 Alert flag CH4 Alert flag Available only under the mix control expanded mode 2 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode 3 Available only under the position proportional control expanded mode 146 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal YO N A N A N A N A Y1 Setting operation mode Setting operation mode Setting operation mode Setting operation mode command command command command Y2 Error reset command Error reset
129. unit time of the setting variation rate limiter For details on the setting variation rate limiter setting function refer to the following K5 Page 53 Setting Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting 526 726 926 1126 CHO Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting in the Q compatible mode 735 751 767 783 ESetting range 0 Unit time setting not used e 1 to 3600 s When 0 has been set the temperature control module operation is the same as the operation of when 60 1 minute has been set Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is O unit time setting not used CH1 Open close output neutral band setting Set the output OFF area between the open side output and the close side output A neutral band is a value range where both of the open side output and the close side output are not on Repetitive outputs to the control motor due to frequent opening and closing can be prevented If the control motor is frequently opened and closed set a larger value If the temperature fluctuates due to infrequent opening and closing set a smaller value When the control operation
130. value 0 Setting O O JO JO 969 3C9H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 970 3CAH CH3 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O JIO JO 971 3CBH CH3 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 972 3CCH CH3 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O IO JO 973 to 999 System area m a 3CDH to 3E7H 1000 3E8H CH4 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor O 1 TCRT 1001 3E9H CH4 Alert definition 0 Monitor O 1002 3EAH CH4 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor 1003 3EBH CH4 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value MV value for value MV heating MVh 1004 3ECH CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Monitor rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment flag flag flag flag 1005 3EDH CH4 Transistor Heating Transistor Open side 0 Monitor output flag transistor output output flag transistor output flag flag APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 1006 3EEH CH4 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Monitor Oo monitor monitor monitor monitor 1007 3E
131. value SV 2 Pr Change i Set value SV 1 Pt 0 gt Time 1 Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting and CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 e When a setting variation rate limiter has been set The value in CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 follows the set value SV after the setting Temperature process value PV A Set value SV 2 Change Set value SV 1 1 Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 2 CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 3 Setting change rate limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting 4 Setting change rate limiter unit time setting of Limiter setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function Upper limit deviation alert When the deviation E is equal to or greater than the alert set value the system issues a deviation alert Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A A Set value sv Set value sv gt Time gt Time Deviation E Deviation E r Temperature process value PV set value SVY1 Temperature process value PV set value SV A A Alert set value 0 Time Oo Time Alert set value Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status
132. value The default value is 60 60s set value 1 According to a selected alert mode of Alert 1 set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 1 Un G401 b8 turns on For CH1 Alert definition Un G401 refer to the following K5 Page 219 CH1 Alert definition For details on the alert function refer to the following C Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert set value 1 434 634 834 1034 CHO Alert set value 1 in the Q compatible mode 38 70 102 134 BAlert mode Set the alert mode of Alert 1 in the following buffer memory area The alert mode of Alert 1 corresponds to CH1 Alert set value 1 Un G434 CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Un G533 HSetting range The setting range differs depending on the setting of the following buffer memory area Each full scale differs e CH1 Input range Un G501 Page 242 CH1 Input range The setting range also depends on the alert mode to be set No alert 0 E Upper limit input alert lower limit input alert Temperature measuring range of the input range Same as with standby Upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation Full scale to Full scale Same as with standby and standby second time alert upper limit deviation alert set value SV used lower limit deviation alert set value SV used Upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert O to Full scale Same a
133. with inter module simultaneous temperature rise 2174 to 2236 function enabled Start I O of slave module with inter module simultaneous temperature rise 1354 to 1416 function enabled in the Q compatible mode Up to 16 errors that occurred in the module are recorded b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G3600 Error code Un G3601 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G3602 Month Day Un G3603 Hour Minute Un G3604 Second Day of the week Un G3605 Millisecond higher order digits Millisecond lower order digits Un G3606 System area Un G3609 First two digits of the year last Stored in BCD code 2014H two digits of the year Month day 630H Hour minute 1234H Second 56H Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code 1H Sunday 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 and Saturday 6 Millisecond upper Stored in BCD code 7H Millisecond lower 89H Value stored when an error occurs at 12 34 56 789 on Monday June 30 2014 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Error history 3600 to 3759 2000 to 2159 Error history in the Q compatible mode APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 305 Up to 16 alarms that occurred in the module are recorded b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Error code Un G1811 First two di
134. 0 Control OIB band P setting proportional band P setting band P band Ph setting setting 832 340H CH3 Integral time I Integral time I Integral time I Integral time 1 240 Control O O setting setting setting setting 833 341H CH3 Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time 60 Control O D setting D setting D setting D setting 834 342H CH3 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 Alert set value 0 Control OF Or 15 19 835 343H CH3 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert set value 2 Alert set value 0 Control Or Wir ji 25 2 836 344H CH3 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 Alert set value 0 Control ID 3 3 837 345H CH3 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 Alert set value 0 Control O D 4 5 4 9 838 346H CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Control A process value process value process value process value PV for input PV for input PV for input PV for input with another with another with another with another analog module analog module analog module analog module 839 347H CH3 System area Cooling System area System area 30 Control O O proportional band Pc setting5 840 348H CH3 Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Control OHS constants read constants read constants read constants read command command com
135. 0 Monitor SO PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling value value value value 813 32DH CH3 ATsimultaneous System area ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor PO temperature rise temperature rise parameter parameter calculation flag calculation flag 814 32EH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor 0 temperature rise temperature rise status status 815 32FH CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor le EE control forced control forced control forced start status start status start status 816 330H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor pi LO value tuning flag value tuning value tuning flag flag 817 331H CH3 Feed forward control READY flag System area 0 Monitor fe pH 818 332H CH3 Feed forward control forced start READY flag System area 0 Monitor LO 819 333H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor S Pe 820 334H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor Se ee APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 821 to 829 System area SS 335H to 33DH 830 33EH CH3 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Control O D setting setting setting setting 831 33FH CH3 Proportional Heating Proportional Proportional 3
136. 00 to 9999 can be used Point 7 e When using the CTL 12 S36 8 current sensor CT set CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 e When using the CTL 6 P current sensor CT set CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings MOccurrence of a write data error When a value out of the setting value is set a write data error error code 1950H occurs Error flag X2 turns on and the error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO Default value The default value is CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 CT1 CT selection Q compatible mode Select the current sensor CT to be connected to CT1 in the Q compatible mode Setting range e 0 CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 1 CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A e 2 CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 299 Correspondence between each CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT1 272 CT2 273 CT3 274 CT4 275 CT5 276 CT6 277 CT7 278 CT8 279 Setting current sensors CT and buffer memory areas When using a current sensor CT other than the CTL 12 S36 8 and CTL 6 P H set the number of second winding turns of the current sensor CT to be connected in CT1 CT ratio setting in the Q compatible mode Un G288 Set the following buffer memory a
137. 05 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 n in the Q compatible mode stion monitor The setting of Control mode selection Un G300 is stored in this area The following table lists stored values and the details e OH Standard control e 1H Heating cooling control normal mode 2H Heating cooling control expanded mode 3H Mix control normal mode e 4H Mix control expanded mode e 5H Position proportional control normal mode e 6H Position proportional control expanded mode For details on the modes refer to the following K Page 13 Control Mode Selection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Control mode selection monitor 37 Control mode selection monitor in the Q compatible mode 183 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 203 The present sampling cycle is stored e 0 500ms 4 channels e 1 250ms 4 channels Set the sampling cycle in Sampling cycle selection Un G301 In the Q compatible mode set the sampling cycle in Sampling cycle selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b12 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Sampling cycle monitor Sampling cycle monitor in the Q compatible mode 788 The value set in Automatic setting at input range change Un G302 is stored Buffer memory address T
138. 1 Unused channel setting 0 Setting O IO 503 1F7H CH1 Stop mode setting 1 Setting O IO 504 1F8H CH1 Control output Heating control output cycle setting System area 30 15 Setting O IO cycle setting 300 16 505 1F9H CH1 Control response parameter 0 Setting O O 506 1FAH CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting 1 Setting O O 507 1FBH CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting O IO 508 1FCH CH1 Upper limit Heating upper limit output limiter System area 1000 Setting O IO output limiter 509 1FDH CH1 Lower limit System area 0 Setting O IO output limiter 510 1FEH CH1 Output variation amount limiter System area 0 Setting O IO 511 1FFH CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 TCTRT Setting O O JO 6000 TCRT 512 200H CH1 Lower limit setting limiter O TCTRT Setting O O O 2000 TCRT 513 201H CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature 0 Setting O IO rise 2 514 202H CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop 0 Setting O JO J 515 203H CH1 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse 1 Setting O IO action setting action setting 516 204H CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 5 Setting O IO 517 205H CH1 M
139. 1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 568 768 968 1168 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value in the Q 544 576 608 640 compatible mode Enabling the stored value Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 291 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value The correction value of the temperature corresponding to the sensor two point correction offset value is stored in this buffer memory area For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K5 Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 569 769 969 1169 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value in the Q 545 577 609 641 compatible mode ESetting range The temperature measuring range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 Page 242 CH1 Input range ESetting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a
140. 1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting ESetting method in the Q compatible mode Set 0 0 for Proportion Belt P Setting of Control basic parameters 15 Page 129 Application Setting XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters 1 FUNCTIONS 1 2 Control Method P control P control is a control method in which the manipulated value MV is determined proportional to the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and set value SV Standard control The manipulated value MV is 50 in the following conditions e Temperature process value PV Set value SV e CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 has been set to 0 0 0 Page 258 CH1 Manual reset amount setting Manipulated value MV 100 Temperature process 0 value PV 4 gt Proportional band P Set value SV A value to be actually output is within the output limiter range set in Upper limit output limiter and Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting 2 The set value SV is the center of the proportional band P BHeating cooling control The manipulated value for heating MVh and the manipulated value for cooling MVc are both 0 in the
141. 100 7 80 The manipulated value MV Kanioulated value Ss can be moved from 50 to 80 P i S to keep the set value SV stable MV i i l 1 a a pean jannn i 0 Y i Soon E Set value SV 1 i gt 1 Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 0 every 0 1 i Set 1000 to 1000 i gt Input range 28 1 FUNCTIONS 1 7 Manual Reset Function Heating cooling control The set value SV is set at a point where the manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc is 0 Thus as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV are not balanced at 0 of the manipulated value for heating MVh manipulated value for cooling MVc an offset remaining deviation is generated When an offset is generated the heating proportional band Ph cooling proportional band Pc can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control e CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 800 80 The temperature control module shifts the manipulated value MV in a stable condition at the set value SV from 0 to 80 Overlap dead band Heating proportional Cooling proportional band Ph band Pc Percentage to the full scale 4 Configure the settings as follows Integral time I 0 Derivative t
142. 14 2CAH CH2 Setting variation rate limiter Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting OP OP e temperature drop rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature drop 3 7 drop 715 2CBH CH2 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse 1 Setting Ol Or e action setting action setting 716 2CCH CH2 Adjustment sensitivity dead band Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting Or O setting sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting 717 2CDH CH2 Manual reset amount setting Manual reset System area 0 Setting Or amount setting 718 2CEH CH2 AUTO MAN mode shift AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting Or S mode shift 719 2CFH CH2 MAN output setting MAN output System area 0 Setting ID setting 720 2D0H CH2 System area Temperature System area 0 Setting Oo oO p conversion setting 721 2D1H CH2 System area Cooling upper Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting OPO o limit output limit output limiter limiter 7 722 2D2H CH2 System area Cooling control Cooling control System area 30 15 Setting o lo I output cycle output cycle 300 6 setting setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 165 723 2D3H CH2 System area Cooling method Cooling method System area 0 Setting O I0 0 setting setting 724 2D4H CH2 System area Ov
143. 19 Condition to execute the PID control e Temperature judgment lt Page 219 CH1 Alert definition Alert judgment Page 74 Condition for alert judgment Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area PID continuation flag 306 PID continuation flag in the Q compatible mode 169 Setting range e 0 Stop e 1 Continue Default value The default value is Stop 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 21 5 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Set the delay time of ON delay output flag Configure this setting to detect heater disconnections with another input module on the system For ON delay output flag refer to the following K Page 223 CH1 Transistor output flag For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following K Page 65 ON Delay Output Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 307 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting in the Q compatible mode 175 Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 50 10 to 500ms When 0 has been set ON delay output flag is not set to 1 ON Default value The default value is 0 Manipulated value resolution change for output with another analog module Set the resolutions of the following buffer memory areas CH1 Manipulated value
144. 3 Point This area is disabled for the following modes and channels e Heating cooling control normal mode position proportional control normal mode CH3 CH4 e Mix control normal mode CH2 Alert mode and alert set value Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 4 selected in this setting Set a value in CH1 Alert set value 4 Un G437 CH1 Alert set value 4 Un G437 corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 4 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting lt Page 268 Setting range Enabling the settings For enabling the settings refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting L Page 268 Enabling the settings Default value For the default value refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting K Page 268 Default value CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time The loop disconnection detection function detects errors such as disconnections of resistors malfunction of an externally operable device and errors of the control system due to troubles such as disconnection of a sensor When the temperature does not change by 2 C F or higher within the loop disconnection detection judgment time this function judges it as a loop disconnection For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following K Page 86 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address
145. 3 CH1 CH2 CH3 100 In case of default value applied CH4 EWhen the timing is divided into two parts The following table shows two examples Example 1 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 1 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 2 Example 2 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Not divided The following figure shows the relation between each group and the value of Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Seana Group 1 Group 2 Divided into 2 groups va 50 50 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MENTAS Group 1 Group 2 Divided into 2 groups v 50 50 CH1 CH2 4 100 In case of default value applied CH3 le 100 In case of default value applied CH4 1 FUNCTIONS 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function 93 Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Peak current suppression setting gt Peak current suppression control group setting 94 1 FUNCTIONS 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function This function allows several loops to reach the set value SV at the same time Simultaneous temperature rise can be executed on up to two groups separately by setting a group of the channels where temperatures rise at the same time This function is good for controlled objects in which the te
146. 3 CH4 CHO Control motor time 528 728 928 1128 CHO Control motor time in the Q compatible mode 1041 1057 1073 1089 Setting range The setting range is 5 to 1000 s Default value The default value is 10 s CH1 Integration output limiter setting When one side output is continuously performed several times each output ON time is integrated If the integrated time exceeds the setting value the output is turned off When the opposite side output is turned on while the one side output ON time is being integrated the integrated value is reset Ex If the control is started in the full closed state when CH1 Control motor time Un G528 has been set to 10 s and CH1 Integration output limiter setting Un G529 has been set to 1000 100 0 the operation is as follows The open side integrated value is expressed in the ratio of the open side output ON time to the control motor time Open side integrated value Open side output ON time Control motor time x 100 The open side output is turned off when the open side integrated value equals to the integration output limiter setting Open side output Open side output Onan Sidevoutnats4 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds P De OPLE open side integrated gt Stop gt open side integrated gt Stop gt j open side integrated value 100 value 30 value 80 When CH1 Control motor time Un G528
147. 30 or on the same network with SV CH4 the temperature control module CH1 ance akea nenen D bR 5 b0 of CHO Heating 1 5 transistor output flag CH2 Heating Output signals Un G21 Un G22 transistor output ee nea Un G24 CH3 p 20 Manipulated value CH4 gt Y21 for heating MVh 1 b0 of CHO Cooling CH1 m gt Y22 Manipulated value transistor output flag CH2 Cooling P Y23 Tor cooling MVG Un G712 Un G713 CH3 transistor output a E Un G714 Un G715 1 z CH4 e Y2F TB18 1 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Control Mode Selection Function 1 2 Control Method The following control methods can be achieved by setting a proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D e Two position control e P control e PI control e PD control PID control Point In the P control or PD control the manual reset is enabled 5 Page 28 Manual Reset Function Two position control Two position control is a control method that uses the 0 manipulated value MV and 100 manipulated value MV Turning on and off the manipulated value MV repeatedly makes the temperature process value come close to the set value SV and the temperature is kept constant Point By the setting in Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting of Application Setting the chattering of transistor outputs under two position control can be prevented Configure the setting for the set value SV EStandard control The module operates as follow
148. 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 the Q compatible mode Default value The default value is Mask interrupt not used 0 An interrupt factor reset request is issued 0 No reset request 1 Reset request When Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 corresponding to a generated interrupt factor has been set to Reset request 1 the interrupt factor corresponding to a specified interrupt is reset After that Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 changes to No reset request 0 The setting value of 2 or larger is handled as Reset request 1 n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Interrupt factor reset request 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 n Interrupt factor reset request 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3078 3079 n in the Q compatible mode 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 EDefault value The default value is No reset request 0 APPENDICES 210 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas stor generation setting n Configure the interrupt request setting for when an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected 0 Interrupt reissue request 1 No interrupt reissue
149. 3759 All Error history Monitor l E10H to EAFH 3760 to 3919 All Alarm history Monitor Se EBOH to F4FH 3920 to 4095 System area SS eS eaa F50H to FFFH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 179 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 180 Enabled only when the R60TCTRT2TT2 or R60TCTRT2TT2BW is used This setting differs depending on whether Setting variation rate limiter setting selection Un G303 is set to Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop 1 Enabled only when Setting variation rate limiter setting selection Un G303 has been set to Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop 1 Can be changed only in the setting mode Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Heating cooling control expanded mode 2 When Heating cooling control normal mode 2 is set this area becomes a system area Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Heating cooling control normal mode 1 When Heating cooling control expanded mode 1 is set this area becomes a system area Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Mix control expanded mode 4 When Mix control normal mode 3 is set this area becomes a system area Enabled only when Control mode selection Un G300 has been set to Mix control normal mode 3 When Mix control
150. 3H CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Monitor e 16 rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment flag flag flag flag 20 14H CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Monitor Se fr rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment flag flag flag flag 21 15H CH1 Transistor Heating Heating Open side 0 Monitor re ome 2S output flag transistor output transistor output transistor output flag flag flag 22 16H CH2 Transistor Heating Heating Open side 0 Monitor ee ee IO output flag transistor output transistor output transistor output flag flag flag APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 181 23 17H CH3 Transistor Heating Transistor Open side 0 Monitor O output flag transistor output output flag transistor output flag flag 24 18H CH4 Transistor Heating Transistor Open side 0 Monitor O output flag transistor output output flag transistor output flag flag 25 19H CH1 Set value SV monitor 0 Monitor O 26 1AH CH2 Set value SV monitor Set value SV Set value SV 0 Monitor O monitor monitor 27 1BH CH3 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV
151. 5 2DH CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting O JO 46 2EH CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 5 Setting O JO 47 2FH CH1 Control output Heating control output cycle setting System area 30 17 Setting O IO cycle setting 300 18 48 30H CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting O JO 49 31H CH1 Control response parameter 0 Setting O O 50 32H CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting O JO 51 33H CH1 MAN output setting System area 0 Setting O O 52 34H CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature 0 Setting O JO rise 1 53 35H CH1 AT bias 0 Setting O O JO 54 36H CH1 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse 1 Setting O O action setting action setting 55 37H CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 TCTRT Setting O O O 6000 TCRT 56 38H CH1 Lower limit setting limiter O TCTRT Setting O O JO 2000 TCRT 57 39H System area n 58 3AH CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting System area 0 Setting O JO O APPENDICES 182 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 59 3BH CH1 Loop System area 480 Setting O IO disconnection detection judgment time 60 3CH CH1 Loop System area 0 Setting OO disconnection detection de
152. 7 Group 7 selection e 8 Group 8 selection e 9 Group 9 selection e 10 Group 10 selection e 11 Group 11 selection e 12 Group 12 selection e 13 Group 13 selection e 14 Group 14 selection e 15 Group 15 selection e 16 Group 16 selection Setting range for the mix control when the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function is enabled only CH3 and CH4 0 No simultaneous temperature rise e 1 Group 1 selection e 2 Group 2 selection e 3 Group 3 selection e 4 Group 4 selection e 5 Group 5 selection e 6 Group 6 selection e 7 Group 7 selection e 8 Group 8 selection e 9 Group 9 selection e 10 Group 10 selection e 11 Group 11 selection e 12 Group 12 selection e 13 Group 13 selection e 14 Group 14 selection e 15 Group 15 selection e 16 Group 16 selection Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is No simultaneous temperature rise 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 281 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Set simultaneous temperature rise gradient data temperature rise per minute For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following K Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Simu
153. 700 0 0 to 3000 F 1 106 3000 0 B 0 to 1800 C 1 16 1800 0 0 to 3000 F 1 107 3000 0 E 0 to 400 C 1 17 400 0 0 to 1000 C 1 18 1000 0 0 0 to 700 0 C 0 1 44 7000 0 200 0 to 1000 0 C 0 1 51 10000 2000 0 to 1800 F 1 108 1800 0 N 0 to 1300 C 1 22 1300 0 0 0 to 1000 0 2C 0 1 52 10000 0 0 to 2300 oF 1 111 2300 0 U 200 to 200 C 1 26 200 200 0 to 400 Cc 1 25 400 0 0 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 46 6000 0 300 to 400 F 1 115 400 300 0 to 700 F 1 114 700 0 L 0 to 400 C 1 27 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 C 0 1 47 4000 0 0 to 900 C 1 28 900 0 0 0 to 900 0 C 0 1 48 9000 0 0 to 800 F 1 116 800 0 0 to 1600 F 1 117 1600 0 PLI 0 to 1200 i 1 23 1200 0 0 to 2300 F 1 112 2300 0 WRe5 26 0 to 2300 C 1 24 2300 0 0 to 3000 F 1 113 3000 0 Input with another analog 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 module 0 to 4000 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 243 Input with another analog 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 module 0 to 12000 Input with another analog 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 module 0 to 16000 Input with another analog 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 module 0 to 20000 Input with another analog 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 module 0 to 32000 1 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to the default values For the following modes and channels CH1 Input range Un G501 cannot b
154. 80 module in the Q compatible mode ue for cooling MVc for output with another analog module The values stored in the following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules on the system such as a D A converter module and stored in this buffer memory area CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc 408 Page 222 CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc For details on this area refer to the following lt gt Page 224 CH1 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc for output with another analog 409 609 809 1009 module CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc for output with another analog 708 709 710 711 module in the Q compatible mode stor output flag For details on this area refer to the following K Page 223 CH1 Transistor output flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling transistor output flag 410 610 810 1010 CHO Cooling transistor output flag in the Q compatible mode 712 713 714 715 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 225 ose side transistor output flag For details on this area refer to the following K5 Page 223 CH1 Transistor output flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area
155. 801 321H CH3 Alert definition 0 Monitor Ss ae PO 802 322H CH3 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor lO 803 323H CH3 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor eo value MV value for value MV heating MVh 804 324H CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Monitor So rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment rise judgment flag flag flag flag 805 325H CH3 Transistor Heating Transistor Open side 0 Monitor PPO output flag transistor output output flag transistor output flag flag 806 326H CH3 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Monitor i 1S monitor monitor monitor monitor 807 327H CH3 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor S O value MV for value for value MV for output with heating MVh output with another analog for output with another analog module another analog module module 808 328H CH3 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor Nc e value for cooling MVc 809 329H CH3 System area Manipulated System area 0 Monitor SS IO value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module gt 810 32AH CH3 System area Cooling System area Close side 0 Monitor me transistor output transistor output flag flag 811 32BH CH3 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor Sf Pr IO 812 32CH CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value
156. 9 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting 235 CH1 Heating transistor output flag 223 CH1 Heating upper limit output limiter 252 CH1 HOLD CLEAR setting 241 CH1 Input range 220000 00 ee 242 CH1 Integral time I setting 235 CH1 Integration output limiter setting 264 CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band 271 CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time ES ee eee rr eee a ae ee 270 CH1 Lower limit output limiter 252 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 255 CH1 MAN output setting 259 CH1 Manipulated value MV 221 CH1 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module 224 CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc 222 CH1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module 225 CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh 221 CH1 Manipulated value for heating MVh for output with another analog module 225 CH1 Manual reset amount setting 258 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command 239 CH1 Number of alert delay 267 CH1 Number of moving averaging setting 293 CH1 Open side transistor output flag 224 CH1 Open close output neutral band setting 263 CH1 Output variation amount limiter 253 CH1 Overlap dead band setting 262 CH1 Overshoot suppression le
157. 9 441H CH4 System area Control motor 10 Setting time 1090 442H CH4 System area Integration 1500 Setting output limiter setting 1091 443H CH4 System area Valve operation 0 Setting setting during CPU module STOP 1092 444H CH4 Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance System area 0 Setting judgment judgment judgment position position position 1093 445H CH4 Set value return Set value return Set value return System area 0 Setting adjustment adjustment adjustment 1094 446H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting control forced control forced control forced starting signal starting signal starting signal 1095 447H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting value value value 1096 448H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting value tuning value tuning value tuning selection selection selection 1097 449H CH4 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting error judgment error judgment error judgment error judgment time time time time 1098 44AH CH4 Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting suppression suppression suppression suppression level setting level setting level setting level setting 1099 44BH CH4 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting disconnection disconnection judgment mode judgment mode 1100 to 1199 System area 44CH to 4AFH 1200 4B0H CH1 Feed forward value memory read c
158. 9 910 00802 CH2 Process value PV out of input 2015 07 02 18 52 39 910 00801 CH1 Process value PV out of input x Operating status change RUN r eleje 472 Wering G Information Detailed Information System configuration information YO No 0000 Slot No 0 Base No 0 Main base A moderate error has been notified from the inteligent function module connected Check the detailed information system configuration information identify the error module and eliminate the error cause 136 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 2 Checking the Module Status 3 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom flag X0 does not turn on When Module READY flag X0 does not turn on check the following items Has a watchdog timer error occurred Reset the CPU module or turn on the power supply again e Replace the temperature control module Refer to the MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application Has an error occurred in the CPU module When Error flag X2 is on check the following items Has an error occurred Check Latest error code and take a corrective action described in List of Error Codes Page 139 List of Error Codes flag X3 is on When Hardware error flag x3 i is on check the following items Is the cold junction temperature compensation resistor disconnected or loose
159. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller series MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Manual Application R60TCTRT2TT2 R60TCTRT2TT2BW R60TCRT4 R60TCRT4BW SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels JN WARNING and JN CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in A WARNING death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in A CAUTION minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under JN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions N WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system op
160. 93 125 157 Setting range 0 Used e 1 Not used Default value The default value is Used 0 Turning on Default setting registration command Y9 Turning off and on Default setting registration command Y9 resets the setting of CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 to Used 0 When there are the channels to which no temperature control is executed or no temperature sensors are connected set those channels as unused channels again after the completion of the default setting registration Set CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 to Unused 1 again 246 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas etting Set the mode to be activated when the PID control stops Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Stop mode setting 503 703 903 1103 CHO Stop mode setting in the Q compatible mode 33 65 97 129 Setting range and operation of the temperature control module The following table lists the relation between them O Executed x Not executed Stop 0 x x x Monitor 1 x O x Alert 2 x O O 1 The temperature control module checks whether the input temperature is within the temperature measuring range of the input range 2 The temperature control module judges the occurrence of Alert 1 to Alert 4 and rate alarms However an operation of the temperature control module differs depending on the following settings
161. CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag System area 0 Monitor 1463 5B7H CH2 Feed forward control forced start Feed forward System area 0 Monitor READY flag control forced start READY flag 1464 5B8H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor control forced control forced control forced start READY start READY start READY flag flag flag 1465H 5B9H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor control forced control forced control forced start READY start READY start READY flag flag flag 1466 to 1535 System area a 5BAH to 5FFH 1536 600H All Latest address of error history 0 Monitor O 1537 601H All Error address 0 Monitor O 1538 602H All Latest alarm code 0 Monitor O 1539 603H All Latest address of alarm history 0 Monitor O 1540 to 1999 System area 604H to 7CFH 2000 to 2159 All Error history 0 Monitor 7DOH to 86FH 2160 to 2319 All Alarm history 0 Monitor 870H to 90FH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 2320 to 2999 System area a ee eee ee ee 910H to BB7H 3000 to 3015 All Interrupt factor detection flag n 0 Monitor IO BB8H to BC7H 3016 to 3031 System area Sl ee ee a BC8H to BD7H 3032 to 3047 All Interrupt factor mask n 0 Control BD8H to BE7H 3048 to 3063 System area E E ee BE8H to BF7H 3064 to 3079 All Interrupt facto
162. CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting O IO 564 234H CH1 Sensor correction function selection 0 Setting O IO JO 565 235H CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting O IO 566 236H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 567 237H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 568 238H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 569 239H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 570 23AH CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 571 23BH CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 572 23CH CH1 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O IO JO 573 to 599 System area Se 23DH to 257H 600 258H CH2 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor gt I gt I gt 1 TCRT 601 259H CH2 Alert definition 0 Monitor 602 25AH CH2 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor 603 25BH CH2 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value MV value for value for heating MVh heating MVh 604 25CH CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag Temperature Temperature 0 Monitor rise ju
163. D converter module and D A converter module on the system Input The temperature control module generally uses the temperature measured by the thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer connected to the module as the temperature process value PV The temperature control module can uses the digital input value of the current or voltage converted in another analog module such as A D converter module on the system as a temperature process value PV Setting method 1 Select one of Input with Another Analog Module Measured Temperature Range 0 to 4000 to Input with Another Analog Module Measured Temperature Range 0 to 32000 in the following setting XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters gt Input range setting 2 Store the value of another analog module such as an A D converter module in CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G438 Point aa amp 7 2ssa 4 as aus es ht e When the setting procedure 2 is executed without the setting procedure 1 an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs e When this function is used the value in CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G438 is the target of the temperature process value PV scaling function Page 63 Scaling Function Output Instead of the transistor o
164. Description and cause Action 1ACOH CHO Auto tuning error The PID constants calculation value is out of the allowable range After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 take the following actions depending on the situation Proportional band lt 1 Error cause The amplitude of the control response during AT is small e Check the upper limit output limiter value If the value is smaller than 100 change the value Check the lower limit output limiter value If the value is greater than 0 change the value Change the input range to narrow the measured temperature range Proportional band gt Full scale of the input range in the R mode Proportional band 10001 when the Q compatible mode function is used Error cause The amplitude of the control response during AT is large Change the upper limit output limiter value and the lower limit output limiter value to reduce the amplitude of the control response during AT Hintegral time lt 1 Error cause The vibration cycle of the control response during AT is short Set the upper limit output limiter larger and the lower limit output limiter smaller Check the setting of Auto tuning mode selection When the high response mode has been set change the mode to standard mode Hintegral time gt 3601 Error cause The vibration cycle of the control response during AT is long e Check the primary delay digital filter value and change it if necess
165. E to become the value obtained by multiplying Ixe by the manipulated value MV of a proportional action is called derivative time and expressed as Tp Condition Derivative action When the derivative time Tp is short The derivative effect becomes small When the derivative time Tp is long The derivative effect becomes large However the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value in short cycles The following figure shows a derivative action of step responses of when the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E E gt Time Manipulated value MV 1 Manipulated value MV in a derivative action 2 Manipulated value MV in a proportional action gt Time A derivative action is used as a PD action in combination with a proportional action or PID action in combination with a proportional action and an integral action A derivative action cannot be used by itself PID action A PID action executes the control using the manipulated value MV calculated by adding the proportional action integral action and derivative action The following figure shows a PID action of step responses of when the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E ial gt Time PID action SPI action Laction a e ses aed os z777 P action Manipulated a ee value MV wee D action Time APPENDICES 31 6 Appendix 4 PID INDEX A A
166. FH CH4 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor Se re EE value MV for value for value MV for output with heating MVh output with another analog for output with another analog module another analog module module 1008 3F0H CH4 System area Manipulated System area System area 0 Monitor Se i re HS value for cooling MVc gt 1009 3F1H CH4 System area Manipulated System area System area 0 Monitor Si value for cooling MVc for output with another analog module gt 1010 3F2H CH4 System area Cooling System area Close side 0 Monitor eo transistor output transistor output flag flag 1011 3F3H CH4 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor i O 1012 3F4H CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Monitor Se eS PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling value value value value 1013 3F5H CH4 ATsimultaneous System area ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor Sr NO temperature rise temperature rise parameter parameter calculation flag calculation flag 1014 3F6H CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor 0O temperature rise temperature rise status status 1015 3F7H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Monitor oO control forced control forced control forced start status start status start status 1016 3F8H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward Sy
167. H CH1 Number of alert delay 0 Setting O O 533 215H CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 0 Setting O lo lo 534 216H CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 0 Setting O lo lo 535 217H CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 0 Setting O lo lo 536 218H CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 0 Setting O JO o 537 219H CH1 Loop System area 480 Setting O o disconnection detection judgment time 538 21AH CH1 Loop System area 0 Setting 1O O O disconnection detection dead band 539 21BH CH1 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting O IO JO 540 21CH CH1 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting O IO JIO 541 21DH CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting O IO JO 542 21EH CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting O IO JO 543 21FH CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 0 Setting O IO 544 220H CH1 Auto tuning error judgment time 120 Setting O IO 545 221H CH1 During AT loop System area 0 Setting O IO disconnection detection function enable disable 546 222H CH1 AT bias 0 Setting O 1o o 547 223H CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants 0 Setting O IO 548 224H CH1 Self tuning System area 0 Setting O P setting 549 225H CH1 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting 0 Setting
168. H CH4 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting Or Ox O setting setting 4 5 setting setting 9 1134 46EH CH4 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting O O O setting setting 4 5 setting setting 1135 46FH CH4 Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting O lO O setting setting t5 setting setting 9 1136 470H CH4 Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting Oo PO Or setting setting 4 5 setting setting 9 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 175 1137 471H CH4 Loop System area Loop System area 480 Setting O IO disconnection disconnection detection detection judgment time judgment time 1138 472H CH4 Loop System area Loop System area 0 Setting O 0O disconnection disconnection detection dead detection dead band band 1139 473H CH4 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting OIO O 1140 474H CH4 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting O JO JO 1141 475H CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting Our 1142 476H CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting OO O 1143 477H CH4 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting o o mode selection mode mode selection mode selection selection 1144 478H CH4 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting
169. H1 Auto tuning status X4 turns on and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated 2 A calculation value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been properly calculated The module turns on CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status Un G411 b1 and turns off CH1 Auto tuning status X4 and the control is shifted to the PID control ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF y i r i Control status PID control X Self tuning K PID control i h CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient i a data Un G554 I a A Calculated and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise l value dead time Un G555 r CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise i So ON parameter correction status OFF i h Un G411 b1 r 1 Saar gt Executed by the temperature control module 1 When the temperature control starts the set value SV is changed or vibration is detected 4 00 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Conditions to execute the simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting with self tuning The conditions are the same as the ones for the starting ST 5 Page 44 Conditions for execution When the self tuning cannot be started the temperature control module operates as follows with the PID control continued e CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on The following shows how the temperature control
170. H1 Set value SV setting CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 Page 235 CH1 Integral time I setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 Page 246 CH1 Unused channel setting CH1 Control output cycle setting Un G504 Page 248 CH1 Control output cycle setting CH1 Upper limit output limiter Un G508 Page 251 CH1 Upper limit output limiter CH1 Lower limit output limiter Un G509 Page 252 CH1 Lower limit output limiter CH1 Output variation amount limiter Un G510 Page 253 CH1 Output variation amount limiter CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter Un G513 Page 255 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise temperature rise CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop Un G514 Page 256 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop CH1 Direct reverse action setting Un G515 Page 256 CH1 Direct reverse action setting CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 Page 258 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting Un G563 Page 288 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting CH1 Sensor correction value setting Un G565 Page 290 CH1 Sensor correction value setting Only during start up 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function 47 48 Precautions e Before starting the temperature control
171. H2 Loop System area 0 Setting O 0 disconnection detection dead band 739 2E3H CH2 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting OUSO 740 2E4H CH2 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting O 741 2E5H CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting IOIO 742 2E6H CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting OOO 743 2E7H CH2 Auto tuning mode selection Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting Ov mode mode selection selection 744 2E8H CH2 Auto tuning error judgment time Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting OF Or error judgment error judgment time time 745 2E9H CH2 During AT loop System area 0 Setting O disconnection detection function enable disable 746 2EAH CH2 AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting O ID APPENDICES 166 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 747 2EBH CH2 Automatic backup setting after auto Automatic Automatic 0 Setting O IO tuning of PID constants backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID of PID constants constants 748 2ECH CH2 Self tuning System area 0 Setting O IO setting 749 2EDH CH2 Process value PV scaling function Process value Process value 0 Setting O IO JO enable disable setting PV scaling PV scaling function enable function enable disable s
172. I O Signal 147 Setting operation mode status This signal is on in the operation mode and off in the setting mode ON Setting operation mode command Y1 OFF Sy S y i ON 1 Setting operation mode status i p i p X1 OFF f Setting mode at Operation mode Setting mode Mode transition power ON during operation after operation During mode shift processing During mode shift processing gt Executed by the temperature control module Precautions during the mode shift processing The mode shift processing means the following timings e From when Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on until when Setting operation mode status X1 turns on in the figure above From when Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned off until when Setting operation mode status X1 turns off in the figure above During the mode shift processing do not change the set values If the set values are changed during the mode shift processing operations of the module cannot be guaranteed Use Setting operation mode status X1 as an interlock condition for Setting operation mode command Y1 when changing the set values Point The conditions to determine whether to execute the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgment to be executed by the temperature control module differ among the following timings e Setting mode at power on e Operation mode durin
173. I gt I gt 616 to 627 System area SS ee 268H to 273H 628 274H CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O IO rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature drop drop 115 drop 15 drop 5 5 629 to 636 System area fe 275H to 27CH 637 27DH CH3 ATsimultaneous System area ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor gt temperature rise temperature rise parameter parameter calculation flag calculation flag 638 27EH CH3 Self tuning System area Self tuning System area 0 Setting O IO setting setting 639 27FH CH3 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor 640 280H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting O O JO JO 641 281H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 642 282H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 643 283H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 644 284H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 645 285H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor 646 286H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setti
174. Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor le simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function state function state monitor monitor 1351 547H All Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor eS S simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function enable function enable disable monitor disable monitor 1352 548H All Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor Sf simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function master function master slave selection slave selection monitor monitor 1353 549H All Number of slave System area Number of slave System area Monitor Se modules with modules with inter module inter module simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function function enabled enabled 1354 to 1416 All Start I O of slave System area Start I O ofslave System area Monitor Sl 54AH to 588H module with module with inter module inter module simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function function enabled enabled APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 199 200 1417 589H All Feed forward value read completion flag System area 0 Monitor 1418 to 1449 System area 58AH to 5A9H 1450 5AAH CH1
175. InterruptFactorRes etRequest_D 3 0 U0 G159 0 SET G_bDisconnectDetection FO IRET 144 1 FUNCTIONS 1 40 Interrupt Function EN Je 1 41 Q Compatible Mode Function This function arranges the buffer memory addresses of the temperature control module to become equivalent to the ones of a MELSEC Q series module Sequence programs proven with the MELSEC Q series module can be used The following table shows the MELSEC iQ R series temperature control modules that can be replaced with the MELSEC Q series temperature control modules MELSEC iQ R series temperature control module MELSEC Q series temperature control module R6OTCTRT2TT2 Q64TCTTN Q64TCTT R6OTCTRT2TT2BW Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCTTBW R60TCRT4 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRT R60TCRT4BW Q64TCRTBWN Q64TCRTBW Operation In the Q compatible mode only the assignment of buffer memory areas is changed The assignment of I O signals is the same as the one for the R mode Every function added for the MELSEC iQ R series has been assigned to each buffer memory area and all the added functions can be used in the Q compatible mode Thus not major program revision is required when a program for the MELSEC Q series is used In addition PID constants can be set with parameters Point e When a program for the MELSEC Q series has been used and an error code has been set as an operating condition or interlock condition the
176. Items where a value is selected from a drop down list Clicking the V button of the item to be set displays the drop down list Select the item e Items where a value is entered into a text box Double click the item to be set and enter a value 2 PARAMETER SETTING 4 29 2 2 Application Setting 2 3 CT Setting Setting method Configure the settings in CT setting of the engineering tool 1 Start parameters XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt CT setting input the Setting item to Search dh External current sensors 0 Unused 0 Unused O Unused 0 Unused O CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A O CTL 12L 8 0 0 O CTL 12L 8 0 0 0 CTL 12L 8 00A 00A 00A 00A 2 Double click the item to change the setting and enter a setting value e Items where a value is selected from a drop down list Clicking the V button of the item to be set displays the drop down list Select the item e Items where a value is entered into a text box Double click the item to be set and enter a value 2 PARAMETER SETTING 1 30 2 3 CT Setting 2 4 Interrupt Setting Configure the settings in Interrupt setting of the engineering tool 1 Start parameters XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Interrupt setting Sett
177. N mode shift MAN mode shift MAN mode shift MAN mode shift completion flag Un G44 uncompleted 0 CMAN ioa 1 N uncompleted 0 gt Executed by the temperature control module Set the manipulated value MV in the MAN mode after checking the completion of the mode shift processing 258 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas MWhen executing the auto tuning Set AUTO 0 When MAN 1 has been set the auto tuning is not executed Default value The default value is AUTO 0 M f ting This buffer memory area is used to set the manipulated value MV in the MAN mode Even though writing of data is executed during control in the AUTO mode the setting values do not change Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO MAN output setting 519 719 919 1119 CHO MAN output setting in the Q compatible mode 51 83 115 147 HHow to shift the mode Change the mode with the following buffer memory area CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 Page 258 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Setting range The setting range differs depending on the standard control and the heating cooling control 15 Page 13 Control Mode Selection Function Standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 e Heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 0 Enabling the settings Before writing a value in MAN output setting check that the target bit of MAN mo
178. SV or not If not proceed to No 8 2 Check if the control response is oscillatory or not If not proceed to No 8 3 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 is on Vibration ST Page 150 Auto tuning status A CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned off Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag Qr PID constants are calculated and changed by the self tuning gt CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned on Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag N CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off Page 150 Auto tuning status go The temperature is controlled with the set PID constants 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function 43 44 Operation with starting ST This section describes the operation when the temperature control is started or the set value SV is changed starting ST With starting ST the module monitors the response waveform of the temperature process value PV of when the temperature control is started or when the set value SV is changed and automatically corrects PID constants The following describes the operations of the module with starting ST 1 x4 CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned off CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns on Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag Page 150 Auto tuning status The temperature is controlled using the set PID constants When a control response is poor PID constants are calculated based on the response wavef
179. Set value SV 0 Monitor O monitor monitor monitor monitor gt 28 1CH CH4 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Monitor O monitor monitor monitor monitor gt 29 1DH All Cold junction temperature process value 0 Monitor 30 1EH All MAN mode shift completion flag System area 0 Monitor 31 1FH All Memory s PID constants read write completion flag 0 Monitor 32 20H CH1 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting O JO 7 TCRT 33 21H CH1 Stop mode setting 1 Setting O JO 34 22H CH1 Set value SV setting 0 Setting O O JO O 35 23H CH1 Proportional Heating Heating Proportional 30 Setting O JO O band P setting proportional proportional band P setting band Ph band Ph setting setting 36 24H CH1 Integral time I setting 240 Setting O JO O 37 25H CH1 Derivative time D setting 60 Setting O O O 38 26H CH1 Alert set value 1 0 Setting O O JO O 39 27H CH1 Alert set value 2 0 Setting O O JO O 40 28H CH1 Alert set value 3 0 Setting O O JO O 41 29H CH1 Alert set value 4 0 Setting O O O O 42 2AH CH1 Upper limit Heating upper limit output limiter System area 1000 Setting O JO output limiter 43 2BH CH1 Lower limit System area 0 Setting O O output limiter 44 2CH CH1 Output variation amount limiter System area 0 Setting O JO 4
180. Set value SV P 1 AT point gt 1 CH1 AT bias Un G546 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO AT bias 546 746 946 1146 CHO AT bias in the Q compatible mode 53 85 117 149 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 275 HSetting range The setting range is Full scale to Full scale The setting range depends on the setting of CH1 Input range Un G501 When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas e CH1 Input range Un G501 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C resolution 0 1 The setting range is 6000 to 6000 Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Default value The default value is 0 Precautions For CH1 AT bias Un G546 set a range in which a PID operation fluctuates slightly and control results get no effect Depending on the controlled object used accurate PID constants may not be obtained CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants This function automatically backs up the setting values stored in buffer memory areas at the completion of the auto tuning into the non volatile memory By reading the set values
181. Setting GB CT setting x GB Interupt setting Latest address of error history REE Latest alarm code Transfer to PLC Latest address of alarm history Temperature process value PV Manipulated value MV Transistor output flag Warning Occurrence Contents Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Temperature rise judgment flag Set value SV monitor AT Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Self tuning flag e data on buffer memory will Thed be transferred to specified device Enable Temperature conversion completion flag Process value PV scaling value Simultaneous temnerature rise status Explanation The data on buffer memory will be transferred to specified device a 2 Click Target and set a refresh destination When Target is Module Label Set whether to enable or disable the auto refresh by setting Latest error code to Enable or Disable e When Target is Refresh Data Register RD The transfer destinations of all items are automatically set by setting a start device name for Top Device Name e When Target is Device Double click the item to be set and enter a value 3 Click Refresh Group and set the timing to execute the auto refresh Set Refresh Group to At the Execution Time of END Instruction or At the Execution Time of Specified Program When setting At the Execution Time of
182. Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter When the system goes into the non alert status even once after an alert judgment has started following the set alert mode an alert with wait is disabled even though the mode is shifted to the one with standby Setting method Select one of the following alert modes Page 74 Alert mode 7 Upper limit input alert with wait 8 Lower limit input alert with wait 9 Upper limit deviation alert with wait 10 Lower limit deviation alert with wait 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with wait 19 Upper limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value 20 Lower limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value 21 Upper lower limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function A function to deactivate the alert function once again when the set value SV is changed is added to an alert with wait This is called an alert with re wait When a control that changes the set value SV is executed the alert that is supposed to occur can be avoided when the set value SV is changed by selecting an alert with re wait Ex When the temperature process value PV is at the position shown as below before the set value SV change Temperature process value PV Before set value Alert region SV change SV g i Alert set value Set value SV
183. Simultaneous temperature rise The generic term of simultaneous temperature rise dead time and simultaneous temperature rise gradient data parameter d FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the function details of the temperature control module For details on the I O signals and buffer memory areas refer to the following K Page 147 Details of input signals K5 Page 155 Details of output signals K5 Page 202 Details of buffer memory addresses Point This chapter describes the I O signals and buffer memory addresses for CH1 For details on the I O signals for CH2 or later refer to the following K5 Page 146 List of I O signals For details on the buffer memory addresses for CH2 or later refer to the following lt Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses 1 1 Control Mode Selection Function A control mode can be selected using this function This section describes control modes that can be selected for the temperature control module Standard control heating cooling control position proportional control There are three types of control modes in the temperature control module Standard control heating cooling control and position proportional control Standard control The control method is either one of heating reverse action or cooling direct action When the control method is heating of a heater for example cooling is controlled by simply turning off the heating When the control method is cooling of cold water fo
184. V CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion Un G413 b0 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status Maximum gradient Auto tuning waveform CH1 Self tuning flag P Un G411 ON OFF CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G413 Dead time i Time Simultaneous i Self tuning start temperature rise j AT start ON 1 Setting operation mode status 5 X1 OFF l i ON CH1 Auto tuning status 4 f X4 OFF i i Lo i ON CH1 Auto tuning command i i Y4 OFF i Pallet Tet pet ol At ota tee E Rl TERE E EA co 2 nk oa Es ct CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 b0 OFF i f i CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status Un G411 b1 oF i ni CH1 Simultaneous temperature i i rise parameter error status i i i Un G411 b9 OFF CH1 Self tuning error i i i Un G411 b10 OFF sing aig psc eg tag a ase eg Sa hn aap ai Se ee atte a on VENETE I ee PD es oes A ARN wc St Un G413 b1 1 FUNCTIONS 4 0 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 5 1 33 Inter module Link Function The inter module link function has the following two functions e Inter module peak current suppression function e Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function These functions control temperatures with multiple temperature control modules T
185. When the following values have been set e Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C e Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 200 0 C e Overlap dead band setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting 15 0 C The range of 185 0 C to 200 0 C is the overlapping area The temperature where a cooling operation starts Set value SV 15 0 C 185 0 C As shown below shifting the temperature where a cooling operation starts to the lower temperature side of the set value SV produces an overlapping area The following is an example of when the module is in P control Heating only manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 Cooling only Heating Cooling manipulated value for heating MVh 0 100 Heating a Cooling starts at 185 0 C Temperature 0 process value PV Set value SV is 200 0 C Cooling 100 Point In the Q compatible mode set 2 5 for Overlap dead band setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting 400 C 200 C x 0 025 15 C 1 FUNCTIONS 1 6 Overlap dead Band Function 25 26 Dead band The dead band refers to the temperature area where neither heating control output nor cooling control output is executed When the temperature process value PV
186. YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Disable 0 setting n Set the channels to detect interrupts 0 All channels 1 CH1 2 CH2 3 CH3 4 CH4 When a channel has been specified in Condition target setting n Un G232 to Un G247 interrupt factors in the channel set in this area are monitored When an input signal X has been set the settings in this area are ignored When a value other than the above has been set a condition target channel setting range error error code 182 AH occurs n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Condition target channel 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 setting n Condition target channel 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 setting n in the Q compatible mode Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is All channels 0 1 2 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Select a control mode Depending on this setting the control method of e
187. a 0 Setting OP PO judgment judgment judgment position position position 1077 435H CH3 Set value return Set value return Set value return System area 0 Setting Or MO adjustment adjustment adjustment 1078 436H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting Oo control forced control forced control forced starting signal starting signal starting signal 1079 437H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting On Os ee value value value 1080 438H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O s value tuning value tuning value tuning selection selection selection 1081 439H CH3 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting Or O OL error judgment error judgment error judgment error judgment time time time time gt 1082 43AH CH3 Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting OL E poe fe suppression suppression suppression suppression level setting level setting level setting level setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 197 198 1083 43BH CH3 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting disconnection disconnection judgment mode judgment mode 1084 to 1087 System area a 43CH to 43FH 1088 440H CH4 System area Open close 20 Setting output neutral band setting 108
188. a 30 75 Setting cycle setting output cycle cycle setting 300 16 setting 1105 451H CH4 Control Control Control Control 0 Setting response response response response parameter parameter parameter parameter 1106 452H CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 1 Setting rise completion rise completion rise completion rise completion range setting range setting range setting range setting 1107 453H CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Setting rise completion rise completion rise completion rise completion soak time soak time soak time soak time setting setting setting setting 1108 454H CH4 Upper limit Heating upper Upper limit System area 1000 Setting output limiter limit output output limiter limiter 1109 455H CH4 Lower limit System area Lower limit System area 0 Setting output limiter output limiter 1110 456H CH4 Output variation Output variation Output variation System area 0 Setting amount limiter amount limiter amount limiter 1111 457H CH4 Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 1112 458H CH4 Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 1113 459H CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting rate limiter rate limite
189. a pie tee Seats seed 304 Within range alert 00005 70 P PCONUOM sis dsane tang odes Game oh ees E as 17 PD control 2 2 42440eb2 0 eer a a ered 18 Peak current suppression control group setting Q compatible mode 279 PICONWOl once seta d bhatt had eee 18 PID constants 00000 eee eee 12 PID continuation flag 2005 215 PID CONTON acc opea Paes Bae eee ea 19 PID control forced stop command 157 Position proportional control 13 Q Q compatible mode 00 12 R RMmMod taa vans deaa a wee eds 12 Refresh processing time 133 S Sampling cycle and function extension setting Q compatible mode n on nananana 308 Sampling cycle monitor 204 Sampling cycle selection 213 Sensor correction function selection Q compatible mode 289 Setting change command 157 Setting change completion flag 153 Setting value backup command 156 Setting value backup completion flag 151 Setting value backup failure flag 153 Setting variation rate limiter setting selection 214 Setting variation rate limiter setting selection monitor Bettina dteglls E EE E E EE Bas BAM 204 Setting operation mode command 155 Setting operation mode status 148 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter 12 Standard control
190. a suitable derivative action for fixed value actions or ramp actions Each type of derivative action operates as shown below Measured Value Derivative 0 This setting effectively prevents the temperature from being affected by a disturbance However the performance to follow the set value can be low Fixed value action Ramp action Set value SV Disturbance Temperature process value PV Deviation Derivative 1 This setting allows the temperature to follow the set value well However the temperature get affected by a disturbance greatly Fixed value action Ramp action Set value SV Disturbance J f Temperature process value PV Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Derivative action selection 50 1 FUNCTIONS 1 15 Derivative Action Selection Function 1 16 Simple Two degree of freedom In addition to the PID control this function selects a suitable response speed for the set value SV change from three levels to simply achieve the two degree of freedom PID control General PID controls are called one degree of freedom PID control In the one degree of freedom PID control when PID constants to improve response to the change of the set value SV have been set response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants
191. according to the formula Page 63 Monitoring the scaling value e When a value out of the temperature measuring range has been measured the value set as the upper limit value or lower limit value is stored in CH1 Process value PV scaling value Un G412 1 FUNCTIONS 1 22 Scaling Function 1 23 ON Delay Output Function This function enables users to configure settings considering the delay time response scan time delay of an actual transistor output By monitoring ON delay output flag and external outputs the settings can be used for the program that judges the disconnection of external outputs The following figure shows an application example of ON delay output flag Scan time delay Disconnection is determined based on the ON OFF status of the contact of the input module and ON delay output flag CPU module Temperature Input module control module Sensor ON OFF status Response delay Transistor output gt i External current sensor Heater Setting method Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 1 FUNCTIONS 6 1 23 ON Delay Output Function 5 66 1 24 input output with Another Analog Module Function This function can input and output with other analog modules including A
192. ach channel changes as follows 0 Standard control Standard control 4 loops 1 Heating cooling control normal mode Heating cooling control 2 loops 2 2 Heating cooling control expanded mode Heating cooling control 4 loops 3 Mix control normal mode e Heating cooling control 1 loops 1 e Standard control 2 loops 4 Mix control expanded mode e Heating cooling control 2 loops e Standard control 2 loops 5 Position proportional control normal Position proportional control 2 loops 2 mode 6 Position proportional control expanded Position proportional control 4 loops mode e When the control mode has been changed all items are overwritten with default values Change each parameter setting if necessary A set value discrepancy error control mode error code 1910H occurs right after the control mode change To clear the error turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and register the parameter after the change in the non volatile memory Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Control mode selection 300 Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode 1025 Default value The default value is Standard control 0 election Select one of the following sampling cycles 0 500ms 4 channels e 1 250ms 4 channels O Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Sam
193. ad band 61 3DH CH1 Unused channel setting 0 Setting O O 62 3EH CH1 Memory s PID constants read command 0 Setting 10 63 3FH CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants 0 Setting O i 64 40H CH2 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting GO ao 7 TCRT 65 41H CH2 Stop mode setting Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting OOO setting setting 66 42H CH2 Set value SV setting Set value SV Set value SV 0 Setting o Or p setting setting 67 43H CH2 Proportional Heating Heating Heating 30 Setting Or OF band P setting proportional proportional proportional band Ph band Ph band Ph setting setting setting 68 44H CH2 Integral time I setting Integral time I Integral time I 240 Setting Or O setting setting 69 45H CH2 Derivative time D setting Derivative time Derivative time 60 Setting O D setting D setting 70 46H CH2 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 0 Setting O 13 71 47H CH2 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert set value 2 0 Setting O B 2 3 72 48H CH2 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 0 Setting OO 3 73 49H CH2 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 0 Setting O g3 74 4AH CH2 Upper limit Heating upper Heating upper System area 1000 Setting O O output limiter limit output limit output limiter limiter 75 4BH CH2 Lower limit System area 0 Setting Or Ore output
194. addition to the conditions described above if any of the following conditions is satisfied the auto tuning ends in failure e CH1 PID control forced stop command YC has been turned off and on A hardware failure has occurred e In the standard control CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 has been set to 0 0 C F The two position control has been set e In the heating cooling control CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 has been set to 0 0 C F The two position control has been set Other conditions in the Q compatible mode In addition to the conditions described above if any of the following conditions is satisfied the auto tuning ends in failure e CH1 PID control forced stop command YC has been turned off and on A hardware failure has occurred e In the standard control or heating cooling control 0 has been set for Proportion Belt P Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting The two position control has been set 40 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Auto Tuning Function Actions after the completion of the auto tuning When the auto tuning ends properly The temperature control module operates as follows e CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off Set the PID constants e Set Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting When 0 s has been set before the start of the auto tuning no value
195. address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 419 619 819 1019 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch completion in the Q compatible 549 581 613 645 mode CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion When the latch of the sensor two point correction gain value is completed Latch completed 1 is stored in this area When CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request Un G567 is set to No request 0 No request 0 is stored in this area For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 420 620 820 1020 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion in the Q compatible 551 583 615 647 mode 232 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Set value SV setting Set the target temperature value of the PID control Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Set value SV setting 430 630 830 1030 CHO Set value SV setting in the Q compatible mode 34 66 98 130 ESetting range The range is determined by the values set in CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Un G511 and
196. age 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch request 567 767 967 1167 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch request in the Q compatible mode 550 582 614 646 Setting range e 0 No request e 1 Latch request Default value The default value is No request 0 Enabling the stored value In the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off ENA The conversion is prohibited in the operation mode Setting operation mode status X1 On CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value The measured value of the temperature corresponding to the sensor two point correction offset value is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is No decimal point 0 A detected temperature value is stored as it is e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is First decimal place 1 A detected temperature value is stored after being multiplied by 10 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K5 Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH
197. ails refer to the following K5 Page 66 Setting method Point This section uses CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 as the scaling target for explanation To scale a value input from other analog modules such as an A D converter module replace CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 with CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module Un G438 in the explanation and set values Monitoring the scaling value The temperature process value PV after the scaling processing is stored in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Process value PV scaling value Un G412 A scaling value is calculated as follows SH SL x PX PMin SH SL Y cep CH1 Process value PV scaling value Un G412 n PMax PMin e PX CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 e PMax The maximum value of Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting e PMin The minimum value of Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting e SH Process value PV scaling upper limit value of Scaling setting in Application Setting e SL Process value PV scaling lower limit value of Scaling setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 63 1 21 Moving Average Processing 64 Calculation example lex A calculation example of the scaling of the temperature process value PV into percentage Input range setting of Contr
198. alue PV Set value SV 2 Set value SV 1 gt Time aa 1 Setting variation rate limiter 0 to the full scale of the input range C F in the R mode 0 to 100 of the full scale in the Q compatible mode 2 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Un G526 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise 513 713 913 1113 CHO Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise in 52 84 116 148 the Q compatible mode APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 255 Temperature rise batch individual setting In the R mode Select whether to set the setting variation rate limiter in a batch or individually by setting Setting variation rate limiter setting selection Un G303 In the individual setting this area is the setting for the temperature rise For details on the function refer to the following K5 Page 53 Setting Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function In the Q compatible mode Select whether to set the setting variation rate limiter in a batch or individually by setting Setting variation rate limiter setting selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b1 In the individual setting this area is the setting for the temperature rise For details on the function refer to the following K5 Page 53 Sett
199. alue The default value is 0 min 250 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Upper limit output limiter Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value MV calculated by the PID operation to an external device Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Upper limit output limiter 508 708 908 1108 CHO Upper limit output limiter in the Q compatible mode 42 74 106 138 Setting range The setting range is 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Set values so that the lower limit output limiter value is smaller than the upper limit output limiter value When the lower limit output limiter value is equal to or greater than the upper limit output limiter value CHO Upper lower limit output limiter setting error error code 1AOOH occurs When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs When an error has occurred the following operations will be executed Error flag X2 turns on An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO Point CH1 Cooling upper limit output limiter Un G521 is disabled even a value has been set HTwo position control In the two position control this setting is disabled Manual control In the manual control this setting is disabled When an output to an external device exceeds the upper li
200. and expressed as T The following shows the difference of the actions depending on the integral time T When the integral time T is short The integral effect becomes large and the time to eliminate the offset becomes short However the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value When the integral time T is long The integral effect becomes small and the time to eliminate the offset becomes long The following figure shows an integral action of step responses of when the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E ti gt Time a alae aia Manipulated value of the Proportional action Integral action Sa ea nS Manipulated value of the Integral action 4 Manipulated Kp E Manipulated value of the Proportional action value MV 4 t h An integral action is used as a PI action in combination with a proportional action or a PID action in combination with a proportional action and a derivative action An integral action cannot be used by itself APPENDICES Appendix 4 PID 31 5 Derivative action D action A derivative action adds the manipulated value MV proportional to the variation rate to eliminate the deviation E when it occurs A derivative action can prevent the control target from changing significantly due to disturbance In a derivative action the time taken for the manipulated value MV of the derivative action after the generation of the deviation
201. and setting in the two position control three position control Set the dead band in the two position control Three position control can be achieved by setting a dead band area in addition to areas for the manipulated value for heating MVh 100 and the manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 Manipulated value for heating MVh 0 Heating only Manipulated value Cooling only i manipulated value for cooling MVc 0 __ for cooling MVc 0 manipulated value for heating MVh 0 i eating proportional band Ph 0 i Cooling proportional band Pc i No setting required Integral time I 100 Z2Oz Heating Temperature when cooling starts o setting required erivative time D o setting required rA Temperature 0 gt process value PV Set value SV Cooling 100 A EO SOR PANTAN ES AI Input range Setting method Configure the setting as follows W Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Heating cooling control setting gt Overlap dead band setting 1 FUNCTIONS 27 1 6 Overlap dead Band Function 1 7 Manual Reset Function This function is used to manually move a stable position in the P control or PD control An offset remaining deviation is manually reset by moving the proportional band P The offset is reset by determining and setting the amount to sh
202. ange The setting range is 32768 to 32767 272 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 0 te alarm lower limit value Set the rate alarm lower limit value For details on this area refer to the following K Page 272 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Rate alarm lower limit value 542 742 942 1142 236 252 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value in the Q compatible mode 204 220 Standard mode The standard mode is appropriate for most controlled objects This mode is especially suitable for controlled objects that have an extremely slow response or can be affected by noise or disturbance However PID constants with a slow response low gain may be calculated from the controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time during the auto tuning is only around 10s In this case PID constants with a fast response can be calculated by selecting the high r
203. anual reset amount setting System area 0 Setting O IO 518 206H CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting O IO 519 207H CH1 MAN output setting System area 0 Setting O IO 520 208H CH1 System area a S 521 209H CH1 System area Cooling upper limit output limiter System area 1000 Setting 522 20AH CH1 System area Cooling control output cycle setting System area 30 15 Setting O IO 300 523 20BH CH1 System area Cooling method setting System area 0 Setting O IO JO 524 20CH CH1 System area Overlap dead band setting System area 0 Setting O O 525 20DH CH1 Derivative action selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 526 20EH CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting 0 Setting O IO JO APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 161 527 20FH CH1 System area Open close 20 Setting O IO JO output neutral band setting 528 210H CH1 System area Control motor 10 Setting O IO JO time 529 211H CH1 System area Integration 1500 Setting O IO JO output limiter setting 530 212H CH1 System area Valve operation 0 Setting 1 O O O J setting during CPU module STOP 531 213H CH1 Alert dead band setting 5 Setting O 1o Jo 532 214
204. ard Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O IO value value gt value 1161 489H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O value tuning value tuning value tuning selection selection selection 1162 48AH CH4 Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting O IO suppression suppression suppression suppression level setting level setting level setting level setting 1163 48BH CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting O IO 1164 48CH CH4 Sensor correction function selection 0 Setting O IO JIO 1165 48DH CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting O IO 1166 48EH CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 1167 48FH CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 1168 490H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 1169 491H CH4 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 1170 492H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 1171 493H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 1172 494H CH4 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O IO JO 1173 to 1999 System area a n f a 495H to 7CFH 2000
205. ariation rate limiter setting in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b1 has been set to Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop 1 16 Automatic setting at input range change setting variation rate limiter setting control output cycle unit and moving average processing setting can be configured 17 When the control output cycle unit selection setting is 1s cycle 18 When the control output cycle unit selection setting is 0 1s cycle APPENDICES 201 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Details of buffer memory addresses This section describes the details of buffer memory addresses of the temperature control module This section describes the buffer memory addresses for CH1 The latest error code detected by the temperature control module is stored For error codes refer to the following lt Page 139 List of Error Codes Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Latest error code Latest error code in the Q compatible mode 0 The address where an error has occurred is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Error address Error address in the Q compatible mode 1537 Among Error history Un G3600 to Un G3759 the buffer memory address where the latest error code has been stored is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area
206. ary Check the value for number of moving average and change it if necessary When the temperature process value PV does not decrease after exceeding the set value SV e Check the lower limit output limiter value If the value is greater than 0 change the value The temperatures of the controlled objects may not fall due to effects of the environment Stop the control of the adjacent controlled objects and execute the auto tuning on each controlled object When the temperature process value PV does not increase after exceeding the set value SV Check the upper limit output limiter value If the value is smaller than 100 change the value Derivative time gt 3601 Error cause The vibration cycle of the control response during AT is long Set the integral time to 3600 or a smaller value 1ADOH Multiple module interaction function system error 1 At the initialization of the inter module link function an abnormal response has been detected in the data communication between the master temperature control module and the CPU module Take measures to reduce noise e Check that each module has been properly connected and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU module When the same error occurs again the possible cause is a module failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1AD1H Multiple module interaction function system error 2 At the initialization of the
207. as CT monitor method selection Set the method for executing the heater current measurement Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CT monitor method selection 2002 CT monitor method selection in the Q compatible mode 176 Settable modules e R60TCTRT2TT2BW e R60TCRT4BW Setting range e 0 ON OFF current e 1 ON current When ON OFF current 0 is set the present current value of the current sensor CT is measured When ON current 1 is set the current value of the heater being off is fixed as the current value of the heater previously being on Default value The default value is ON OFF current 0 CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting Set the set value used for heater disconnection detections and output off time current error detections in percentage of the reference heater current value For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the following K Page 81 Heater Disconnection Detection Function For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to the following lt Page 85 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Heater disconnection alert setting 2004 2007 2010 2013 CHO Heater disconnection alert setting in the Q compatible mode 58 90 122 154 Supported modules R60TCTRT2TT2BW
208. atis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly ser
209. ature process value PV disable the moving average processing Setting method Configure the settings 1 Set Enable for the following setting Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Moving averaging process setting 2 Set the number of times to execute the moving average processing by the following procedure XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Number of moving averaging Point e When Disable has been set for Moving averaging process setting in Base Setting the value set for Number of moving averaging in Application Setting is ignored e For the module the moving average processing is enabled and the number of times to execute the moving average processing has been set to 2 times as default Change the settings if necessary 1 22 Scaling Function This function can convert temperature process values PV into the set width to import them in the buffer memory For example the range of 100 C to 100 C can be scaled into the range of 0 to 4000 Scaling target Usually CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 is the scaling target However values of other analog modules such as an A D converter module on the system can be set as the scaling targets by setting a 200s value for Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting For det
210. ault value In the R mode For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW the default value is 30 30 C For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW the default value is 30 3 0 C In the Q compatible mode The default value is 30 3 0 CH1 Integral time I setting Set the integral time I to execute the PID control Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Integral time I setting 432 632 832 1032 CHO Integral time I setting in the Q compatible mode 36 68 100 132 Setting range Other than the position proportional control The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s e Position proportional control The setting range is 1 to 3600 1 to 3600s EP control or PD control Set 0 For details on control methods refer to the following lt Page 15 Control Method Default value The default value is 240 240s APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 235 ative time D setting Set the derivative time D to execute the PID control Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Derivative time D setting 433 633 833 1033 CHO Derivative time D setting in the Q compatible mode 37 69 101 133 ESetting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 0 to 3600s EP control or PI control Set 0 For details on control methods refer to the following K Page 15 Control Method Default
211. aximum gradient ee Simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation timing by self tuning Dead time Time Simultaneous Self tuning start ON temperature rise AT start a Setting operation mode status X1 OFF O zZ CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 ON CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 b0 OFF CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status OFF Un G411 b1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status k OFF CH1 Self tuning flag 7 Un G411 Un G411 b9 CH1 Self tuning error Un G411 b10 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion OFF Rg a ee ee ee i CH1 AT simultaneous Un G413 b0 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status OFF ON temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G413 Ba eat aie Se pe eed at as Sah he Se Se See ae ee pe eee ee Un G413 b1 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 102 When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculated with the self tuning is enabled and PID constants are changed by the auto tuning Temperature A process value PV Setting operation mode status
212. b2 bi bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 bO Automatic setting at input range change When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data is automatically changed to prevent the values in those buffer memory areas from being out of the setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable b1 Setting variation rate limiter setting Select whether the setting variation rate limiter to be set in a batch or individually e 0 Set in a batch at temperature rise temperature drop e 1 Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop b2 Control output cycle unit selection setting Select 0 1s or 1s as a unit for the cycle of turning on off the transistor output 0 1s cycle e 1 0 1s cycle b3 Moving average processing setting Select whether the moving average processing setting is used 0 Enable 1 Disable b4tob11 Fixed to 0 Not used b12 Sampling cycle selection Select 500ms 4CH or 250ms 4CH as the sampling cycle 0 500ms 4CH e 1 250ms 4CH b13 to b15 Fixed to 0 Not used When Automatic setting at input range change has been set to Enable 1 the following buffer memory areas are automatically set or initialized when the setting of CH1 Input range in the Q compatible mode Un G32 is changed CH1 Set value SV setting in the Q compatible mode 34 0 CH1 Alert set value 1 to CH1 Alert set value 4 in the Q compatible mode 38 to 41 0 CH1 AT
213. backed up when the power is turned off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is cleared another auto tuning can be omitted For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants 547 747 947 1147 CHO Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants in the Q 63 95 127 159 compatible mode Buffer memory areas from which set values are backed up to the non volatile memory The following table lists the buffer memory areas whose values are backed up Buffer memory area name Buffer memory address Reference CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G439 Page 239 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 Page 235 CH1 Integral time I setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Un G537 Page 270 CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time Setting range e 0 Disable e 1 Enable Default value The default value is Disable 0
214. bias in the Q compatible mode 53 0 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter in the Q compatible mode 55 Upper limit value of the input range CH1 Lower limit setting limiter in the Q compatible mode 56 Lower limit value of the input range CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band in the Q compatible mode 60 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value in the Q 544 0 compatible mode CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value in the Q 545 0 compatible mode CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value in the Q 546 0 compatible mode CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value in the Q 547 0 compatible mode CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data in the Q compatible mode 731 0 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time in the Q compatible mode 732 0 CH1 Disturbance judgment position in the Q compatible mode 1044 0 308 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas e When the control output cycle unit has been changed the control output cycle setting heating control output cycle setting and cooling control output cycle setting are overwritten with their default values A set value discrepancy error control output cycle unit selection setting error code 1920H occurs right after the control output cycle unit selection setting change To clear the error turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and register the pa
215. cannot receive data from the master module between multiple temperature control module module 1AE4H Peak current After the inter module peak current suppression function Check that each module has been properly connected suppression function was started Y1 was turned on the slave temperature and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU start error between control modules cannot receive data from the master module multiple module temperature control module 1AE5H Peak current While the inter module peak current suppression Check that each module has been properly connected suppression function function is being performed the slave temperature and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU continuation error control modules cannot receive data from the master module between multiple temperature control module module 1AFOH Simultaneous When the inter module simultaneous temperature rise When the inter module simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function has been enabled two or more temperature function has been enabled for multiple modules set only function master control modules have been set as master modules one module as the master module Page 108 Inter duplication error module simultaneous temperature rise function between multiple module 1AF1H Simultaneous When the inter module simultaneous temperature rise When using the inter module simultaneous temperature temperature rise function has been used n
216. cess value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer just before the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed e The temperature process value PV just before the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed is within the temperature measuring range When the temperature process value PV goes outside the range after the simultaneous temperature rise AT is executed the auto tuning ends in failure Page 41 When the auto tuning ends in failure Output Change Amount Limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting has been set to 0 When all the conditions described above are not satisfied the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated Only PID constants are calculated The following shows how the temperature control module operates when the simultaneous temperature rise AT has not been executed ON CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 OFF 7 ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 ore R a Control status PID control K Auto tuning X PID control ON i CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT A R disable status Un G413 b2 OFF gt A gt Executed in a program i gt Executed by the temperature control module The temperature control module turns on CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT disable status Un G413 b2 With CH1 Auto tuning status X4 on the module executes the same processing as the normal auto tuning 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 99
217. changed 45 Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag 4 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off 15 Page 150 Auto tuning status Temperature process value PV Set value SV Oscillation detected PID constants calculated gt Time Response measurement A Y Self tuning in execution 4 gt ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF i ON CH1 PID auto correction Depends on previous a i status Un G411 b0 execution result OFF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 i i 1 ET 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PID constants Before change X After change iers gt Executed by the temperature control module Conditions for execution When the temperature process value PV is out of the range considered as stable vibration ST is executed Precautions When vibration ST is executed to the following controlled objects inappropriate PID constants may be calculated e Controlled objects where a disturbance periodically occurs e Controlled objects with strong mutual interference 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function 45 46 Conditions in which the self tuning is not executed The following lists the conditions When the control method is other than PID control When a control method other than PID control two position control P control PI control or PD control is selected the self tuning i
218. ck the OK button 3 Select Sensor Correction from the following XZ Option gt Sensor correction 4 Select a channel to which the sensor correction is executed for Target Channel 5 Select Sensor Two point Correction for Sensor Correction Function Selection 6 Monitor Process value and input the correction offset value 1 7 Set the temperature process value PV corresponding to the input for Offset Value After setting the value click the Offset Setting button 8 Click the Yes button 9 Click the OK button 10 Monitor Process value and input the correction gain value After setting the value click the Gain Setting button 11 Click the Yes button Execute the Gain Setting Please press Yes after setting the appropriate correction gain value to the target channel 12 Click the OK button am vawe sw go Seung 13 Click the Fix the Value button Settable Condition1 i value lt Correction gain value Condition2 Set the value within the measured value for both of and gain value Please press the Fix the value button to apply the value to the correction setting 14 Click the Yes button Fix the correction value Are you sure you want to continue aie Candian 15 To back up the correction value in the unregistered condition setting value will back to the previous one i j tong i ane ae non volatile memory clic
219. command Error reset command Error reset command Y3 N A N A N A N A Y4 CH1 Auto tuning command CH1 Auto tuning command CH1 Auto tuning command CH1 Auto tuning command Y5 CH2 Auto tuning command CH2 Auto tuning command CH2 Auto tuning command CH2 Auto tuning command Y6 CH3 Auto tuning command CH3 Auto tuning command CH3 Auto tuning command CH3 Auto tuning command Y7 CH4 Auto tuning command CH4 Auto tuning command CH4 Auto tuning command CH4 Auto tuning command Y8 Setting value backup command Setting value backup command Setting value backup command Setting value backup command Y9 Default setting registration Default setting registration Default setting registration Default setting registration command command command command YA N A N A N A N A YB Setting change command Setting change command Setting change command Setting change command YC CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop CH1 PID control forced stop command command command command YD CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop CH2 PID control forced stop command command command command YE CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop CH3 PID control forced stop command command command command YF CH4 PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop CH4 PID control forced stop command command command comman
220. completion b8 CH1 Read failure b1 CH2 Read completion b9 CH2 Read failure b2 CH3 Read completion b10 CH3 Read failure b3 CH4 Read completion b11 CH4 Read failure 206 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Timing of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 The following figure shows the timing of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 For CH1 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 CH1 Read completion flag Un G46 b0 CH1 Read failure flag Un G46 b8 Read completion Read failure Read completion BERS gt Executed by the temperature control module After reading of data from the non volatile memory has been completed successfully CH1 Read completion flag Un G46 b0 turns off when CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 turns on and off After reading of data from the non volatile memory has been completed successfully CH1 Read completion flag Un G46 b0 turns on When reading of data from the non volatile memory has failed CH1 Read failure flag Un G46 b8 turns on and the temperature control module operates with the PID constants before reading of the data The LED status remains CH1 Read failure flag Un G46 b8 turns off after reading of data in the channel 1 is completed successfully When reading of data has failed turn off and on CH1 Memory s PID constants read co
221. connection The heater disconnection alert correction value can be 20 at maximum When the heater disconnection alert setting value has been set to 80 as shown in the above two examples and if a voltage drops by 40 or more the disconnection detection conditions are satisfied and a heater disconnection is detected even after the correction value of 20 has been applied Setting method Set the following item to ON XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Heater disconnection detection setting gt Heater disconnection correction function selection Heater disconnection correction function select 1 0 Rate alarm 0 0FF Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting Clearing the disconnection detection status Detected disconnections are disabled by restoring the disconnection status and CH1 Heater disconnection detection Un G401 b12 turns on and off The timing of when a heater turns on differs depending on the settings of the following buffer memory areas Control output cycle setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting e Cooling control output cycle setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 27 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 1 28 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function Transistor output errors can be detected using this function A current sensor CT for heater disconn
222. corresponds to CH1 Alert set value 2 Un G435 CH1 Alert 2 mode setting Un G534 HSetting range For the setting range refer to the following lt Page 236 Setting range Setting unit For the setting unit refer to the following K5 Page 237 Setting unit Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Alert set value 3 According to a selected alert mode of Alert 3 set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 3 Un G401 b10 turns on For CH1 Alert definition Un G401 refer to the following K5 Page 219 CH1 Alert definition For details on the alert function refer to the following K Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert set value 3 436 636 836 1036 CHO Alert set value 3 in the Q compatible mode 40 72 104 136 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 237 BAlert mode Set the alert mode of Alert 3 in the following buffer memory area The alert mode of Alert 3 corresponds to CH1 Alert set value 3 Un G436 e CH1 Alert 3 mode setting Un G535 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following K Page 236 Setting range Setting unit For the setting unit refer to the following L Page 237 Setting unit Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Alert set value 4 According to a selected alert mode of Alert 4 set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 4 Un G401 b11 turns on For CH1 Alert defini
223. ction Feed forward System area 0 Setting O value tuning selection 762 2FAH CH2 Overshoot suppression level setting Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting O IO suppression suppression level setting level setting 763 2FBH CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting O IO 764 2FCH CH2 Sensor correction function selection 0 Setting O IO JO 765 2FDH CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting O IO 766 2FEH CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O I 767 2FFH CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 768 300H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 769 301H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 167 168 770 302H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 771 303H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 772 304H CH2 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O IO JO 773 to 799 System area i a 305H to 31FH 800 320H CH3 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor SS a 1 TCRT
224. ctions of the temperature control module Setting method Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Normal Operation Reverse Operation Setting 1 14 RFB Limiter Function The RFB reset feedback function operates when deviation E continues for a long period of time When the deviation E continues for a long period of time this function prevents the PID operation results manipulated value MV calculated by integral actions from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated value MV This function automatically operates when the PID control is executed No setting is required Point operates as follows e The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the upper limit output limiter value by feeding back an excess value to the integral value When a PID operation result is smaller than the lower limit output limiter value the temperature control module operates as follows e The RFB function levels the manipulated value MV to the lower limit output limiter value by feeding back a When a PID operation result is larger than the upper limit output limiter value the temperature control module required value to the integral value 1 FUNCTIONS 1 13 Direct reverse Action Selection Function 49 1 15 Derivative Action Selection Function This function improves dynamic characteristics by selecting
225. d 4 Available only under the mix control expanded mode 2 Available only under the heating cooling control expanded mode 3 Available only under the position proportional control expanded mode Details of input signals This section describes the details of the input signals of the temperature control module to the CPU module The I O numbers X Y described in this section are for the case when the start I O number of the temperature control module is set to 0 This flag turns on to indicate that the preparation for the temperature control module is completed after the module is powered off and on or the CPU module is reset and the reset is canceled Check that this flag is on when reading or writing data from to the buffer memory areas of the temperature control module from the CPU module The following shows a program example In the program example shown below the start I O number of the temperature control module has been set to 10 Write instruction 1 1 H Top Hi H22 K100 KI _ Used as buffer memory read write interlock When a watchdog timer error is detected this flag turns off The temperature control module stops the temperature control operation and the transistor output is also turned off The RUN LED turns off and the ERR LED turns on MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Module READY flag X0 APPENDICES Appendix 2
226. d 1 to 1000 1 s to 100 0 s Control output cycle setting standard control only A set value is ignored The setting range depends on the control output cycle unit selection setting HWhen the control output cycle unit selection setting is 1s cycle 0 Setting range 1 to 100 s Default value 30 s MWhen the control output cycle unit selection setting is 0 1s cycle 1 Setting range 5 to 1000 0 5 to 100 0s Default value 300 30 0s Control output cycle setting cooling control output cycle setting heating cooling control only A set value is ignored The setting range depends on the control output cycle unit selection setting HWhen the control output cycle unit selection setting is 1s cycle 0 Setting range 1 to 100 s Default value 30 s When the control output cycle unit selection setting is 0 1s cycle 1 Setting range 5 to 1000 0 5 to 100 0s Default value 300 30 0s Overlap dead band setting Hin the R mode Full scale to Full scale C F Hin the Q compatible mode 100 to 100 10 0 to 10 0 Min the R mode Full scale to Full scale C F Hin the Q compatible mode 100 to 100 10 0 to 10 0 1 FUNCTIONS 1 2 Control Method The following table shows the buffer memory areas related to each control method CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting in the R mode
227. de shift completion flag Un G44 is on A value that has been written while MAN mode shift completion flag is off will be replaced with the manipulated value MV that the system calculated with the PID operation Default value The default value is O 0 0 In the heating cooling control normal mode mix control normal mode or position proportional control normal mode the temperature measurement and rate alarm can be executed using temperature input terminals of unused channels The following table lists the settable buffer memory addresses for each control mode selection CH1 CH2 720 CH3 920 920 CH4 1120 1120 For the combination of the control mode and the buffer memory addresses not listed in the above table setting values is disabled For details on the temperature conversion function using unused channels refer to the following L Page 31 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 259 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature conversion setting 720 920 1120 CHO Temperature conversion setting in the Q compatible mode 695 696 697 Setting range e 0 Not used e 1 Used Default value The default value is Not used 0 Point e When this sett
228. desired value because the set value SV is small 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 137 3 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom oes not start When the self tuning does not start CHO Auto tuning status X4 to X7 does not turn on check the following items Have the self tuning start conditions been met Refer to Self tuning Function and check whether all the conditions have been met Page 42 Self tuning Function Has the self tuning ended abnormally Refer to Conditions where self tuning ends abnormally and check whether the auto tuning has ended abnormally If it has ended abnormally remove the cause If the buffer memory setting was changed during self tuning restore the value to the one prior to change lt Page 42 Self tuning Function backup failure flag XA is on When Setting value backup failure flag XA is on check the following items Has backing up data to the non volatile memory Turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and write data to the non volatile memory failed When writing data fails again a hardware failure has occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Has reading data from the non volatile memory failed hen CHI t XC to XF is on When CHO Alert flag XC to XF is on check the following items Has the temperature process value PV exceeded e Check CHO Alert definition and take the appropriate corrective action Page 219 CH1 Al
229. dgment rise judgment flag flag 605 25DH CH2 Transistor Heating Heating Open side 0 Monitor output flag transistor output transistor output transistor output flag flag flag 606 25EH CH2 Set value SV monitor Set value SV Set value SV 0 Monitor gt monitor monitor 607 25FH CH2 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value MV for value for value for output with heating MVh heating MVh another analog for output with for output with module another analog another analog module module 608 260H CH2 System area Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value for cooling value for cooling MVc MVc 7 609 261H CH2 System area Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value for cooling value for cooling MVc for output MVc for output with another with another analog module analog module 610 262H CH2 System area Cooling Cooling Close side 0 Monitor transistor output transistor output transistor output flag flag flag 611 263H CH2 Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 163 164 612 264H CH2 Process value PV scaling value Process value Process value 0 Monitor
230. e 180 B4H CH4 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor value MV for value for value MV for output with heating MVh output with another analog for output with another analog module another analog module module 181 B5H All Manipulated value resolution change for output with System area 0 Setting O O0 O another analog module 2 182 B6H All Cold junction temperature compensation selection 0 Setting Or Oro G 183 B7H All Control mode selection monitor 0 Monitor je Poe i APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 187 188 184 B8H CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 0 Setting O Or 185 B9H CH2 Auto tuning mode selection Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting O O mode mode selection selection 186 BAH CH3 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting Oo mode selection mode mode selection mode selection selection 187 BBH CH4 Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning Auto tuning 0 Setting OF Or mode selection mode mode selection mode selection selection 188 to 191 System area a a BCH to BFH 192 COH CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 4 0 Setting ol lolo 193 C1H CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 4 0 Setting ol lojlo 194 C2H CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 4 0 Setting ololo 195 C3H CH1 Alert 4 m
231. e AT mode AT mode selection selection 957 3BDH CH3 Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance System area 0 Setting O O O judgment judgment judgment position position 5 position 958 3BEH CH3 Set value return Set value return Set value return System area 0 Setting O O adjustment adjustment adjustment 959 3BFH CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O control forced control forced control forced starting signal starting signal starting signal 960 3C0H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O O value value value 961 3C1H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting 1O value tuning value tuning value tuning selection selection selection 962 3C2H CH3 Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting O O suppression suppression suppression suppression level setting level setting level setting level setting 963 3C3H CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting O O 964 3C4H CH3 Sensor correction function selection 0 Setting O JIO JO 965 3C5H CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting O O 966 3C6H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 967 3C7H CH3 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting 1O 968 3C8H CH3 Sensor two point correction offset value measured
232. e been selected for Group 1 Temperature process value PV Matches temperature rise completion time CH1 Setvalue SV PSsss8sssssSsScssesessessescnsssssinsesssssesesS CH2 Setvalue SV PHssasesesssesessssesesseesessse ye e e CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV Pro rr ttt r rrr Annee i i 1 p Temperature rise start Arrival point Time 1 Setting operation mode command Y1 OFF ie 1 7 1 je oc r 1 CH1 Simultaneous temperature a3 i A rise status Un G414 1 gt Executed by the temperature control module Although Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is set at the start of the simultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is set before the completion of the temperature rise 96 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Ex When channels are divided as follows e CH1 CH2 Group 1 e CH3 CH4 Group 2 Temperature process value PV Matches temperature rise completion time in each group CH1 Setvalue SV fFesaassssesesesseassesessseitsse CH2 Setvalue SV PrP aSsrsicneessssnesscsefocssnce see CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV Group 1 arrival point Group 2 arrival point 1 Temperature rise start Time 1 1 ON Setting operation mode command Y1 OFF t CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G414 1 and CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise stat
233. e name This part indicates a module model name Module number A number starting from 1 is added to identify modules that have the same module name Data type This part indicates the data type of the buffer memory area The following table lists data types Data type Description stnMonitor Monitor stnControl Control stnSetting Setting Channel This part indicates the channel number corresponding to a module label A numerical value of 0 to 3 is stored to correspond to CH1 to CH4 CH1 0 CH2 1 CH3 2 CH4 3 144 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Module Label Data format This part indicates the data size of the buffer memory area The following table lists data types u Word Unsigned Bit string 16 bits w Word Signed z System area ELabel name This part indicates a label name unique to the module m D This string indicates that the module label is for direct access A module label without this string is for auto refresh The following table shows the differences between auto refresh and direct access Auto refresh The values read written from to a module label are reflected to the At auto refresh R60TC_1 stErrorinfo uLatest module in a batch at auto refresh The run time of a program can ErrorCode be reduced To use the auto refresh set Target to Module Label in Refresh of Module Parameter Direct access The values read written from to a module label are immediately At reading writin
234. e peak current becomes high 1 FUNCTIONS 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function CH1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current Setting the transistor outputs to different ON timings can reduce the peak current to that of one transistor output JUU The number of divisions and upper limit output limiter Configure the setting to divide the timing Peak current suppression control group setting of Peak current suppression setting in Application Setting in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off Turn on and off Setting change command YB to enable the setting At the timing when the setting is enabled Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting is automatically set according to the number of divisions Number of divisions Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting 2 50 0 3 33 3 4 25 0 Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting is set to 0 0 The following shows the timing when the upper limit output limiter and lower limit output limiter are output by the peak current suppression function e At power on e When the CPU module is turned from STOP to RUN e When the number of divisions is changed Point When using this function set a single value for the control output cycles of target chan
235. e set to a value of 201 to 205 When the value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs e Heating cooling control normal mode position proportional control normal mode CH3 CH4 e Mix control normal mode CH2 Setting value and platinum resistance thermometer type The following table lists the setting values of CH1 Input range Un G501 and the corresponding platinum resistance thermometer types Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 1 7 default value 6000 2000 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 8 2000 2000 200 0 to 850 0 C 0 1 54 8500 2000 300 to 1100 F 1 141 1100 300 300 0 to 300 0 F 0 1 143 3000 3000 JPt100 200 0 to 500 0 C 0 1 5 5000 2000 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 6 2000 2000 200 0 to 640 0 C 0 1 53 6400 2000 300 to 900 F 1 140 900 300 300 0 to 300 0 F 0 1 142 3000 3000 Another analog input 0 to 4000 digit 1 201 4000 0 module 0 to 4000 Another analog input 0 to 12000 digit 1 202 12000 0 module 0 to 12000 Another analog input 0 to 16000 digit 1 203 16000 0 module 0 to 16000 Another analog input 0 to 20000 digit 1 204 20000 0 module 0 to 20000 Another analog input 0 to 32000 digit 1 205 32000 0 module 0 to 32000 1 When the input range is changed the set values in some buffer memory areas are initialized automatically and return to the default values
236. e smaller than 100 is set for the following parameter temperature rise may not be completed at the same time e Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 97 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 98 Setting method dividing channels into groups Configure the setting as follows XD Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise group setting Simultaneous temperature rise parameter The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is the values in the following two buffer memory areas e CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 e CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 Automatic calculation The simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be automatically calculated using the following two methods e Simultaneous temperature rise AT e Simultaneous temperature rise parameter setting with self tuning Point When the setting of Peak current suppression control group setting of Peak current suppression setting in Application Setting is changed after the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been calculated the intended control may not be executed In that case calculate the simultaneous temperature rise parameter again For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the followi
237. e temperature process value PV is falling within a specified range Changeof temperature process value PV C Rate alarm upper limit value 10 0 C 20 0 C X rate alarm lower limit value gt Time 1 FUNCTIONS 79 1 26 Rate Alarm Function Ex A setting example of the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value to monitor that the temperature process value PV is changing within a specified range Change of temperature process value PV C Rate alarm upper limit value 10 0 C 0 10 0 C x Rate alarm lower limit value gt Time 80 1 FUNCTIONS 1 26 Rate Alarm Function 1 2 Heater Disconnection Detection Function When a transistor output is on this function checks whether a heater has been disconnected or not can be checked using a reference heater current value load current value detected by a current sensor CT This function compares the reference heater current value and the heater disconnection alert current value When the reference heater current value is smaller than the heater disconnection alert current value the heater is regarded as disconnected However when the transistor output ON is one of the following value no heater disconnection is detected CH1 Heater disconnection detection Un G401 b12 remains off When the heater disconnection judgment mode is the normal mode 500ms or shorter When the heater disconnection judg
238. e user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 321 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies gt PP 322 SH NA 081536ENG A SH NA 081536ENG A 1507 MEE MODEL R60TC U OU E MODEL CODE 13JX39 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
239. ea 0 Setting O O IO temperature rise gradient data 732 2DCH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O IO temperature rise dead time 733 2DDH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO temperature rise AT mode selection 734 2DEH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor temperature rise status 735 2DFH CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting 0 Setting O IO JIO 736 2E0H CH2 System area Cooling Cooling System area 30 Setting O O proportional proportional band Pc band Pc setting setting 737 2E1H CH2 System area Cooling upper Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting O IO limit output limit output limiter limiter 738 2E2H CH2 System area Cooling control Cooling control System area 30 17 Setting O IO output cycle output cycle 300 18 setting setting 739 2E3H CH2 System area Overlap dead Overlap dead System area 0 Setting O O band setting band setting 740 2E4H CH2 Manual reset amount setting Manual reset System area 0 Setting O IO amount setting 741 2E5H CH2 Process value PV scaling function Process value Process value 0 Setting O IO JO enable disable setting PV scaling PV scaling function enable function enable disable setting disable setting 742 2E6H CH2 Process value PV scaling lower Proce
240. ection Correction Value 10 1300 to 1300 Set the value to correct by full scale to the input range 1300 to 1300 A Execute the Set the Correction Value ae i Correction value setting completed a unregistered condition setting value will back to the previous one lowing operation ess the Register button to register the correction value wer is turned OFF eset Resister 3 Select the module to which the sensor correction is executed and click the OK button Select Sensor Correction from the following T Option gt Sensor correction 4 Select a channel to which the sensor correction is executed for Target Channel Select Normal Sensor Correction for Sensor Correction Function Selection Input a value for Sensor Correction and click the Set Value button Click the Yes button Click the OK button To back up the correction value in the non volatile memory click the Register button 1 FUNCTIONS 1 19 Sensor Correction Function 55 56 10 Click the Yes button Correction value will be registered Are you sure you want to continue Caution Sensor correction value of parameter setting has a priority for Normal Sensor Correction One point Correction If initial setting is set in the parameter setting of Intelligent function module and execute the following operation Turn the power OFF gt ON Reset the CPU module gt
241. ection detection is used to check for errors of when transistor outputs are off A heater current process value and the heater disconnection alert current value are compared If the heater current process value is larger than the heater disconnection alert current value an output off time current error occurs Detection of output off time current errors is executed every 500ms When the off time of a transistor output has been set as follows output off time current errors are not detected CH1 Output off time current error Un G401 b14 remains off e When the heater disconnection judgment mode is the normal mode 500ms or shorter e When the heater disconnection judgment mode is the high accuracy mode 200ms or shorter The following shows the timing when an alert is output e 500ms x n n Value set for Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting When the output off time current error status lasts longer than the time described above the following operations are executed The HBA LED turns on CH1 Alert flag XC turns on e CH1 Output off time current error Un G401 b14 is turned on e CHO Output off time current error alarm code O8AD is stored in Latest alarm code Un G3 Supported modules R6OTCTRT2TT2BW R6OTCRT4BW Setting method The setting method is the same as that for the heater disconnection detection f
242. ection detection judgment time W 480s GHIAT bias setting a C GH1Auto tuning mode selection O Standard mode CH Automatic backup setting after auto tuning c E 1 0N Name CHI CH2 Control command Settine Operation mode command 1 Operation mode command Setting Operation mode status Auto turning command O OFF OOF F 0 OF F Auto turning status PID control force stop command O OFF 0 0F F O 0F F 0 OF F Setting value back up command O OFF Setting value back up completed fla Forced feed forward control starting 0 OFF OOFF OOFF OOFF Forced feed forward control startin TOF AUTO MAN mode shift 0 AUTO O AUTO O AUTO AUTO Name CHI CH2 Control command Setting Operation mode command 1 Operation mode command Setting Operation mode status Auto turning command Auto turning status PID control force stop command QOFF QOFF QOFF Setting value back up command O OFF Setting value back up completed fla Forced feed forward control starting 0 OFF OOFF OOFF OOFF Forced feed forward control startine TOFS AUTO MAN mode shift CAUTO O AUTO O AUTO AUTO MWhen using a program The auto tuning is executed by the following procedure 1 Setting each data in the temperature control module Set each data Page 35 Settings related to the auto tuning 2 Operation mode setting 7 Write the set value to be changed 8 Set Setting Operation mode commana to 1 Op
243. ection function selection Select a sensor correction method For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Sensor correction function selection 564 764 964 1164 HSetting range e 0 Normal sensor correction one point correction e 1 Sensor two point correction Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Normal sensor correction one point correction OH nsor correction function selection Q compatible mode Select a sensor correction method for each channel in the Q compatible mode For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function b15 to b12 b11 to b8 amp b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Sensor correction function selection in the Q compatible mode 785 ESetting range e 0 Normal sensor correction one point correction e 1 Sensor two point correction Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Normal sens
244. egral time I Integral time I 240 Setting setting setting setting setting 101 65H CH3 Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time 60 Setting D setting D setting D setting D setting 102 66H CH3 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 Alert set value 0 Setting 1 15 103 67H CH3 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert set value 2 Alert set value 0 Setting 2 2 104 68H CH3 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 Alert set value 0 Setting 3 3 105 69H CH3 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 Alert set value 0 Setting 4 45 106 6AH CH3 Upper limit Heating upper Upper limit System area 1000 Setting output limiter limit output output limiter limiter APPENDICES 184 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 107 6BH CH3 Lower limit System area Lower limit System area 0 Setting O Oe ra output limiter output limiter 108 6CH CH3 Output variation Output variation Output variation System area 0 Setting Or Oo f amount limiter amount limiter amount limiter 109 6DH CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting o Oo 110 6EH CH3 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting OO sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting
245. emory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Valve operation setting during CPU module STOP 530 730 930 1130 CHO Valve operation setting during CPU module STOP in the Q compatible mode 1043 1059 1075 1091 Setting range e 0 Close side output OFF open side output OFF e 1 Close side output ON open side output OFF e 2 Close side output OFF open side output ON Default value The default value is Close side output OFF open side output OFF 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 265 CH1 Alert dead band setting This setting is for using the alert function For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert dead band setting 531 731 931 1131 Alert dead band setting in the Q compatible mode 164 Setting range e In the R mode 0 to the full scale of the input range C F To set 6 C as the dead band range when CH1 Input range Un G501 is 2 Temperature measuring range 0 C to 1300 C set 6 in CH1 Alert dead band setting Un G531 In the Q compatible mode Set a value within the range of 0 to 100 0 0 to 10 0 to the full scale of the set input range When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas CH1 Input range in the Q compatible mode U
246. en set for Self tuning setting in Application Setting When the temperature process value PV is out of the temperature measuring range The self tuning is not executed CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on When a value other than 0 0 0 s has been set for Output Change Amount Limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting The self tuning is not executed CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on MWhen CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 has been set to MAN 1 The self tuning is not executed CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function MWhen the setting variation rate limiter has been set to a value other than 0 0 C F When a value other than 0 0 C F has been set for each of the following settings CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on e Setting change rate limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting e Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop of Limiter setting in Application Setting When the heating cooling control or position proportional control has been selected as the control mode The self tuning is not executed Discontinuation of self tuning The following operation during the self tuning discontinues the self tuning e When Self tuning setting in Application Setting has been changed to Do Not Run the ST The self tuning operation in process is disco
247. eously turn off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 of the temperature control modules that execute the inter module simultaneous temperature rise 1 FUNCTIONS 1 33 Inter module Link Function 1 09 1 34 Proportional Band Setting Function This function can set the proportional bands P for heating and cooling individually Different gradients can be set by using different proportional band P values in heating and cooling areas Heating proportional Cooling proportional Manipulated value yi band Pc for heating MVh g band Ph R 100 L Pug Manipulated value for heating MVh 100 Only cooling proportional band Pc can be narrowed Heating Manipulated value 0 for heating MVh 0 i Manipulated value Set value SV for cooling MVc 0 Cooling Manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 100 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Setting method in the R mode For heating Set a proportional band P in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 4 gt Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting For cooling Set a proportional band P in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G439 Page 239 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Setting method in the Q compatible mode For heating Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window
248. er than 0 and execute the auto tuning again 1AAQH CHO Auto tuning Settings of the buffer memory areas where changing the After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 error settings is not allowed have been changed execute the auto tuning again While the auto tuning is being executed do not change the settings of the buffer memory areas 1ABOH CHO Auto tuning The auto tuning error judgment time has been exceeded After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 set error the auto tuning error judgment time longer and execute the auto tuning again When the temperature process value PV does not reach the set value SV while the control output is on e Check the heater has been powered on e Check the upper limit output limiter value If the value is smaller than 100 change the value When the temperature process value PV does not reach the set value SV while the control output is off Check the lower limit output limiter value If the value is greater than 0 change the value The temperatures of the controlled objects may not fall due to effects of the environment Stop the control of the adjacent controlled objects and execute the auto tuning on each controlled object Even though the error still cannot be solved after the above actions are taken manually set the PID constants Or change the heater capacity 140 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 List of Error Codes Error code Error name
249. er to the following Page 23 HOLD CLEAR Function b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 CLEAR Other than 0 HOLD Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO HOLD CLEAR setting in the Q compatible mode 1026 Default value The default value is CLEAR 0 in CH1 to CH4 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 241 Select corresponding setting values from the temperature sensors used with the temperature control module temperature measuring range temperature unit to be output Celsius C Fahrenheit F digit and resolution 1 0 1 For inputs from other analog modules such as an A D converter module also set these values E When selecting the following thermocouple Thermocouple type R Temperature measuring range 0 C to 1700 C e Resolution 1 Set CH1 Input range Un G501 to 1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Input range 501 701 901 1101 CHO Input range in the Q compatible mode 32 64 96 128 Setting value and type of thermocouple The following table lists the setting values of CH1 Input range Un G501 and the corresponding thermocouple types The relation between each temperature unit and setting value is also shown as follows e Temperature unit 1 to 99 A thermocouple is used When the output temperature unit is Celsius
250. erates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller 2 When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition it stops the operation and all outputs are Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated e Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self diagnostic function of the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error 3 All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part such as an I O control part where the CPU module cannot detect any error To ensure safety operation in such a case provide a safety mechanism or a fail safe circuit external to the programmable controller For a fail safe circuit example refer to General Safety Requirements in the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual 4 Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident In an output circuit when a load current exceeding the rated current or a
251. eration mode commana 9 Set Auto tuning command to 1 ON 10 When Auto tuning command is set to 1 ON Auto tuning status becomes Executing and the auto tuning starts 11 When the auto tuning is completed Auto tuning status becomes Stopped 12 The temperature control is executed with the set PID constants e Turn off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 lt Page 155 Setting operation mode command e Check that Setting operation mode status X1 is on Page 148 Setting operation mode status 3 Starting the auto tuning Turn off and on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 lt Page 155 Auto tuning command 4 During auto tuning CH1 Auto tuning status X4 is on 15 Page 150 Auto tuning status 5 After the completion of the auto tuning setting PID constants CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off and calculation values are set in the buffer memory gt Page 35 Storing the calculation values after auto tuning 6 Temperature control with the set PID constants The temperature control is executed with the set PID constants 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Auto Tuning Function Conditions in which the auto tuning cannot be executed When one of the following conditions is satisfied the auto tuning cannot be executed Condition 1 The module is in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off 2 Hin the R mode In the standard control or heating cooling co
252. erlap dead Overlap dead System area 0 Setting O O band setting band setting 725 2D5H CH2 Derivative action selection Derivative System area 0 Setting Oo Or xO action selection 726 2D6H CH2 Setting variation rate limiter unit Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting OF OQ O time setting rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting 727 2D7H CH2 System area Open close 20 Setting O output neutral band setting 728 2D8H CH2 System area Control motor 10 Setting Or 0O O time 729 2D9H CH2 System area Integration 1500 Setting O O output limiter setting 730 2DAH CH2 System area Valve operation 0 Setting OO jo setting during CPU module STOP 731 2DBH CH2 Alert dead band setting Alert dead band Alert dead band 5 Setting VO setting setting 732 2DCH CH2 Number of alert delay Number of alert Number of alert 0 Setting o Or delay delay 733 2DDH CH2 Alert 1 mode setting Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting Or PO Ie setting 47 setting 734 2DEH CH2 Alert 2 mode setting Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting O setting 47 setting 735 2DFH CH2 Alert 3 mode setting Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting ololo setting 4 setting 736 2E0H CH2 Alert 4 mode setting Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting Ollo setting 4 setting 737 2E1H CH2 Loop System area 480 Setting E RO he disconnection detection judgment time 738 2E2H C
253. ert 2 Setting mode after operation Stop 0 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Continue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x x xI OIOI Xx x O When Unused channel setting in Application Setting has been set to Unused the alert judgment is not executed even though the above conditions are satisfied For the timing of Setting operation mode command Y1 refer to the following lt Page 155 Setting operation mode command 1 which CH1 Alert flag XC turns off The condition ir in which CH1 Alert flag XC turns off differs depending on the following setting e Stop mode setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Page 129 Application Setting Stop 0 When the cause of the alert is resolved or when the mode has shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode when Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off Monitor 1 Alert 2 When the cause of the alert is resolved rt modes and alert set values The following describes the settings of alert modes and alert set values mAlert mode Set alert modes Set Alert 1 mode setting to Alert 4 mode setting by the following procedure Up to 4 items can be set Alert modes of Alert 1 to 4 correspond to the alert set values 1 to 4 XD Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target
254. ert the alert set value range definition e Check and change the alert set value Page 236 CH1 Alert set value 1 Has a disconnection been detected Check CHO Alert definition and take the appropriate corrective action Page 219 CH1 Alert definition process value PV is abnormal When the temperature process value PV is abnormal check the following items Is the thermocouple wiring resistance value too e Check the thermocouple wiring resistance value and check whether a difference in the temperatures high was caused by the wiring resistance Q1 MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Manual Startup e Use the sensor correction function to correct the difference in the temperatures caused by the wiring resistance 17 Page 54 Sensor Correction Function 138 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom 3 4 List of Error Codes If an error occurs in operation of the temperature control module the error code of the error is stored into Latest error code Un GO of the buffer memory and Error flag X2 turns on In addition an error address is stored in Error address Un G1 Turning on Error reset command Y2 clears the error code in Latest error code Un GO and Error flag X2 turns off Error codes of the temperature control module are classified into minor errors or moderate errors e Minor error This error is caused by setting failures of programs or parame
255. es with inter module peak current suppression function enabled 13 2104 to 2166 All Start I O of slave System area Monitor Ss Se 838H to 876H module with inter module peak current suppression function enabled 9 2167 to 2169 System area SS 877H to 879H 2170 87AH All Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor SS simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function state function state monitor monitor 2171 87BH All Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function enable function enable disable monitor disable monitor 2172 87CH All Inter module System area Inter module System area Monitor se ee simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function master function master slave selection slave selection monitor monitor 2173 87DH All Number of slave System area Number of slave System area Monitor le a modules with modules with inter module inter module simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function function enabled enabled 2174 to 2236 All Start I O of slave System area Start I O ofslave System area Monitor 87EH to 8BCH module with module with inter module inter module simultaneous simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise function function enabled 2 enabled 12 2237 to 3599 System area et ea oo 8BDH to EOFH 3600 to
256. esponse of the temperature control in execution Therefore the control is stable Calculation result The optimum PID constants are calculated by one tuning In the standard control the loop disconnection detection judgment time is also calculated The optimum PID constants may not be obtained by one tuning The loop disconnection detection judgment time is not calculated PID constants setting when characteristics of a controlled object change Users need to execute the auto tuning again to change PID constants The temperature control module automatically changes the PID constants Available control mode Standard control heating cooling control or position proportional control Standard control only Starting ST and vibration ST Depending on the control system status the following two types of self tuning ST can be used Starting ST and vibration ST e Starting ST Self tuning is executed immediately after the control is started or when the set value SV is changed e Vibration ST Self tuning is executed when the control system in a stable state has become oscillatory due to some causes such as disturbance Temperature process value PV Starting ST Vibration ST gt _ _ gt HHow to set starting ST Set one of the following values for Self tuning setting in Application Setting The default value is 0 Do Not Run the ST e 1 Starting ST PID co
257. esponse mode and executing the auto tuning High response mode This mode is suitable for controlled objects whose ON time or OFF time during the auto tuning is only around 10s PID constants with a fast response high gain can be calculated However the temperature process value PV may oscillates near the set value SV because of the too high gain of the PID constants calculated In this case select the standard mode and execute the auto tuning For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following C5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Auto tuning mode selection 543 743 943 1143 186 187 CHO Auto tuning mode selection in the Q compatible mode 184 185 ESetting range 0 Standard mode e 1 High response mode Default value The default value is Standard mode 0 APPENDICES 273 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas When the time taken for the process value PV in the auto tuning to exceed the set value SV exceeds the auto tuning abnormal end judgment time the function judges it as an error and ends the auto tuning A Process value PV l f i 1 4 i 1 1 i 1 I i I I i i 1 3 i 1 i i 1 I i i i I i i 1 1 i 1 1 1 i t i I i 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 Set value i i i i SV h i f 1 i li v 1 i i i j i i i I 1 Li 1 1 1 1 Li 1 i i 1 I I i f f 1 1 i I i 1
258. ession control group setting Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode set the target channel of the peak current suppression function and the width of the control output cycle to be shifted for each channel For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following K5 Page 90 Peak Current Suppression Function When the inter module peak current suppression function has been enabled up to 5 groups can be set b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 279 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Peak current suppression control group setting in the Q compatible mode 784 Setting range e 0 Not divided e 1 1 group 2 2 groups e 3 3 groups 4 4 groups e 5 5 groups when the inter module peak current suppression function is enabled Number of divisions The number of divisions is determined by this setting The upper limit output limiter value is automatically set depending on the set number of divisions At the timing of when this setting is enabled the following values are set 2 500 50 0 3 333 33 3 4 250 25 0 5 200 20 0 CH1 Lower limit output limiter in the Q compatible mode Un G43 is set to 0 Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status
259. et value SV and the setting variation rate limiter 70 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function Setting method Alert mode and the set value SV to be monitored From the reference targets of the set value SV set whether to use CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 or Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting with the alert mode e When alerts need to be judged using the value in CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 set one of the following values 3 Upper limit deviation alert 4 Lower limit deviation alert 5 Upper lower limit deviation alert 6 Within range alert 9 Upper limit deviation alert with wait 10 Lower limit deviation alert with wait 11 Upper lower limit deviation alert with wait 12 Upper limit deviation alert with re wait 13 Lower limit deviation alert with re wait 14 Upper lower limit deviation alert with re wait e When alerts need to be judged using the value of Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting set one of the following values 15 Upper limit deviation alert use set value SV setting value 16 Lower limit deviation alert use set value SV setting value 17 Upper lower limit deviation alert use set value SV setting value 18 Within range alert use set value SV setting value 19 Upper limit deviation alert with wait use set value SV setting value
260. etting disable setting 750 2EEH CH2 Process value PV scaling upper Process value Process value 0 Setting O IO JO limit value PV scaling PV scaling upper limit upper limit value value 751 2EFH CH2 Process value PV scaling lower Process value Process value 0 Setting O IO JO limit value PV scaling PV scaling lower limit lower limit value value 752 2F0H CH2 Peak current System area 0 Setting O IO JO suppression control group setting 753 2F1H CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO JO temperature rise group setting 754 2F2H CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O IO temperature rise gradient data 755 2F3H CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O IO temperature rise dead time 756 2F4H CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO temperature rise AT mode selection 757 2F5H CH2 Disturbance judgment position Disturbance System area 0 Setting O O IO judgment position 7 758 2F6H CH2 Set value return adjustment Set value return System area 0 Setting O IO adjustment 759 2F7H CH2 Feed forward control forced starting Feed forward System area 0 Setting O signal control forced starting signal 760 2F8H CH2 Feed forward value Feed forward System area 0 Setting O IO value 761 2F9H CH2 Feed forward value tuning sele
261. evice Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Lower limit output limiter 509 709 909 1109 CHO Lower limit output limiter in the Q compatible mode 43 75 107 139 252 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Setting range The setting range is 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Set values so that the lower limit output limiter value is smaller than the upper limit output limiter value When the lower limit output limiter value is equal to or greater than the upper limit output limiter value CHO Upper lower limit output limiter setting error error code 1AOOH occurs When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs When an error has occurred the following operations will be executed Error flag X2 turns on e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO HTwo position control In the two position control this setting is disabled Manual control In the manual control this setting is disabled When an output to an external device exceeds the lower limit output limiter value the manipulated value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped to the set lower limit output limiter value Default value The default value is 0 0 0 CH1 Output variation amount limiter Set the limit of the output variation amount per 1s to regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV Buffer mem
262. f the setting range after the change In this case an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs in the buffer memory area where the set value is out of the setting range Change the input range after setting a value within the setting range after the input range change in each buffer memory area Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Precautions Soon after the input range is changed the input temperature may be unstable Do not start the control until Temperature conversion completion flag Un G43 becomes First temperature conversion completed 1H Default value For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2T T2BW the default value is 2 For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW the default value is 7 CH1 Unused channel setting Set this buffer memory area when handling channels to which no temperature control is executed or no temperature sensors are connected as Unused Setting those channels as unused channels stops alert detections on them For details on the unused channel setting refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Manual Startup Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Unused channel setting 502 702 902 1002 CHO Unused channel setting in the Q compatible mode 61
263. fer Memory Areas CH1 Set value return adjustment Set a return action to be taken when the temperature process value PV returns to the set value SV from the temperature A fall caused by disturbance The overshoots amount and recovery time can be adjusted 31 0 1 30 5 Set value _ 39 9 SV 3 29 5 29 0 28 5 28 0 Time s Pid gt FF control PID control 1 PID control no return adjustment 2 Return adjustment value Small 3 Return adjustment value Large Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Set value return adjustment 558 758 958 1158 CHO Set value return adjustment in the Q compatible mode 1045 1061 1077 1093 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 10 When 0 is set the return adjustment to the set value is not executed Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal This signal forcibly starts the feed forward Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward control forced starting signal 559 759 959 1159 CHO Feed forward control forced starting signal in the Q compatible mode 1046 1062 1078 1094 Setting range e 0 Feed forward control forced start stop e 1 Feed forward control forced start Default value The default value is Feed forward cont
264. fer Memory Areas CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status The execution status of the simultaneous temperature rise can be monitored in this area e 0 Simultaneous temperature rise not in process e 1 Simultaneous temperature rise in process During control by the simultaneous temperature rise function Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is stored in this area The following figure shows the timing on when Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is stored in this area In the figure CH1 and CH2 have been set to Group 1 5 Page 280 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting 1 Temperature rises using Temperature rises the simultaneous according to the PID The temperature rise temperature rise function constants of each channel completion times match for this interval for this interval Temperature A process value PV x cece Aarne CH1 Set value SV F 77777 ees Sa re a ere CH2 Set value SV f r 777 7 77 7 7 7 7 Group 1 ime CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G414 and CH2 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G614 CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G404 and CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G604 J i i 1 i 1 i i 1 1 J 1 i i i f J i i i 1 i arrival point i J i i 1 i i 1 1 i 1 i i 1 i 7 i i 1 i J i
265. fety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC iQ R series programmable controllers This manual describes the performance specifications procedures before operation wiring and operation examples of the relevant products listed below Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC iQ R series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program and circuit examples provided in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual Relevant products R60TCTRT2TT2 R60TCTRT2TT2BW R60TCRT4 R60TCRT4BW 10 CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e occ cunnd heed ee khe a a dah eth cd eo ies oe Oo ek ob ae Reet es 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 00 cece tet tntteeeee 9 INTRODUCTION esse edie see Ps Fe uini ea EM BEE BAG es Gene bee Se RY ee whee ERU 9 RELEVANT MANUALS 3 2 2505 4 554 be d tierde eee oda hi eee ake oe wed de bese dae he ee ees 12 TERMS Skei coisa et incest et ahs ae ates re av niga Oe Gy A eeu nel etek a r aa tans abe E RAUB Ney Mince Liat ait ingen Een eb 12 CHAPTER 1 FUNCTIONS 13 1 1 Co
266. ff and PID constants are calculated depending on the hunting cycle and amplitude that occur when overshoots and undershoots of the temperature process value PV to the set value SV are repeated Auto tuning operation The temperature control module operates as follows Set value SV Temperature process value PV uf 1 nS CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 Point Temperature process value PV 2 A Executed in a program Executed by the temperature control module 1 The module starts the auto tuning 2 The first overshoot and undershoot are ignored 3 The module collects data from the point where the temperature process value PV reaches the set value SV after the first overshoot and undershoot 4 The module ends the auto tuning when PID constants and the loop disconnection detection judgment time are set after the data collection The time taken for the auto tuning depends on a controlled object 1 FUNCTIONS 34 1 11 Auto Tuning Function gt Time 3 4 Temperature la Auto tuning in execution control ON x OFF gt A ON l OFF Settings related to the auto tuning The auto tuning can be executed when the following setting have been configured Configure the other settings to the values used for actual operations because actual control starts on completion of the auto tuning When 0 has been set for CH1 Proporti
267. ffer Memory Areas MCorrespondence between each bit and flag The following table shows the correspondence between each bit in this buffer memory area and each flag bO CH1 Read completion b8 CH1 Read failure b1 CH2 Read completion b9 CH2 Read failure b2 CH3 Read completion b10 CH3 Read failure b3 CH4 Read completion b11 CH4 Read failure b4 CH1 Write completion b12 CH1 Write failure b5 CH2 Write completion b13 CH2 Write failure b6 CH3 Write completion b14 CH3 Write failure b7 CH4 Write completion b15 CH4 Write failure yrward value memory read completion flag This flag shows whether reading of data from the following buffer memory areas has been completed successfully or has failed CH1 Feed forward value memory read command Un G441 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Feed forward value memory read completion flag 48 Feed forward value memory read completion flag in the Q compatible mode 1417 MCorrespondence between each bit and flag The following table shows the correspondence between each bit in this buffer memory area and each flag bO CH1 Read completion b8 CH1 Read failure b1 CH2 Read completion b9 CH2 Read failure b2 CH3 Read completion b10 CH3 Read failure b3 CH4 Read completion b11 CH4 Read failure ETiming of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Feed forward value memory read command Un G441 The f
268. ffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert 3 mode setting 535 735 935 1135 CHO Alert 3 mode setting in the Q compatible mode 194 210 226 242 Point This area is disabled for the following modes and channels e Heating cooling control normal mode position proportional control normal mode CH3 CH4 e Mix control normal mode CH2 Alert mode and alert set value Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 3 selected in this setting Set a value in CH1 Alert set value 3 Un G436 CH1 Alert set value 3 Un G436 corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 3 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting lt Page 268 Setting range APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 269 Enabling the settings For enabling the settings refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting K Page 268 Enabling the settings Default value For the default value refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting K Page 268 Default value CH1 Alert 4 mode setting Set the alert mode of Alert 4 For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Alert 4 mode setting 536 736 936 1136 CHO Alert 4 mode setting in the Q compatible mode 195 211 227 24
269. following values CH1 7 CH2 0 CH3 6 and CH4 22 Because the heater disconnection alert setting has been set to 80 a disconnection is detected only in CH4 Ex When Heater disconnection alert setting of Heater disconnection detection setting in Application Setting is 80 and the differences between CHO Heater current value and the reference heater current value are the following values e CH1 16 e CH2 17 CH3 22 e CH4 19 The following table shows the result CH1 80 16 16 0 16 16 None CH2 17 1 17 16 None CH3 22 6 22 16 None CH4 19 3 19 16 None The correction value is 16 and the heater disconnection detection judgment is executed on the following values CH1 0 CH2 1 CH3 6 and CH4 3 Because the heater disconnection alert setting has been set to 80 none of the channels are regarded as disconnected 1 FUNCTIONS 8 3 1 27 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 84 Restrictions When only one channel has been used the heater disconnection correction function does not work To use this function two or more channels have to be used e When multiple channels have been used with a heater that is on in one channel and heaters that are off in the other channels the heater disconnection correction function does not work Thus disconnections may be detected even though there is no dis
270. fresh settings are configured in all of 104 items 104 words in total 104 x 0 98 0 05 x 104 11 6 118 72us Hence the refresh read time is 118 72us 2 PARAMETER SETTING 4 33 2 5 Refresh Settings 3 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur when the temperature control module is used and troubleshooting 3 1 Checks Using LEDs Checking the display status of LEDs is the primary diagnostics without an engineering tool narrowing down the causes of the error that has occurred A state of the temperature control module can be checked with the RUN LED ERR LED ALM LED and HBA LED The following table shows the correspondence between each LED status and each state of the temperature control module RUN LED Indicates the operating status of the temperature control module On The module is operating normally Flashing The module is selected as a module for the online module change Off 5V power supply has been shut off a watchdog timer error has occurred or replacing the module is allowed in the process of the online module change ERR LED Indicates the error status of the temperature control module On An error has occurred Off Normal operation ALM LED Indicates the alert status of the temperature control module On An alert has occurred Flashing A temperature process value PV is out of the temperature measuring range a loop disconnection has been detected or a temperature sensor has not
271. fset latch request Sate N tee ate ea eee A A A Aoi aes 290 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 220000e eee 292 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 22000000s 291 CH1 Set value SV monitor 224 CH1 Set value SV setting 233 CH1 Set value return adjustment 285 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop sete pele tine Sacha Ged tts adele E Ret aas eee teat eke 3 256 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Site Recess etal heen pun ar emeetane eben E 263 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise 255 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection 220000 283 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 282 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data ee ee eee eee eee ee are eee 282 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise group setting audi a eh Rust sans E E AA Mpls a A S 280 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status 229 CH1 Stop mode setting 247 CH1 Temperature process value PV 220 CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module 239 CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting ibe ioina thet dino iaa a Bean ge ack ad GOD deck nad tate gu tol 250 CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Senegal ln atte Cole kt ARAB ipa aa e L acon cates 28 250 CH1 Tempera
272. g 0 Setting 142 8EH CH4 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting band setting band setting 143 8FH CH4 Control output Heating control Control output System area 30 17 Setting cycle setting output cycle cycle setting 300 18 setting 144 90H CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting 145 91H CH4 Control Control Control Control 0 Setting response response response response parameter parameter parameter parameter 146 92H CH4 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting mode shift mode shift mode shift 147 93H CH4 MAN output MAN output MAN output System area 0 Setting setting setting setting 148 94H CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter setting variation setting variation setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature rise 10 rise 1 10 rise 1 rise 510 149 95H CH4 AT bias AT bias AT bias AT bias 0 Setting 150 96H CH4 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse Direct reverse 1 Setting action setting action setting action setting 151 97H CH4 Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter
273. g OF O amount setting amount setting amount setting 773 305H CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting OF OQ PO PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling function enable function enable function enable function enable disable setting disable setting disable setting disable setting 774 306H CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting Oe Oo O PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling lower limit value lower limit lower limit value lower limit value value 775 307H CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting O Or PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling upper limit value upper limit upper limit value upper limit value value 776 308H CH4 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Monitor PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling value value value value 777 309H CH4 Derivative Derivative Derivative System area 0 Setting Or 20 eE action selection action action selection selection 778 30AH CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting OIGO IO temperature rise temperature rise group setting group setting 779 30BH CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting Or E gt le te temperature rise temperature rise gradient data gradient data 780 30CH CH4 Simultaneous System area Si
274. g from to the R60TC_1 stErrorinfo_D uLat reflected to the module The run time of a program is longer than module label estErrorCode_D the one for auto refresh However the responsiveness is high APPENDICES Appendix 1 Module Label 1 45 Appendix 2 1 0 Signal List of I O signals The following table lists the I O signals of the temperature control module For details on the I O signals refer to the following L Page 147 Details of input signals K Page 155 Details of output signals e The following I O numbers X Y are for the case when the start I O number of the temperature control module is set to 0 Do not use the following use prohibited signals because the system uses the signals If users use turn off or on the signals the functions of the temperature control module cannot be guaranteed X0 Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag Module READY flag X1 Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status Setting operation mode status X2 Error flag Error flag Error flag Error flag X3 Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag Hardware error flag X4 CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status CH1 Auto tuning status X5 CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status CH2 Auto tuning status X6 CH3 Auto tuning status CH3 Auto
275. g operation Setting mode after operation For details on the temperature judgment PID control and alert judgment refer to the following e Temperature judgment Page 219 CH1 Alert definition e PID control 45 Page 19 Condition to execute the PID control Alert judgment Page 74 Condition for alert judgment MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Signal name CH1 to CH4 Setting operation mode status X1 148 APPENDICES Appendix 2 1 O Signal This flag turns on when an error other than a hardware error occurs After an error occurs and the error code of the error is stored in Latest error code Un GO this flag turns on An error occurs under the following conditions e When data is set in a system area of the buffer memory e When the setting in the area where writing is enabled only in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off is changed in the operation mode Setting operation mode status X1 On When the data that cannot be set is set e When settings in the buffer memory are changed while the default settings have been registered ON Error flag X2 ae a l Latest error code Un G0 OH Error code ON Error reset command Y2 OFF po SSeS gt Executed by the temperature control module MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Error flag X2 This flag turns on when a
276. gits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Month Day Un G1813 Hour Minute Un G1814 Second Day of the week Un G1815 to System area Un G1819 First two digits of the year last Stored in BCD code 2014H two digits of the year Month day 630H Hour minute 1234H Second 56H Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code 1H Sunday 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 and Saturday 6 Millisecond upper Stored in BCD code 7H Millisecond lower 89H Value stored when an alarm occurs at 12 34 56 789 on Monday June 30 2014 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Alarm history 3760 to 3919 Alarm history in the Q compatible mode 2160 to 2319 6 APPENDICES 30 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas extension bit monitor Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode the following contents set in Sampling cycle and function extension setting in the Q compatible A mode Un G1024 are stored e Automatic setting at input range change e Setting variation rate limiter setting e Control output cycle unit selection setting e Moving average processing setting The following figure and table show how the settings are stored b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 0 0j O0jJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO a Fi v Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 bO Automatic setting at i
277. gs For how to enable the settings refer to the following KC Page 278 Enabling the settings Default value For the default value refer to the following K Page 278 Default value Point Even though values are set so that the lower limit value is equal to or greater than the upper limit value no error occurs Scaling is executed according to the following formula K Page 63 Monitoring the scaling value CH1 Peak current suppression control group setting Set the target channel of the peak current suppression function and the width of the control output cycle to be shifted for each channel For details on the peak current suppression function refer to the following K Page 90 Peak Current Suppression Function When the inter module peak current suppression function has been enabled up to 5 groups can be set Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Peak current suppression control group setting 552 752 952 1152 ESetting range 0 Not divided e 1 1 group e 2 2 groups e 3 3 groups 4 4 groups e 5 5 groups when the inter module peak current suppression function is enabled Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Not divided OH Peak current suppr
278. gt Peak current suppression control group setting Point For this function no errors occur even though different values are set for the control output cycles for each channel This function operates according to the value automatically set by the control group setting Thus set a single value for the control output cycles of target channels Starting the control Turn off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 of the modules to execute the inter module peak current suppression function in the same scan Start the control at the timing when Inter module peak current suppression function state monitor Un G2100 is changed to In execution 1 Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting for CH1 is set to one of the following values according to the number of divisions Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting is set to 0 0 0 When the value is divided into two parts 500 50 0 When the value is divided into three parts 333 33 3 e When the value is divided into four parts 250 25 0 e When the value is divided into five parts 200 20 0 To change the output limiter value after the startup of the control set a value with a program 1 FUNCTIONS 1 33 Inter module Link Function 1 07 Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function The simultaneous temperature rise is executed among the temperature control modules Up to 64 modu
279. han the products manufactured by U R D Co LTD set CT ratio setting ltem cm mic E CT setting External current sensors CT monitor method switching O ON OFF Current CT input channel assignment setting 0 Unused 0 Unuse CT selection 3 Use CT Ratio Setting 0 0 to 100 0 z 0 CTL 1 Reference heater current value 0 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A CT ratio setting 1 CTL 6 P HICTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 004 2 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A 3 Use CT Ratio Setting 0 0 to 100 04 3 Set the channel to be assigned to CTO in CT input channel assignment setting ltem cm E CT setting External current sensors CT monitor method switching O ON OFF Current CT input channel assignment setting 1 CHI ey CT selection 0 Unused Reference heater current value 1 CH1 CT ratio setting 2 CH2 3 CH3 4 CH4 1 FUNCTIONS 8 4 1 27 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 82 4 Monitor CT1 Heater current process value Un G2030 and check the current value of when the heater is on Buffer Memory Unit 0 HEX Address 2030 o olololole olololol amp F 0 o UgG2032 0 0 o e o ololo 5 Set the value monitored with CT1 Heater current process value Un G2030 in Reference heater current value ltem CTI amp CT setting External current sensors CT monitor method switching O ON OFF Current CT input channel assignment setting CT selection Reference
280. hat the system automatically executes Security Warning An operation judged as unauthorized access to each module Information An operation that cannot be judged as unauthorized access or success of unlocking a password Operation Warning A deletion operation data clear operation that was executed to each module and not judged as a self diagnostics error This operation may possibly be changed Information An operation that was executed by users and may change the system behavior such as module initialization or configuration g method Set the event history function in the Event History Setting window of the engineering tool For the setting method refer to the following MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application playing the event history Display the event history from the menu of the engineering tool For details on the operating procedure and how to check the contents refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual The following table lists the events that occurs in the temperature control module when the event type is Operation 20010 Information Module initialization Initialization of the module has been executed 20011 Information Backing up the module The module has been backed up 20041 to 20044 Information Auto tuning The auto tuning has been executed 20051 to 20054 Information PID forced stop The PID forced stop has been executed
281. he buffer memory address of this area CHO Overlap dead band setting 524 724 924 1124 CHO Overlap dead band setting in the Q compatible mode 723 739 755 771 Setting range e In the R mode Full scale of the input range to 1 Overlap 0 None 1 to the full scale of the input range Dead band In the Q compatible mode 100 to 1 10 0 to 0 1 Overlap 0 None 1 to 100 0 1 to 10 0 Dead band Default value The default value is None 0 n selection Select the type of derivative action Selecting a derivative action suitable for each of fixed value actions and ramp actions improves dynamic characteristics For details on the derivative action selection function refer to the following lt Page 50 Derivative Action Selection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Derivative action selection 525 725 925 1125 CHO Derivative action selection in the Q compatible mode 729 745 761 777 Setting range e 0 Measured value derivation 1 Deviation derivation HEnabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings EDefault value The default value is Measured value derivation 0 262 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Set the
282. he external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area of the buffer memory in the module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the CPU module to each module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system For the system area write protect area and the use prohibited signals refer to the user s manual for the module used Design Precautions N WARNING if a communication cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network take appropriate measures To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet take measures such as installing a firewall Design Precautions CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise During control of an inductive load such as a lamp heater or so
283. he following shows the buffer memory address of this area Automatic setting monitor at input range change 39 limiter setting selection monitor The value set in Setting variation rate limiter setting Un G303 is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Setting variation rate limiter setting selection monitor 40 nit monitor The value set i in Control output cycle unit selection setting Un G304 is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Control output cycle unit monitor 41 essing setting monitor The value set in Moving average processing setting Un G305 is stored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Moving average processing setting monitor 42 204 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Temperature conversion completion flag This flag is for checking whether the temperature conversion has been completed properly for each channel One of the A following values is stored in this area e 0 In conversion or channel not used e 1 First temperature conversion completed When the temperature is being converted or the channel is not used In conversion or channel not used 0 is stored in this area When the first temperature conversion is completed and a temperature process value PV is stored in the buffer memory First te
284. he inter module link function can be used between the temperature control modules having the same control CPU Inter module peak current suppression function The peak current is suppressed among the temperature control modules Up to 64 modules can be divided into 5 groups to suppress the peak current Setting a channel with a large heater capacity and the one with a small heater capacity in one group among the temperature control modules can suppress the scale of the power supply facility Compared to the peak current suppression with one module the scale of the power supply facility can be more suppressed because the current is controlled thorough an entire system Not using the inter module peak current suppression function Using the inter module peak current suppression function Control output cycle Control output cycle Control output cycle Control output cycle 4 pid gt 4 Pit gt r TE E r aoe a TEE CH1 4 1 CH1 root koa er Transistor output 1 i i i Transistor output i i 1 i i i do 1 i i i oi f 1 1 i Temperature Transistor output i Temperature Transistor output i E i control 1 1 1 1 1 1 control 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 module 1 i i i i i i module 1 i i i i i i i i CH3 O oo E CH3 O M i DO m Transistor output i i C Transistor output i a i i i ooo a ooo a oo a e CH4 ce a CH4 rs ia ae ee Transistor output 1 Transistor o
285. heating cooling control The Standard control 2 loops number of loops is expanded using an output module and others in the e Heating cooling control 2 loops system Position proportional control normal Executes the position proportional control CH3 and CH4 cannot be used Position proportional control 2 loops mode Position proportional control expanded Executes the position proportional control The number of loops is Position proportional control 4 loops mode expanded using an output module and others in the system Control for each channel is as follows CH1 Standard Heating cooling Heating cooling Heating cooling Heating cooling Position Position control control control control control proportional control proportional control CH2 Standard Heating cooling Heating cooling 1 Heating cooling Position Position control control control control proportional control proportional control CH3 Standard Heating cooling Standard control Standard control 1 Position control control proportional control CH4 Standard Heating cooling Standard control Standard control 1 Position control control proportional control Only the temperature measurement using a temperature input terminal can be executed eee In the heating cooling control expanded mode mix control expanded mode or position proportional control expanded mode the number of loops for the heating cooli
286. hin the range of 200 0 C to 200 0 C has been set for Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting the actual temperature is 60 C and the temperature process value PV is 58 C Set 2 C for Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting Temperature process value PV p i p value PV After correction Before correction gt Input temperature EProcedure for executing the sensor correction one point correction when using the engineering tool XZ Tool gt Module Tool List 1 Select Temperature trace of Temperature Control Module and click the OK button Start the selected module tool Module Series Selection IQR Series E Analog Input Offset gain setting E Analog Output Offset gain setting Create wave output data E Temperature Input Offset gain setting E Temperature Control Module E Pulse I 0 Positioning Preset Positioning monitor Positioning test 54 1 FUNCTIONS 1 19 Sensor Correction Function File Setting Operation Option Target module Trace status 0000 RE0TCTRT2TT2 Trace stopped Execute sensor correction Target Module 0000 R6E0TCTRT2TT2 1 Target Channel 2 Module Current SteCH2 CH3 Input Range 21CH4 Tem 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection Normal Sensor Correction Sensor Two point Correction 4 Normal Sensor Correction One point Corr
287. his area Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor in the Q compatible mode lave modules with inter module simultaneous temperature rise func enabled The number of slave modules to which the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function has been enabled can be checked Check it with the temperature control module where Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor Un G2172 has been set to Master 1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Number of slave modules with inter module simultaneous temperature rise 2173 function enabled Number of slave modules with inter module simultaneous temperature rise 1353 function enabled in the Q compatible mode 304 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas module with inter module simultaneous temp rise func enabled The start I O number of the slave modules to which the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function has been enabled can be checked Check it with the temperature control module where Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection monitor Un G2172 has been set to Master 1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Start I O of slave module
288. his output signal Setting change command YB Mode of when the PID control stops The mode of when the PID control stops is determined in Stop mode setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting 5 Page 129 Application Setting MDevice No The following shows the device number of this output signal PID control forced stop command YC YD YE YF APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal 1 57 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas List of buffer memory addresses The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of the temperature control module For details on the buffer memory addresses refer to the following K Page 202 Details of buffer memory addresses Setting data The buffer memory areas of the temperature control module are classified into the following data types Description Set this data according to the connected device and application of the system Write read attribute Data can be read and written from to this area Setting method Set this data using an engineering tool or a program Setting timing After changing values turn on and off Setting change command YB to enable the set values Control data Description Use this data to control the temperature control module Write read attribute Data can be read and written from to this area Setting method Set this data using an engineering tool or a program Setting timing As soon a
289. hod Configure the settings in Application Setting of the engineering tool 1 Start parameters Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting In the R mode input the Setting tem to Search 5g Br CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 a GB Base Setting a A 2 Thermocouple K Measure 2 Thermocouple K Measure 2 Thermocouple K Measure 2 Thermocouple K Measured 21 G Control basic parameters f ot oc oc oc fh Temperature rise completion setting ti O Used Used O Used O Used f Limiter setting Ws 30s Ws f Noal Operation Reverse Operation Setting 0 Slow 0 Slow FB Adjustment senstivity dead band setting i 1 Monitor Primary Delay Digital Fiter Setting f Derivative action selection Sensor Corection Value Setting i rarae inh Temperature rise completion soak time setting H Seftuning setting B Limiter setting Scaling setting Upper limit output limiter Simutaneous temperature rise setting Lower Limit Output Limiter i Peak current suppression setting Output Change Amount Limiter i Postion proportional control setting Upper Limit Setting Limiter 1 Cold Junction Temperature Compensation Selection i Lower Limit Settina Limiter Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Resolution of the manipulated value for output wth another an ETETE Aet setting B 3 Loop disconnection detection setting po Rate alam bob Au
290. i PV Maximum gradient Time Dead time Simultaneous temperature rise AT start ON Setting operation mode status X1 OFF 1ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 b0 OFF CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter correction status Un G411 b1 FF CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise parameter error status Un G411 b9 OFF CH1 Self tuning error Un G411 b10 OFF CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion Un G413 b0 CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 OFF i L OFF CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation error status OFF 5 Un G413 b1 104 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function CH1 Self tuning flag Un G411 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag Un G413 When the auto tuning is started with the temperature process value PV that is within the stable judgment width 1 C F after the mode has shifted from the setting mode to the operation mode Until the temperature process value PV goes outside the stable judgment width 1 C F the data measured after the mode has been shifted to the operation mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned off and on can be used Thus the simultaneous temperature rise parameter can be calculated by the auto tuning Temperature A process value P
291. iQ R Module Configuration Manual Transportation Precautions CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations For details on the regulated models refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual The halogens such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine which are contained in a fumigant used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials may cause failure of the product Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods such as heat treatment instead of fumigation The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wood CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the
292. ied the functions can be executed Operating conditions for only the feed forward control e CH1 Feed forward value tuning status Un G416 b1 is not on The feed forward value is not 0 Operating condition for only the set value SV restoration adjustment A value of 1 or larger has been set for the set value SV restoration adjustment Operating conditions for the feed forward control and set value SV restoration adjustment e The control is being executed The AUTO mode is activated e The disturbance judgment position is not 0 e The PID control has been set All of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D are not 0 e The set value SV has not been changed Even when the setting variation rate limiter has been set the set value SV has not been changed according to the variation rate e The temperature is not out of the temperature measuring range e The self tuning is not being executed e The output variation limiter is 0 The simultaneous temperature rise is not being executed e The overshoot suppression function is not operating Startup conditions The following control or function is started when the operating conditions have been satisfied and the following startup conditions are satisfied Startup conditions of the feed forward control e With CH1 Feed forward control READY flag Un G417 on the deviation exceeds the disturbance judgment position e With CH1 Feed f
293. ift the manipulated value MV in a stable condition from the reference value The reference value is 50 for the standard control and 0 for the heating cooling control Point This function can be used only in the P control and PD control This function is disabled when the integral time I is set to a value other than 0 CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 is ignored even though a value has been set However when a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs Standard control The set value SV is set at a point where the manipulated value MV is 50 Thus as long as the temperature process value PV and the set value SV are not balanced at 50 of the manipulated value MV an offset remaining deviation is generated When an offset is generated the proportional band P can be manually shifted by the amount of the offset remaining deviation Ex When using the manual reset function in the following conditions Control method P control CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 300 30 The temperature control module shifts the manipulated value MV in a stable condition at the set value SV from 50 to 80 Proportional band P P E oe T 1 P Configure the settings Percentage to the full scale _ as follows i lt gt Integral time I 0 m i Derivative time D 0
294. imal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is No decimal point 0 A detected temperature value is stored as it is e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is First decimal place 1 A detected temperature value is stored after being multiplied by 10 When a value measured by a temperature sensor has exceeded the temperature measuring range the following value is stored When the measured value is larger than the upper limit value of the temperature measuring range Input range upper limit value 5 of full scale When the measured value is smaller than the lower limit value of the temperature measuring range Input range lower limit value 5 of full scale Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature process value PV 402 602 802 1002 CHO Temperature process value PV in the Q compatible mode 9 10 11 12 220 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas nipulated value MV Results of the PID operation executed on the basis of the temperature process value PV are stored in these areas The following table lists the range of values to be stored Manipulated value MV 50 to 1050 5 to 105 0 50 5 0 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 50 5 0 Manipulated value for heating MVh Manipulated value for cooling MVc However values
295. ime Current Error Detection Function b15 Fixed to 0 Not used 1 The range between the input range lower limit value 5 and the input range upper limit value 5 for the full scale of the input range Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert definition 401 601 801 1001 CHO Alert definition in the Q compatible mode 5 6 T 8 ETemperature measuring range The following shows a calculation example of the temperature measuring range Ex Calculation example When CH1 Input range Un G501 is 38 e Input range lower limit value 5 of full scale 200 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 230 0 e Input range upper limit value 5 of full scale 400 400 0 200 0 x 0 05 430 0 Therefore the temperature measuring range is 230 0 C to 430 0 C The temperature control module checks whether an input temperature is within the temperature measuring range of the input range When the input temperature is out of the temperature measuring range CH1 Input range upper limit Un G401 bO or CH1 Input range lower limit Un G401 b1 becomes 1 ON The conditions that the temperature control module uses to judge whether the measured temperature is within the temperature measuring range or not differ depending on the following settings Setting operation mode command Y1 Page 155 Setting operation mode command PID continuation flag
296. ime D 0 Pe SueeS eee ee eee ees Manipulated value for heating MVh Manual reset The manipulated value for heating MVh can be moved from 0 to 80 to keep the set value SV stable N Heating 0 Cooling 0 Set value SV gt 44 Manipulated value for cooling MVc Cooling 100 4 Manual reset range 100 0 to 100 0 every 0 1 Set 1000 to 1000 A A ANAE Input range Setting method Set a value in the following buffer memory area CH1 Manual reset amount setting Un G517 17 Page 258 CH1 Manual reset amount setting 1 FUNCTIONS 29 1 7 Manual Reset Function 30 1 8 At the execution of auto tuning an auto tuning operational expression is automatically selected depending on a selected Cooling Method Setting Function cooling method and an operation is started Select one of the following methods e Air cooling Select this method when cooling characteristics are a non linear shape and cooling capacity is low e Water cooling Select this method when cooling characteristics are a non linear shape and cooling capacity is high e Linear Select this method when cooling characteristics are close to a linear shape Cooling characteristics rate of when the manipulated value for cooling MVc 100 is 1 1 Cooling system and cooling characteristics Wa
297. in the R mode CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G516 in the R mode CH1 Overlap dead band setting Un G524 in the R mode CH1 Alert dead band setting Un G531 in the R mode CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G538 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G541 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G542 CH1 AT bias Un G546 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 CH1 Disturbance judgment position Un G557 CH1 Sensor correction value setting Un G565 in the R mode CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G568 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G569 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G570 e CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G571 Stored values differ depending on the setting in CH1 Input range Un G501 Resolution 1 0 No decimal point Resolution 0 1 1 First decimal place Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Decimal point position 400 600 800 1000 CHO Decimal point position in the Q compatible mode 1 2 3 4 214 8 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Alert definition Bits corresponding to alerts detected become 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 lofo 0 0 eye
298. ing Item List Input the Setting tem to Search Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Interrupt reissue requ Snopes ate Spa a Haran Explanation 1 Set an interupt factor to be detected Disable 2 Double click the item to change the setting and enter a setting value Items where a value is selected from a drop down list Clicking the V button of the item to be set displays the drop down list Select the item e Items where a value is entered into a text box Double click the item to be set and enter a value 2 PARAMETER SETTING 4 31 2 4 Interrupt Setting 2 5 Refresh Settings Setting method Set the buffer memory areas of the temperature control module to be automatically refreshed Configuring the refresh settings eliminates the need of a program for reading writing data 1 Start parameters XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Refresh Setting Item List Input the Setting temto Search fe BF m Base Setting 8G Application
299. ing System area 0 Setting O IO 2043 7FBH CT6 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2044 7FCH CT7 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2045 7FDH CT8 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2046 7FEH CT1 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2047 7FFH CT2 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2048 800H CT3 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2049 801H CT4 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2050 802H CT5 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2051 803H CT6 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO IO 2052 804H CT7 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JO 2053 805H CT8 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO JIO 2054 806H CT1 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 2055 807H CT2 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 2056 808H CT3 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 2057 809H CT4 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 2058 80AH CT5 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O IO 2059 80BH CT6 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O IO 2060 80CH
300. ing Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function Setting range e In the R mode Set a value within the range of 0 to the full scale of the input range C F When 0 is set this setting is disabled In the Q compatible mode Set 0 or a value within the range of 1 to 1000 0 1 to 100 0 to the full scale of the input range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 When 0 is set this setting is disabled Default value The default value is Disable 0 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop This area is used when the individual setting has been selected with Automatic setting at input range change Un G302 or Sampling cycle and function extension setting in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop 514 714 914 1114 CHO Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop in the Q compatible 564 596 628 660 mode ESetting range e In the R mode Set a value within the range of 0 to the full scale of the input range C F When 0 is set this setting is disabled e In the Q compatible mode Set 0 or a value within the range of 1 to 1000 0 1 to 100 0 to the full scale of the input range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 When 0 is set this setting is disabled Default value The default value is Disable 0
301. ing control Default value The default value is 0 0 0 The same default value is applied to the standard control and the heating cooling control N mode shift Select the value calculated by a PID operation as the manipulated value MV or set the manipulated value MV manually Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO AUTO MAN mode shift CHO AUTO MAN mode shift in the Q compatible mode Setting range 0 AUTO The AUTO automatic mode is activated The manipulated value MV calculated by a PID operation is used for the calculation of the ON time of the control cycle 1 MAN The MAN manual mode is activated The manipulated value MV written in CH1 MAN output setting Un G519 is used for the calculation of the ON time of the control output cycle When shifting the mode from the AUTO mode to the MAN mode Execute the following operations e The manipulated value MV calculated by a PID operation is transferred to CH1 MAN output setting Un G519 Operation to prevent a rapid change of the manipulated value MV After the mode is switched to the MAN mode bits of MAN mode shift completion flag Un G44 corresponding to the channels are set to Shift to MAN mode completed 1 AUTO MAN mode AUTO mode X MANmode AUTO mode 1 1 1 D T CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 AUTO 0 X MmaN K lt AUTO 0 L L i v v i i i MA
302. ing is changed from Not used 0 to Used 1 Temperature conversion completion flag Un G43 is set to First temperature conversion completed 1H after the completion of the first temperature conversion Before referring to the temperature process value PV of each channel check Temperature conversion completion flag Un G43 has been set to First temperature conversion completed 1H e When the standard control heating cooling control expanded mode mix control expanded mode or position proportional control expanded mode has been selected this setting is disabled CH1 Cooling upper limit output limiter Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value for cooling MVc calculated by the PID operation to an external device In the auto tuning this setting is ignored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter 521 721 921 1121 CHO Cooling upper limit output limiter in the Q compatible mode 721 737 153 769 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs When an error has occurred the following operations will be executed e Error flag X2 turns on An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO Point EE TE In the heating cooling control the lower limit value is
303. ing output cycle output cycle 300 6 setting setting 705 2C1H CH2 Control Control Control Control 0 Setting Or OF response response response response parameter parameter parameter parameter 706 2C2H CH2 Temperature rise completion range Temperature Temperature 1 Setting Or OS setting rise completion rise completion range setting range setting 707 2C3H CH2 Temperature rise completion soak Temperature Temperature 0 Setting Or O time setting tise completion rise completion soak time soak time setting setting 708 2C4H CH2 Upper limit Heating upper Heating upper System area 1000 Setting Or O output limiter limit output limit output limiter limiter 7 709 2C5H CH2 Lower limit System area 0 Setting oO output limiter 710 2C6H CH2 Output variation amount limiter Output variation System area 0 Setting Or Or amount limiter 711 2C7H CH2 Upper limit setting limiter Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting OO setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 712 2C8H CH2 Lower limit setting limiter Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting OF Or setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 713 2C9H CH2 Setting variation rate limiter setting Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting OS variation rate limiter temperature rate limiter rate limiter rise setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature rise 27 rise 7
304. ing shows the device number of this input signal Auto tuning status X4 X5 X6 X7 150 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal Turning off and on Setting value backup command Y8 starts the writing of the data in the buffer memory to the non volatile A memory After the data writing is completed this flag turns on Turning off Setting value backup command Y8 also turns off this flag ON Setting value backup command Y8 OFF i nae Mi N Execution status of Non volatile Before write to During write to Completion of write to memory write memory memory memory Setting value backup completion flag X8 OFF Executed in a program masas gt Executed by the temperature control module For details on the data writing to the non volatile memory refer to the following K5 Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Setting value backup completion flag X8 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal 1 51 Default value write completion flag Turning off and on Default setting registration command Y9 starts the writing of the default value of the temperature control module to the buffer memory After the default value writing is completed this flag turns on Turning off Default setting registration command Y9 also turns off this flag ON Default setting registration command Y9
305. ing value registration 1950H Setting out of range Data out of the setting range is being written Set data within the range error 1A00H CHO Upper lower The value set in CHO Lower limit output limiter is equal Set the value so that the upper limit value is greater than limit output limiter to or greater than the value set in CHO Upper limit the lower limit value setting error output limiter 1A10H CHO Upper lower The value set in CHO Lower limit setting limiter is equal Set the value so that the upper limit value is greater than limit setting limiter setting error to or greater than the value set in CHO Upper limit setting limiter the lower limit value 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 4 List of Error Codes 139 Error code Error name Description and cause Action 1AAQOH CHO Sensor two The set values do not satisfy the following conditions Set the values that meet the following conditions point correction Sensor two point correction offset value measured Sensor two point correction offset value measured setting error value lt Sensor two point correction gain value value lt Sensor two point correction gain value measured value measured value e Sensor two point correction offset value corrected Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value lt Sensor two point correction gain value value lt Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value corrected value A indicates
306. inue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 O ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 x 1 Here this term is the generic term of two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control 2 For each timing refer to the following K Page 148 Setting operation mode status Even though the above conditions have been satisfied PID control is not executed when Unused channel setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting has been set to Unused 1 The manipulated value MV and the manipulated value MV for output with another analog module of when CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is turned off and on are as follows CH1 Manipulated value MV 403 50 5 0 Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value MV CH1 Manipulated value MV for 407 0 Page 224 CH1 Manipulated value MV output with another analog module for output with another analog module CH1 Manipulated value for heating 403 50 5 0 Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value for MVh heating MVh CH1 Manipulated value for heating 407 0 Page 225 CH1 Manipulated value for MVh for output with another analog heating MVh for output with another module analog module 1 FUNCTIONS 4 9 1 2 Control Method CH1 Manipulated value for cooling 408 50 5 0 Page 222 CH1 Manipulated value for MVc cooling MVc CH1 Manipulated value for cooling 409 0 Page 225 CH1 Manipulated value for MVc for output with anothe
307. ion method and operational expression The process value inexact differential PID control is an operation method in which a primary delay filter has been put on the input of a derivative action and high frequency noise has been eliminated to execute PID operations on the deviation E Algorithm of the process value inexact differential PID control The following figure shows the algorithm of the process value inexact differential PID control Disturbance D Temperature control module 4 Control response parameters x 3 Controlled object Set value SV gt Slow i Kp 1 Fp G s gt gt i Normal 7 E i Manipulated 1 Fast value MV l I 1 I 1 Kp Tp sS i ee ea 1 1 n Tp lt 8 T i T i i 1 1 I 1 1 1 Kp Proportional gain n Derivative Temperature T Integral time s Laplace transform process value PV Tp Derivative time E Deviation Operational expression The following figure shows the operational expression of the temperature control module T nTp Tp MV oe e F F En F Ina 7 G nTp Dat i T nTp Pv PVn1 E Deviation SV PV t Sampling cycle MV PID control in process value incomplete derivation output PV Process value Kp Proportional gain T Integral time Tp Derivative time n Derivative l Integral value D Derivative value Point The PID control in process value derivation i
308. ion setting When the heating cooling control expanded mode mix control expanded mode or position proportional control expanded mode has been selected the setting of Temperature conversion setting is ignored 32 1 FUNCTIONS 1 9 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels 1 10 Manual Control A manipulated value MV can be set manually by users without being automatically calculated by the PID control The manipulated value MV is checked every 250ms or 500ms and reflected to the transistor output Point Select 250ms or 500ms in Sampling cycle selection of Base Setting Setting method Configure the setting by the following procedure 1 Set CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 to Manual MAN 1 lt Page 258 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift 2 Check that MAN mode completed 1 has been stored in MAN mode shift completion flag Un G44 15 Page 205 MAN mode shift completion flag 3 Set the manipulated value MV in CH1 MAN output setting Un G519 Page 259 CH1 MAN output setting Setting range The setting range differs between the standard control and heating cooling control Standard control 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 e Heating cooling control 1050 to 1050 105 0 to 105 0 1 FUNCTIONS 1 10 Manual Control 33 1 11 Auto Tuning Function The temperature control module automatically sets the best PID constants In the auto tuning the control output is turned on and o
309. ions N CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines included with the base unit Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount a module place the concave part s located at the bottom onto the guide s of the base unit and push in the module until the hook s located at the top snaps into place Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction When using an extension cable connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely Check the connection for looseness Poor contact may cause malfunction When using an SD memory card fully insert it into the SD memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette into the cassette connector of the CPU module After insertion close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Do not directly touch any cond
310. itions to start the during AT loop disconnection detection function e Valid has been set for During AT loop disconnection detection function is enabled disabled of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting A value other than 0 has been set for Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting e The control mode is the standard control CH3 and CH4 of the mix control can be used The during AT loop disconnection detection function does not work when the above conditions are not satisfied An error or alarm does not occur even though the conditions are not satisfied Setting method 1 Seta value other than 0 for Loop disconnection detection judgment time It takes time before the temperature starts rising due to the dead time of a controlled object Consider the dead time of each controlled object and set the value T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Loop disconnection detection setting gt Loop disconnection detection judgment time 2 Set the following item to Valid XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Auto tuning setting gt During AT loop disconnection detection function is enabled disabled 3 Execute the auto tuning Page 37 Procedure of auto tuning Ex For the control in which the te
311. judging position 15 Page 283 CH1 Disturbance judgment position e Set a return action to be taken when the temperature process value PV returns to the set value SV from the temperature fall caused by disturbance for Set value SV restitution adjustment lt Page 285 CH1 Set value return adjustment 3 Set CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 to Automatic setting 1 and start the control 15 Page 287 CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection 4 After the start of the control the feed forward value is automatically calculated by giving a disturbance During the automatic calculation CH1 Feed forward value tuning status Un G416 b1 is on amp Page 230 CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag 5 CH1 Feed forward value change flag Un G416 b0 is turned on and the turning ends Page 230 CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag After the completion of the turning set CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 to No automatic setting 0 57 Page 230 CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag Turning off and on Setting value backup command Y8 is not required because the calculated feed forward value is automatically backed up Point f When the tuning ends in failure CH1 Feed forward value tuning error flag Un G416 b8 is turned on 57 Page 230 CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag 1 FUNCTIONS 113 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function Operating condition When the following conditions are satisf
312. k the Register button to register the correcti 3 OEE iii Register button eset 16 Click the Yes button Correction value will be registered Are you sure you want to continue Caution Sensor correction value of parameter setting has a priority for Normal Sensor Correction One point Correction If initial setting is set in the parameter setting of Intelligent function module and execute the following operation Turn the power OFF gt ON Reset the CPU module gt Cancel the reset ae rs 17 Click the OK button Correction value registration completed a 1 FUNCTIONS 9 1 19 Sensor Correction Function 5 18 Click the Close button unregistered condition setting value will back to the previous one lowing operation ess the Register button to register the correction value wer is turned OFF eset 19 Click the Yes button Exit the sensor correction setting Are you sure you want to continue 20 Click the Yes button Setting mode Do you want to shift to operation mode eames tatitome Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 60 1 FUNCTIONS 1 19 Sensor Correction Function Procedure for executing the sensor correction two point correction when using a program Configure the setting by the following proced
313. l band Pc setting Un G439 only R mode CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise Un G513 only R mode CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop Un G514 only R mode CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Un G516 only R mode CH1 Overlap dead band setting Un G524 only R mode CH1 Alert dead band setting Un G531 only R mode CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G538 CH1 AT bias Un G546 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data Un G554 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Un G555 CH1 Disturbance judgment position Un G557 CH1 Sensor correction value setting Un G565 only R mode CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G568 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G569 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G570 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G571 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 245 When the input range automatic change setting has been set to Disable 0 Automatic setting at input range change in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b0 in the Q compatible mode A value set in a buffer memory area may be out of the setting range Because changing the input range changes the setting range and the set value before the change may become out o
314. larm hiStory 223 034 2 428 0 e ee seen tee 306 Aleit fag s ae iracar eee er aoe bed darted 154 Alert with re wait 00000000 73 Alert with wait ouaaa aaaea 72 Auto tuning command aaaea anaana 155 Auto tuning status a aeaaeae auaa aaa 150 Automatic setting at input range change 214 Automatic setting monitor at input range change hits aa aaia WA tts Andon nE D aN Dean A ah 204 B Buffer memory asuaan aaaeeeaa 12 Cc CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting miaa Gobi d ale Ge Suede lad aan cal deck h doe ste e Qed 257 CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 267 CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 269 CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 269 CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 270 CH1 Alert dead band setting 266 CH1 Alert definiion 219 CH1 Alert set value 1 200 236 CH1 Alert set value 2 0005 237 CH1 Alert set value 3 0005 237 CH1 Alert set value 4 00 238 CHAT DiS pasaian aai aa fob eee eed 275 CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation flag 228 CH1 Auto tuning error judgment time 274 CH1 Auto tuning mode selection 273 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift 258 CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants 00000055 276 CH1 Close side transistor output flag 226 CH1 Control motor time
315. le RUN The temperature judgment and warning judgment are executed and the external output is executed status Stop error The temperature judgment and warning judgment stop and The temperature judgment and The temperature the external output is turned off warning judgment depend on the judgment and warning stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed basic parameters in Application and the external output Setting and the external output is executed depends on Valve operation setting When CPU stop Operation of the RUN gt STOP_ The temperature judgment and The temperature The temperature judgment and The temperature CPU module warning judgment depend on the judgment and warning warning judgment depend on the judgment and warning stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed stop mode setting of Control judgment are executed basic parameters in Application and the external output basic parameters in Application and the external output Setting and the external output is executed Setting and the external output is executed depends on Valve operation depends on Valve operation setting When CPU stop setting When CPU stop Resetting The module is inoperative and does not execute external outputs e Fully pay attention to the settings of PID continuation Flag of Control basic parameters in Application Setting and Valve operation setting When CPU stop of Position p
316. lenoid valve a large current approximately ten times greater than normal may flow when the output is turned from off to on Therefore use a module that has a sufficient current rating After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the settings are being written Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again Doing so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices such as the remote RUN STOP functions select Do Not OPEN in Program for Open Method Setting in the module parameters If OPEN in Program is selected an execution of the remote STOP function causes the communication line to close Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the line and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN function Installation Precautions N WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Installation Precaut
317. les can be divided into 16 groups to execute the simultaneous temperature rise Compared to the simultaneous temperature rise with one module the energy is effectively saved because the time taken for the temperature rise can be adjusted through an entire system Group 1 e Temperature control CH1 module 1 1 CH2 Temperature control f module 2 at ont e Temperature control on module 3 4 CH2 L CH3 Group 16 e Temperature control 4 module 61 a CH e Temperature contro CH1 module 62 1 CH2 Temperature control f CH1 module 63 CH2 Temperature contro module 64 1 Cnt Se Up to 64 modules 16 groups Not using the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function Group 1 Temperature process value PV Temperature control module 1 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 1 CH2 set value SV Temperature control module 2 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH2 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH3 set value SV Start temperature rise 108 1 FUNCTIONS 1 33 Inter module Link Function Using the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function Group 1 Synchronize temperature rise completion time in a group Temperature procese valle PV Temperature control module 1 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 1 CH2 set value SV Temperature control m
318. ling function enable function enable function enable function enable disable setting disable setting disable setting disable setting 950 3B6H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting IO O PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling upper limit value upper limit upper limit value upper limit value value 951 3B7H CH3 Process value Process value Process value Process value 0 Setting OIO IO PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling PV scaling lower limit value lower limit lower limit value lower limit value gt value APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 171 172 952 3B8H CH3 Peak current System area 0 Setting O JO JO suppression control group setting 953 3B9H CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O IO JO temperature rise temperature rise group setting group setting 954 3BAH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O O temperature rise temperature rise gradient data gradient data 955 3BBH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O O temperature rise temperature rise dead time dead time 956 3BCH CH3 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O O temperature rise temperature ris
319. llowing K Page 63 Scaling Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Process value PV scaling upper limit value 550 750 950 1150 CHO Process value PV scaling upper limit value in the Q compatible mode 727 743 759 775 ESetting range The setting range is 32000 to 32000 HEnabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 0 error occurs Scaling is executed according to the following formula Even though values are set so that the lower limit value is equal to or greater than the upper limit value no K Page 63 Monitoring the scaling value CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Set the lower limit value of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following K Page 63 Scaling Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Process value PV scaling lower limit value 551 751 951 1151 CHO Process value PV scaling lower limit value in the Q compatible mode 726 742 758 774 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following K5 Page 278 Setting range 278 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Enabling the settin
320. lt value is 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request This request is for storing the temperature process value PV as the sensor two point correction offset value in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G568 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch request 566 766 966 1166 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch request in the Q compatible 548 580 612 644 mode Setting range e 0 No request e 1 Latch request Default value The default value is No request 0 HEnabling the stored value In the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off Restriction The conversion is prohibited in the operation mode Setting operation mode status X1 On 290 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request This request is for storing the temperature process value PV as the sensor two point correction gain value in the following A buffer memory area e CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G570 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K P
321. ltaneous temperature rise gradient data 554 754 954 1154 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data in the Q compatible mode 731 747 763 779 ESetting range The setting range is 0 to the full scale of the input range Default value The default value is 0 a This setting can be set manually and calculated automatically Automatic calculation is executed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the calculation of the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been set is completed successfully CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time Set the simultaneous temperature rise dead time time taken for the temperature to start rising after the output is turned on For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following KC Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 555 755 955 1155 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise dead time in the Q compatible mode 732 748 764 780 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 3600 s Default value The default value is 0 This setting can be set manually and calculated automatically Automatic calculation is executed when the simultaneous temperature rise AT auto tuning or self tuning when the calculation of the simultaneous temperature ri
322. ltiple channels interrupt requests that have the same factor will be sent to the CPU module for several times At this time the CPU module executes multiple interrupt programs simultaneously the scan monitoring function of the CPU module judges the programs cannot be completed successfully and a CPU error may occur When a CPU error occurs refer to the following LA MELSEC iQ R CPU Module User s Manual Application 1 FUNCTIONS 1 40 Interrupt Function 125 Ex When an interrupt program 150 is executed in CH1 at the occurrence of a loop disconnection e Parameter setting Set Interrupt setting of the parameter as follows 4 Alert definition Loop disconnection CH1 150 e Label setting Module label RCPU stSM bAlways_ON Always ON SM400 RCPU stSM bAfter_RUN1_Scan_ON One scan ON after RUN SM402 R60TC_1 stInterruptSettingData2_D unInterrupt Interrupt factor mask U0 G127 0 FactorMask_D 3 0 R60TC_1 stInterruptSettingData2_D unInterrupt Interrupt factor reset request U0 G159 0 FactorResetRequest_D 3 0 Label to be defined Define global labels as follows Label Name 126 11 SM402 SIMASK 103 K1 El R60TC_1 stInterruptSettingData2_D unInterruptFactorMas SET k_D 3 0 U0 G127 0 105 sm4o0 a RCPU stSM bAlways_ON 143 o o o OS SET FEND R60TC_1 stInterruptSettingData2_D un
323. lue backup BR rene eres he ee ee ee a Oe 1 command Y8 ON Write command OS Non volatile memory 3 Setting value backup completion flag X8 ON Completed 2 Write Buffer memory data Read Taaa When the power is turned off and on or at reset If writing the data to the non volatile memory is not completed successfully Setting value backup failure flag XA turns on ESetting change Change the settings of the buffer memory areas while Setting value backup completion flag X8 is off EReading data from the non volatile memory Data can be read by the following methods e Turning off and on the power or resetting the CPU module and canceling the reset Setting CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 to Requested 1 However the data to be read is only the PID constants of the corresponding channels and the loop disconnection detection judgment time Setting CH1 Feed forward value memory read command Un G441 to Requested 1 However the data to be read is only the feed forward values of the corresponding channels 1 FUNCTIONS 4 4 7 1 36 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function Precaution on after the execution of the set value backup function After this function is executed in the Q compatible mode the data transferred to the buffer memory areas when the power was turned off and on or the CPU module was reset and the reset was canceled is overwritten with new da
324. lue process value PV for input PV for input PV for input PV for input with another with another with another with another analog module analog module analog module analog module APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 191 192 692 2B4H CH4 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Setting O process value process value process value process value PV for input PV for input PV for input PV for input with another with another with another with another analog module analog module analog module analog module gt 693 to 694 System area A a 2B5H to 2B6H 695 2B7H CH2 System area Temperature System area 0 Setting O conversion setting 696 2B8H CH3 System area Temperature System area Temperature 0 Setting OD O conversion conversion setting setting 697 2B9H CH4 System area Temperature System area Temperature 0 Setting Oni amp conversion conversion setting 2 setting 698 2BAH CH1 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O OO 699 2BBH CH2 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting O IO O 700 2BCH CH3 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting OOL O 701 2BDH CH4 Number of moving averaging setting 2 Setting IOLO 702 to 703 System area i ee 2BEH to 2BFH 704 2COH CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling
325. m area 800 Setting O APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 190 292 124H CT5 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 293 125H CT6 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 294 126H CT7 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 295 127H CT8 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O IO 296 to 543 System area ee 128H to 21FH 544 220H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting 1O O O O 545 221H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 546 222H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 547 223H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 548 224H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 549 225H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor 550 226H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 551 227H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor 552 to 563 System area SS a a 228H to 233H 564 234H CH1 Setting variation rate li
326. mal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Default value e For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW The default value is 1300 For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRTI4BW The default value is 6000 254 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Set the lower limit value of the set value SV Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Lower limit setting limiter 512 712 912 1112 CHO Lower limit setting limiter in the Q compatible mode 56 88 120 152 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following K5 Page 254 Setting range Setting unit For the setting unit refer to the following K5 Page 254 Setting unit Default value For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW The default value is 0 For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW The default value is 2000 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise Set the variation rate of the set value SV per a set unit time for when the set value SV is changed This setting can regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value MV Set a unit time in CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Un G526 Page 263 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Temperature process v
327. mand command 841 349H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Control aS ee value memory value memory value memory read command read read command command 842 to 899 System area ae ae i 34AH to 383H 900 384H CH3 HOLD CLEAR setting 0 Setting Or PO 901 385H CH3 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting IO sO 7 TCRT 902 386H CH3 Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel 0 Setting Oo setting setting setting setting 903 387H CH3 Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting O fe setting setting setting setting 904 388H CH3 Control output Heating control Control output System area 30 15 Setting OP OF cycle setting output cycle cycle setting 300 6 setting 905 389H CH3 Control Control Control Control 0 Setting OP Oe ape response response response response parameter parameter parameter parameter 906 38AH CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 1 Setting I0 p rise completion rise completion rise completion rise completion range setting range setting range setting range setting 907 38BH CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Setting Oo rise completion rise completion rise completion rise completion soak time soak time soak time soak time setting setting setting setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 169
328. may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module and do not insert remove the extended SRAM cassette to from the CPU module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction After the first use of the product do not insert remove the SD memory card to from the CPU module more than 500 times Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Do not touch the metal terminals on the back side of the SD memory card Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module Do not touch the integrated circuits on the circuit board of an extended SRAM cassette Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it dispose of it without using Startup and maintenance of a c
329. me of the control output cycle is determined by multiplying the control output cycle by the manipulated value for heating MVh calculated by a PID operation When the manipulated value for heating MVh is stable pulses are repeatedly output in the same cycle For details on this area refer to the following lt gt Page 248 CH1 Control output cycle setting Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Heating control output cycle setting 504 704 904 1104 CHO Heating control output cycle setting in the Q compatible mode 47 79 111 143 response parameter In the simple two degree of freedom PID control select the response speed to the change of the set value SV from the following three levels Slow Normal and Fast For details on the simple two degree of freedom refer to the following lt Page 51 Simple Two degree of freedom Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Control response parameter 505 705 905 1105 CHO Control response parameter in the Q compatible mode 49 81 113 145 Setting range 0 Slow Set this value when reducing the overshoot and undershoot to the change of the set value SV However the settling time becomes the longest among the three settings 1 Normal This setting has features between Slow and Fast 2 Fast Set this value when hastening the response to
330. ment mode is the high accuracy mode 200ms or shorter The following shows the timing when an alert is output 500ms x n n Value set for Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting When the heater disconnection status lasts longer than the time described above the following operations are executed The HBA LED turns on e CH1 Alert flag XC turns on e CH1 Heater disconnection detection Un G401 b12 is turned on CHO Heater disconnection detection alarm code 0880 is stored in Latest alarm code Un G3 Page 138 When the temperature process value PV is abnormal Supported modules R6OTCTRT2TT2BW R6OTCRT4BW Setting method Configure the setting by the following procedure XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt CT setting 1 Set the current sensor CT to be used for CT selection Item cT1 Cc E CT setting External current sensors CT monitor method switching O ON OFF Current CT input channel assignment setting 0 Unused 0 Unuse CT selection 0 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 CTL 1 Reference heater current value 0 CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 04 CT ratio setting 1 CTL 6 P HICTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 004 2 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A 3 Use CT Ratio Setting 0 0 to 100 04 2 When using a current sensor CT other t
331. mit Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting OF Or e pe setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 121 79H System area S 122 7AH CH3 Heater System area Heater System area 0 Setting oO O disconnection disconnection alert setting alert setting 123 7BH CH3 Loop System area Loop System area 480 Setting O O S disconnection disconnection detection detection judgment time judgment time 124 7CH CH3 Loop System area Loop System area 0 Setting O rO JS disconnection disconnection detection dead detection dead band band 125 7DH CH3 Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel Unused channel 0 Setting I0 setting setting setting setting 126 7EH CH3 Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Setting constants read constants read constants read constants read command command command command gt 127 7FH CH3 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 0 Setting backup setting backup setting backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID constants of PID of PID constants of PID constants constants 128 80H CH4 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting O lO IlO 7 TCRT 129 81H CH4 Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting Oe WE setting setting setting setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 185
332. mit output limiter value the manipulated value MV of the manual control is fixed clipped to the set upper limit output limiter value Default value The default value is 1000 100 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 251 41 Heating upper limit output limiter Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value for heating MVh calculated by the PID operation to an external device In the auto tuning this setting is ignored Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Heating upper limit output limiter 508 708 908 1108 CHO Heating upper limit output limiter in the Q compatible mode 42 74 106 138 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs When an error has occurred the following operations will be executed e Error flag X2 turns on An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO In the heating cooling control the lower limit value is not used When CH1 Lower limit output limiter Un G509 is set to a value other than 0 an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs ETwo position control In the two position control this setting is disabled Manual control In the manual control this setting is disabled Default value The default value is 1000 100 0 d
333. miter temperature drop 15 0 Setting O o J 565 to 570 System area S e i ee 235H to 23AH 571 23BH All During AT loop System area During AT loop System area 0 Setting O IO disconnection disconnection detection detection function enable function enable disable disable 572 23CH System area SS oc S S 573 23DH CH1 ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor IO temperature rise parameter calculation flag 574 23EH CH1 Self tuning System area 0 Setting O O setting 575 23FH CH1 Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor IO 576 240H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 577 241H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 0 Setting O O IO JO 578 242H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 0 Setting O O IO JO 579 243H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 0 Setting O O JIO JO 580 244H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 0 Setting O 581 245H CH2 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor 582 246H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch request 0 Setting O 583 247H CH2 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor 584 to 595 System area SS
334. mmand Un G440 to read the data again Memory s PID constants write completion flag This flag shows whether an operation to the non volatile memory has been completed without errors or has failed depending on the settings in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 15 Page 276 CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Memory s PID constants write completion flag 47 Correspondence between each bit and flag The following table shows the correspondence between each bit in this buffer memory area and each flag bO CH1 Write completion b8 CH1 Write failure b1 CH2 Write completion b9 CH2 Write failure b2 CH3 Write completion b10 CH3 Write failure b3 CH4 Write completion b11 CH4 Write failure APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 207 BTiming of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 The following figure shows the timing of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 For CH1 ON CH1 Auto tuning status X4 OFF CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID
335. mperature conversion completed 1 is stored in this area The following figure shows the channel assignment of this area b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 01 10 010 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 O ICH4CH3ICH2IiCH1 E Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Temperature conversion completion flag 43 Temperature conversion completion flag Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode this flag is for checking whether the temperature conversion has been completed properly for each channel One of the following values is stored in this area e 0 In conversion or channel not used e 1 First temperature conversion completed When the temperature is being converted or the channel is not used In conversion or channel not used 0 is stored in this area When the first temperature conversion is completed and a temperature process value PV is stored in the buffer memory First temperature conversion completed 1 is stored in this area The following figure shows the channel assignment of this area b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Temperature conversion completion flag in the Q compatible m
336. mperature rise have to be completed at the same time Aligning the temperature rise completion time enables an even control of temperatures without partial burning or partial heat expansion In addition the channel that has reached the set value SV first does not need to be kept warm at the set value SV until the last channel reaches the set value SV leading to energy saving Ex Comparison of the cases where the simultaneous temperature rise function is used and the function is not used in CH1 Temperature process value PV Useless energy CH1 Set value SV CH2 Set value SV mAai CH3 Set value SV CH4 Set value SV Lo a E ores gt Arrival point Arrival point Time No simultaneous Simultaneous temperature rise temperature rise No simultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise 1 FUNCTIONS 9 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function 5 Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise function Among the channels that have satisfied the condition to start the simultaneous temperature rise the channel in which the temperature reaches the set value SV last is used as a standard when the simultaneous temperature rise function is started The temperature of the other channels rise following the temperature of the standard channel The standard channel is determined based on the simultaneous temperature rise parameter and the deviation E Ex When all channels hav
337. mperature rises by 200 C for 40 minutes It takes approximately 24 seconds to raise the temperature by 2 C It takes time before the temperature starts rising due to the dead time of a controlled object Set the time calculated by adding 24 seconds and the dead time of the controlled object For example when the total dead time is 6 seconds set 30 for Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 30 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function Operation to be executed when an alert occurs or does not occur When a loop disconnection detection alert is issued CH1 Alert flag XC and CH1 Loop disconnection detection Un G401 b13 turn on and CHO Loop disconnection detection alarm code 0890H is stored in Latest alarm code Un G3 3 Page 143 List of Alarm Codes When a loop disconnection detection alert is not issued and the auto tuning is completed successfully Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting is automatically updated to the value calculated by the auto tuning Point When a loop disconnection alert occurs there may be an error in the control loop Thus even though the auto tuning has been completed successfully check the control loop and if the loop disconnection detection judgment time of the auto tuning is appropriate Clearing the alert status When o
338. multaneous System area 0 Setting OHG eS temperature rise temperature rise dead time dead time APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 195 196 781 30DH CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O JIO temperature rise temperature rise AT mode AT mode selection selection 782 30EH CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor a IP temperature rise temperature rise status status 783 30FH CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O O0 O0 rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting time setting time setting 784 310H All Peak current System area System area System area 0 Setting OIO O suppression control group setting 785 311H All Sensor correction function selection 0 Setting GO O 786 312H All Temperature conversion completion flag 0 Monitor SS 787 313H All Function extension bit monitor 0 Monitor SS 788 314H All Sampling cycle monitor 0 Monitor m 789 to 1023 System area aa aac ia 315H to 3FFH 1024 400H All Sampling cycle and function extension setting 1 0 Setting O IO 1025 401H All Control mode selection 0 Setting Or Ng 1026 402H All HOLD CLEAR setting 0 Setting Or O 1027 to 1039 System area 403H
339. n monitor Un G2102 has been set to Master 1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Number of slave modules with inter module peak current suppression function 2103 enabled Number of slave modules with inter module peak current suppression function 1283 enabled in the Q compatible mode of slave module with inter module peak current suppression function enabled The start I O number of the slave modules to which the inter module peak current suppression function has been enabled can be checked Check it with the temperature control module where Inter module peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor Un G2102 has been set to Master 1 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Start I O of slave module with inter module peak current suppression function 2104 to 2166 enabled Start I O of slave module with inter module peak current suppression function 1284 to 1346 enabled in the Q compatible mode odule simultaneous temperature rise function state monitor The status of the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function can be checked The status of the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function of the channel corresponding to each bit is stored e 0 Stop e 1 In execution b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 0 0 0 0 0JOJOJOJOJO O CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 7 Bit
340. n refer to the following C Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Default value The default value is Do not execute ST 0 PON This area is enabled only for the following channels CH1 to CH4 of when the standard control is used CH3 and CH4 of when the mix control normal mode or mix control expanded mode is used CH1 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Set whether to enable or disable the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the following K Page 63 Scaling Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting 549 749 949 1149 CHO Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting in the Q compatible mode 725 741 757 773 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 277 Setting range e 0 Disable e 1 Enable Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Disable 0 CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value Set the upper limit value of the temperature process value PV scaling function For details on the temperature process value PV scaling function refer to the fo
341. n G32 2 Temperature measuring range 0 C to 1300 C Alert dead band setting in the Q compatible mode Un G164 5 0 5 Full scale x Alert dead band 1300 C 0 C x 0 005 6 5 C The dead band is the alert set value 6 5 C Default value The default value is 5 266 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Number of alert delay Set the number of times to execute sampling to judge an alert By setting the number of times to execute sampling when the temperature process value PV stays within the alert range after the temperature process value PV has entered the alert range until the number of times to execute sampling exceeds the number of alert delay an alert occurs For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Number of alert delay 532 732 932 1132 Number of alert delay in the Q compatible mode 165 HSetting range e In the R mode The setting range is 0 to 30000 times In the Q compatible mode The setting range is 0 to 255 times alert range Default value The default value is 0 times CH1 Alert 1 mode setting Set the alert mode of Alert 1 For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area
342. n on this command when Setting operation mode status X1 is off in the setting mode Reflection of set values Usually when the settings in the buffer memory have been changed Setting change command YB has to be turned on to reflect the changes of the input range alert mode or other settings However when Default setting registration command Y9 is turned on the changes are reflected without turning on Setting change command YB Device No The following shows the device number of this output signal Signal name CH1 to CH4 Default setting registration command Y9 156 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal j change command Use this command to determine the values set in buffer memory areas The buffer memory areas that can be set only in the A setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function Reflection of set values Even though the set values are written into the buffer memory they are not immediately reflected to the temperature control module s operation To determine the set values turn on and off this command after the set values are written into the buffer memory Turning on and off this command operates the temperature control module according to the setting in each buffer memory area This device can be used as an interlock of Setting operation mode command Y1 Device No The following shows the device number of t
343. n overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply If the external power supply is turned on first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to manuals relevant to the network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification parameter change forced output or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between t
344. nd Y8 again and the data writing to the non volatile memory is completed successfully this flag turns off For details on the data writing to the non volatile memory refer to the following K5 Page 117 Writing data to the non volatile memory When an error of the data read from the non volatile memory is detected at power on Setting value backup failure flag XA turns on and the temperature control module operates with the default values In this case turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and write the settings to the non volatile memory When the data writing fails again a hardware failure has occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative MDevice No The following shows the device number of this input signal Setting value backup failure flag XA Setting change completion flag Turning off and on Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off reflects the value set in each buffer memory area to the controls After the data is reflected this flag turns on Turning off Setting change command YB also turns off this flag Setting change command YB Setting change completion flag XB Executed in a program poses gt Executed by the temperature control module This flag can be used as an interlock of Setting operation mode command Y 1 MDevice No The following shows the device number of this
345. ne of the following conditions is satisfied CH1 Alert flag XC and CH1 Loop disconnection detection Un G401 b13 turn off CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is turned off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off and the mode shifts to the setting mode A manipulated value MV becomes greater than the lower limit output limiter value and smaller than the upper limit output limiter value The value 0 is set for Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting MAN 1 has been set for CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 Disable has been set for During AT loop disconnection detection function is enabled disabled of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting After executing the operations above turn on and off Error reset command Y2 to clear the value in Latest alarm code Un G3 1 FUNCTIONS 89 1 30 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function This function suppresses the peak current by automatically changing the values of the upper limit output limiter of each 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function channel and dividing the timing of the transistor output The timing can be divided into two to four parts 90 CH1 Transistor output CH2 Transistor output CH3 Transistor output CH4 Transistor output Peak current 20s Since all the transistor outputs used turn on at the same time th
346. ned on turn off and on this command again and write the data to the non volatile memory HTimings when this command cannot be accepted This command are not accepted at the following timings e 1 While PID constants are being written automatically after auto tuning e 2 While PID constants are being read from the non volatile memory e 3 When a setting error has occurred e 4 While a setting is being changed with Setting change command YB For 1 to 3 above turn off and on this command again after each factor is cleared For 4 the data writing to the non volatile memory will automatically start when the factor is cleared For details on the data writing to the non volatile memory refer to the following K5 Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function MDevice No The following shows the device number of this output signal Signal name CH1 to CH4 Setting value backup command Y8 Default setting registration command Turning off and on Default setting registration command Y9 returns the data in the buffer memory to the default values according to the control output cycle unit selection setting and the control mode setting After the data writing is completed Default value write completion flag X9 turns on 5 Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses When Setting operation mode status X1 is on in the operation mode Turning off and on this command does not set back the data to the default values Tur
347. nels When the parameter settings of the channels are different an error does not occur e Control output cycle setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting The module operates with the value of Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting that is automatically set when this function is used ex Timing chart of when the timing is divided into four parts ON Setting operation mode command Y1 Setting operation mode status X1 CH1 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G552 CH2 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G752 CH3 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G952 CH4 Peak current suppression control group setting Un G1152 7 Setting change command YB OFF ps CH1 Upper limit output limiter Un G508 i CH2 Upper limit output limiter Un G708 X 250 25 0 7 Change the automatically CH3 Upper limit output limiter Un G908 0 VEN calculated result if needed CH4 Upper limit output limiter Un G1108 Setting change completion flag XB OFF gt Executed in a program pesg Executed by the temperature control module 1 FUNCTIONS 9 4 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function s of dividing timing When the timing is divided into four parts The following table shows two example
348. new set value Default value The default value is 0 268 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Alert 2 mode setting Set the alert mode of Alert 2 For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert 2 mode setting 534 734 934 1134 CHO Alert 2 mode setting in the Q compatible mode 193 209 225 241 f A a Point This area is disabled for the following modes and channels Heating cooling control normal mode position proportional control normal mode CH3 CH4 e Mix control normal mode CH2 HAlert mode and alert set value Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 2 selected in this setting Set a value in CH1 Alert set value 2 Un G435 CH1 Alert set value 2 Un G434 corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 2 ESetting range For the setting range refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting lt Page 268 Setting range Enabling the settings For enabling the settings refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting K5 Page 268 Enabling the settings Default value For the default value refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting lt Page 268 Default value CH1 Alert 3 mode setting Set the alert mode of Alert 3 For details on the alert function refer to the following lt Page 67 Alert Function Bu
349. ng O 647 287H CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor 648 to 659 System area i Se E 288H to 293H 660 294H CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O O I rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature drop 5 drop 1 15 drop 15 drop 15 661 to 668 System area SSS St S 295H to 29CH 669 29DH CH4 ATsimultaneous System area ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor temperature rise temperature rise parameter parameter calculation flag calculation flag 670 29EH CH4 Self tuning System area Self tuning System area 0 Setting O IO setting setting 671 29FH CH4 Self tuning flag System area Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor 672 to 688 System area l S 2A0H to 2BOH 689 2B1H CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module 0 Setting O 690 2B2H CH2 Temperature process value PV for Temperature Temperature 0 Setting O input with another analog module process value process value PV for input PV for input with another with another analog module analog module 691 2B3H CH3 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature 0 Setting O process value process value process va
350. ng 4 226 E2H CH3 Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting OoOo setting 4 setting 1 4 setting 4 setting 4 227 E3H CH3 Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting ONOG setting 14 setting 4 setting 4 setting 514 228 to 232 System area E4H to E8H 233 E9H CH3 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting O 10 0 234 EAH CH3 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting OOHO 235 EBH CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting OOE 236 ECH CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting O JoJo 237 to 239 System area A EDH to EFH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 240 FOH CH4 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting o O gO setting 4 setting 1 14 setting 4 setting 4 241 F1H CH4 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting OO O setting 4 setting 1 14 setting 4 setting 4 242 F2H CH4 Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting OQ Or O setting 4 setting 1 14 setting 4 setting 4 243 F3H CH4 Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting OOIE setting 4 setting 1 4 setting 4 setting 4 244 to 248 System area S ee F4H to F8H
351. ng K5 Page 90 Peak Current Suppression Function Simultaneous temperature rise AT PID constants and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter are calculated The waveform upon execution is the same as that for the auto tuning function For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Procedure for executing the simultaneous temperature rise AT The following shows the procedure for executing simultaneous temperature rise AT 1 Set AT for Simultaneous Temperature Rise for Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode setting XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode setting Simultaneous temperature nse seting Set the simultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise group setting 0 Do not rise tem 0 Do not rise tem 0 Dor Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode settim 1 AT for Simu 0 Conventional A 0 Con E Peak current suppression setting 0 Conventional AT Peak current suppression control group setting EPU Sse Mien en 2 Turn off and on CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 3 Shift the mode to the operation mode turn off and on Setting operation mode command Y1 1 FUNCTIONS 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Operation of the simultaneous temperature rise AT When the function is executed the temperatu
352. ng control or position proportional control can be expanded using an output module and others in the system To use an expanded mode construct a system such as the one shown below CPU 4 ch l module Temperature control module ie Buffer memory r Temperature CH1 CHI Input from the temperature sensor popa CHO Temperature Input from the temperature sensor value PV process value PV CH2 CH2 Un G9 Un G10 CH3 e TER Un G11 Un G12 e Heatin Coolin Heatin Coolin Manipulated CH4 Manipulated value CH4 entol a eines petty contrel value for CH1 forheating MVh 44 PID heating CHO Manipulated operation MVh value for heating MVh CH2 _________ L2H Object to be controlled Heating Object to be controlled Un G13 Un G14 CH3 Heating transistor output UniGt gt Unie Manipulated value transistor gt Manipulated CH4 for cooling MVc output value for CH1 pl Lic cooling CHO Manipulated Mvo value for cooling MVc CH2 c L2C Set value linea UNG 707 CH3 Cooling transistor output gt Cooling transistor output Sv CH4 CHI CHO Set value Initial setting SV setting CH2 Output module in the same system A i Un G34 Un G66 CH3 with the temperature control module an ue Un G98 Un G1
353. ng detection period of Rate alarm in Application Setting e Rate alarm upper limit value of Rate alarm in Application Setting e Rate alarm lower limit value of Rate alarm in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 3 4 1 9 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels Buffer memory Latest error code 0 CHO Decimal point position 600 800 1000 CHO Alert definition 601 801 1001 CH10 Temperature process value PV 602 802 1002 Cold junction temperature process value the R6OTCTRT2TT2 45 and R60TCTRT2TT2BW only Control mode selection monitor 37 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 768 968 1168 CHO Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 769 969 1169 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 770 970 1170 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 771 971 1171 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch request 766 966 1166 CHO Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 619 819 1019 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch request 767 967 1167 CHO Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 620 820 1020 Temperature conversion completion flag 43 Configure the setting as follows W Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Heating cooling control setting gt Temperature convers
354. nput range change When the input range is changed the related buffer memory data is automatically changed to prevent the values in those buffer memory areas from being out of the setting range 0 Disable 1 Enable b1 Setting variation rate limiter setting Select whether the setting variation rate limiter to be set in a batch or individually 0 Set in a batch at temperature rise temperature drop 1 Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop b2 Control output cycle unit selection setting Select 0 1s or 1s as a unit for the cycle of turning on off the transistor output In the position proportional control 1s cycle 0 is selected 0 1s cycle 1 0 1s cycle b3 Moving average processing setting Select whether the moving average processing setting is used 0 Enable 1 Disable b4 to b15 Fixed to 0 Not used Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Function extension bit monitor in the Q compatible mode 787 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 307 Sa pling cycle and function extension setting Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode configure the following settings e Automatic setting at input range change e Setting variation rate limiter setting e Control output cycle unit selection setting e Moving average processing setting e Sampling cycle selection b15 to b13 b12 b11 to b4 b3
355. nstant only e 2 Starting ST Simultaneous temperature rise parameter only e 3 Starting ST PID Constant and simultaneous temperature rise parameter e 4 Starting ST plus Vibration PID Constant Only 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function BHow to set vibration ST Set the following value for Self tuning setting in Application Setting e 4 Starting ST plus Vibration PID Constant Only Operation of self tuning The following shows the operations after the start of the self tuning When the temperature control is started or the set value SV is changed CH1 Auto tuning status X4 is on Starting ST 4 gt Page 150 Auto tuning status P a CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned off 145 Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag wo The temperature is controlled using the set PID constants A PID constants are calculated by the self tuning Qr Check if the control response is poor or not l not proceed to No 8 gt The PID constants are changed to the ones calculated by the self tuning N CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned on Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off Page 150 Auto tuning status The temperature is controlled with the set PID constants When the temperature control is not started or the set value SV is not changed 1 Check if the temperature process value PV is out of the set value
356. ntinued and the self tuning is not executed after that An error does not occur Whether the self tuning is being executed or not can be checked in CH1 Auto tuning status X4 Conditions in which the self tuning ends in failure Under the following conditions the self tuning ends in failure When the self tuning ends in failure CH1 Self tuning error Un G411 b10 is turned on After the self tuning was started 6000 seconds 1 hour and 40 minutes or longer have passed e The variation speed of the temperature process value PV during the self tuning is slower than 1 125 C min e CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 has been out of the temperature measuring range e Required measurement data was not obtained because the manipulated value MV did not reach the upper limit output limiter value or the lower limit output limiter value before the completion of the measurement The temperature process value PV that was supposed to increase after the self tuning was started with the starting ST and decreased by 1 C F or more instead The temperature process value PV that was supposed to decrease after the self tuning was started with the starting ST and increased by 1 C F or more instead The setting for the buffer memory areas in the following table was changed during self tuning Buffer memory Reference CH1 Set value SV setting Un G430 Page 233 C
357. ntrol 0 0 C F has been set for CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 and CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 The two position control has been applied Hin the Q compatible mode In the standard control or heating cooling control 0 has been set for Proportion Belt P Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting The two position control has been applied CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 has been set to MAN 1 Unused has been set for the corresponding channels in Unused channel setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is on A hardware failure has occurred The ERR LED is on N OD nm BR w The value in CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 has exceeded the temperature measuring range CH1 Input range upper limit Un G401 b0 or CH1 Input range lower limit Un G401 b1 is on 8 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 has been set to Requested 1 9 CH1 Write completion flag Un G47 b0 is on When one of the conditions 1 to 5 is satisfied The auto tuning starts when the condition is cleared When one of the conditions 6 to 7 is satisfied Even though the temperature process value PV goes back within the temperature measuring range the auto tuning does not start until CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 is turned off and on again MWhen the c
358. ntrol Mode Selection Function 0 0c cece eee eee eee eee 13 1 2 Control Method s wits ceo iei od Sesh tg ate Sea waded etki Ria shee bh eve aE Screened aa a ere 15 1 3 Sampling Cycle Switching Function 00 00 cece eee eee eee 22 1 4 Control Output Cycle Unit Selection Function 0 0 0 c cece eens 22 1 5 HOLD CLEAR Functions 2 220004 coed sc eeeea deere thee ede nep in EnG dee SOE EEE ee eee 23 1 6 Overlap dead Band Function 0 00 0c eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 25 1 7 Manual Reset Functi h seire reida iker iar eed Shee die ene he ete ERRED E ERENER E DES 28 1 8 Cooling Method Setting Function 0 00 cc ccc cee eee eee eee 30 1 9 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels 0200 cece eee eee eens 31 110 Manual Control 2 0c000020c0ce0cen cee es cece cere eee E ririt ELSE Er Ensi SENEE EEr ee eevee 33 1 11 Auto TUNING FUNCTION ccce ates cere ee kw Wwe eee ae Raa e o eee 34 1 12 Self tuning Functions sr3 i600 20 niss eetan wiv eden es ee eee Raced bie EAA 42 1 13 Direct reverse Action Selection Function 0 00 c cece eee eee eee eee 49 1 14 RFB Limiter Function sic iccccsccccte a ie acces tesa cer ete Sie ere bodies aceite gece eee eee Roe wear ee lege 49 1 15 Derivative Action Selection Function 0000 c cece eee eee eee eee 50 1 16 Simple Two degree of freedom 0 c ccc ene eee e eee eee eee 51 1 17 Auto setting at Input Range Change
359. o 429 System area Sf a a 1A5H to 1ADH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 430 1AEH CH1 Set value SV setting 0 Control O O JO O 431 1AFH CH1 Proportional Heating proportional band Ph Proportional 30 Control O O JO IO band P setting setting band P setting 432 1B0H CH1 Integral time I setting 240 Control O IO IO 433 1B1H CH1 Derivative time D setting 60 Control O O IO 434 1B2H CH1 Alert set value 1 0 Control O O JO O 435 1B3H CH1 Alert set value 2 0 Control O O JO O 436 1B4H CH1 Alert set value 3 0 Control O O JO O 437 1B5H CH1 Alert set value 4 0 Control O O JO O 438 1B6H CH1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module 0 Control O JO IO 439 1B7H CH1 System area Cooling proportional band Pc System area 30 Control O O JO IO setting 440 1B8H CH1 Memory s PID constants read command 0 Control O 441 1B9H CH1 Feed forward value memory read command System area 0 Control O 442 to 499 System area pS pS lS 1BAH to 1F3H 500 1F4H CH1 HOLD CLEAR setting 0 Setting O O 501 1F5H CH1 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting O IO JO 7 TCRT 502 1F6H CH
360. o module has been set as rise function set only one of the modules to which the function master not the master module simultaneous temperature rise function has been exist error between After the inter module simultaneous temperature rise enabled as the master module and turn on the power multiple module function was initialized the slave temperature control supply again or reset the CPU module Page 108 modules cannot receive data from the master Inter module simultaneous temperature rise function temperature control module 1AF2H Simultaneous After the inter module simultaneous temperature rise Check that each module has been properly connected temperature rise function was started Y1 was turned on an abnormal and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU function master response has been detected in the data communication module communication error between the master temperature control module and the between multiple slave temperature control modules module 1AF3H Simultaneous After the inter module simultaneous temperature rise Check that each module has been properly connected temperature rise function was started Y1 was turned on the slave and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU function slave temperature control modules cannot receive data from module reception error the master temperature control module between multiple module 3001H Hardware failure A hardware failure has occurred in the module Check
361. o or smaller than the alert dead band the status changes to the non alert status lower right figure Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A A Alert set value Alert set value loys ane 1 Nf Dead band gt Time gt Time Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function 75 76 Setting of the number of alert delay Set the number of times to execute sampling to judge an alert By setting the number of times to execute sampling when the temperature process value PV stays within the alert range after the temperature process value PV has reached the alert set value until the number of times to execute sampling exceeds the number of alert delay an alert occurs Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Alert setting gt Number of alert delay When the alert mode has been set to Upper Limit Input Alert When 5 times is set as the number of alert delay the system does not issue an alert when the number of times to execute sampling is 4 times or less Temperature process value PV Alert set value Set value SV gt Time Sampling count 3 times 5 times Alert status
362. ocess value PV responds in the reverse direction of the disturbance judgment position and the value exceeds the disturbance judgment width Ex The disturbance judgment position is 5 C Temperature A Process value PV 5 C Set value SV gt Disturbance judgment position 5 C CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 OFF A Disturb Operating status PID control gt lt Suppression X PID control 1 Because the process value PV is larger than the reverse of the disturbance judgment position the disturbance suppression is suspended and the control shifts to the PID control e When CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 has been set to Feed forward control forced start 1 and no disturbance has been detected at the disturbance judgment position CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 is changed to Feed forward control forced start stop 0 Point When a disturbance has been detected at the disturbance judgment position the operation does not stop even though CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 is changed to Feed forward control forced start stop 0 HStop conditions for the set value SV restoration adjustment The deviation E after a bottom exceeds the deviation E at the bottom 1 FUNCTIONS 11 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function 5 116 HStop conditions for the feed forward control
363. ode Un GO Default value The default value is CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 When CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 has been selected the setting of CT1 CT ratio setting in the Q compatible mode Un G288 is enabled In advance set a value in CT1 CT ratio setting in the Q compatible mode Un G288 corresponding to the sensor to be connected After that select CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 300 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas r current value Set the reference value of CT1 Heater current process value Un G2030 for when the heater is turned on Page 297 A CT1 Heater current process value Correspondence between each CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT1 2054 280 CT2 2055 281 CT3 2056 282 CT4 2057 283 CTS 2058 284 CT6 2059 285 CT7 2060 286 CT8 amp 2061 287 Setting range The setting range is within the heater current range of the current sensor set in CT1 CT selection Un G2046 CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 100 0A CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 2 CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 3 CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 2000 0 00 to 20 00A Default value The default value is 0 0 0A Set the number of second winding turns of the current sensor CT to be connected This setting is enabled only when CT1 CT selection Un G2046 has been set to CT ratio setting 0 0 to
364. ode 786 MAN mode shift completion flag This flag is for checking whether the mode shift has been completed when the mode was shifted from the AUTO automatic mode to the MAN manual mode One of the following values is stored in this area e 0 Shift to MAN mode not completed e 1 Shift to MAN mode completed The following figure shows the correspondence between each bit of the buffer memory area and each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 0 0 l o 00 0 0 0 0J 0 0 0 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 When the mode shift to the MAN mode is completed a bit corresponding to the channel turns to Shift to MAN mode completed 1 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 205 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area MAN mode shift completion flag 44 MAN mode shift completion flag in the Q compatible mode 30 BHow to shift the mode Shift the mode with CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 L Page 258 CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Setting a manipulated value MV in the MAN mode Set a manipulated value MV with CH1 MAN output setting Un G519 15 Page 259 CH1 MAN output setting Set a manipulated value MV after checking that MAN mode shift completion flag Un G44 has changed to Shift to MAN mode completed 1 tion temperature process value The meas
365. ode setting 4 0 Setting OOO 196 to 200 System area C4H to C8H 201 C9H CH1 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting IO O 202 CAH CH1 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting O 10 0 203 CBH CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting IO O 204 CCH CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting Oo Oo 205 to 207 System area a CDH to CFH 208 D0H CH2 Alert 1 mode setting 4 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting ololo setting 3 4 setting 4 209 D1H CH2 Alert 2 mode setting 4 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting O lolo setting 14 setting 4 210 D2H CH2 Alert 3 mode setting 4 Alert 3 mode Alert 3 mode 0 Setting O lG o setting 14 setting 4 211 D3H CH2 Alert 4 mode setting 4 Alert 4 mode Alert 4 mode 0 Setting lo lo setting 14 setting 4 212 to 216 System area D4H to D8H 217 D9H CH2 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 1 Setting OO O 218 DAH CH2 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 1 Setting OO O 219 DBH CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 Setting OG 220 DCH CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 Setting G OO 221 to 223 System area 2 eo DDH to DFH 224 E0H CH3 Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode Alert 1 mode 0 Setting OG O setting 4 setting 4 setting 4 setting 4 225 E1H CH3 Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode Alert 2 mode 0 Setting Or Or IO setting 4 setting 1 4 setting 4 setti
366. odule 2 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH1 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH2 set value SV Temperature control module 3 CH3 set value SV Start temperature rise Setting method The following shows the setting method 1 Set Simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable between multiple module to Enable T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Multiple module interaction function gt Simultaneous temperature rise function enable disable between multiple module 2 Set only one module of all the temperature control modules that use the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function to Master in Simultaneous temperature rise function master slave selection between multiple module 3 Set the values calculated by the auto tuning or self tuning or the ones that users calculated for Simultaneous temperature rise dead time and Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data 4 Set groups in Simultaneous temperature rise group setting The inter module simultaneous temperature rise function is not executed to the channel that has been set to Do not rise temperature simultaneously XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise setting gt Simultaneous temperature rise group setting 5 Simultan
367. of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Loop disconnection detection judgment time 537 737 937 1137 CHO Loop disconnection detection judgment time in the Q compatible mode 59 91 123 155 Setting range The setting range is 0 to 7200 s Set a value greater than the time taken for the temperature to change by 2 C F APPENDICES 270 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas MWhen executing the auto tuning A value that is twice as large as the value in CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 is automatically set in this setting However when this setting has been set to 0 s at the start of the auto tuning the loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored Default value The default value is 480 s CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Set the non alert area having the set value SV at the center temperature width in which no loop disconnection is detected to prevent accidental alerts of the loop disconnection detection Temperature process value PV 1 Set value gt SV Non alert area gt Time 1 CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G538 this band has the set value SV at the center For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following K Page 86 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffe
368. of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Heater disconnection judgment mode 2005 2008 2011 2014 CHO Heater disconnection judgment mode in the Q compatible mode 1051 1067 1083 1099 Setting range e 0 Normal mode e 1 High accuracy mode Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is Normal mode 0 296 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas t process value A heater current value detected by the R60TCTRT2TT2BW or R60TCRT4BW is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the setting of CT1 CT selection Un G2046 or CT1 CT selection in the Q compatible mode Un G272 Page 298 CT1 CT selection Page 299 CT1 CT selection Q compatible mode In the R mode CTL 12L 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0A CTL 6 P H CTL 6 S H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 2100 0 00 to 21 00A CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 0 0 to 100 0A 2 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0A CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 3 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0A In the Q compatible mode CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 0 to 2100 0 00 to 21 00A CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 Buffer memory address The following sho
369. ol basic parameters in Application Setting 38 Temperature measuring range 200 0 C to 400 0 C e Process value PV scaling upper limit value of Scaling setting in Application Setting 100 e Process value PV scaling lower limit value of Scaling setting in Application Setting 0 100 0 x 3600 2000 4000 2000 CH1 Process value PV scaling value Un G412 93 333 93 All decimal places are rounded off to an integer Setting method 1 Set Enable or Disable for Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Scaling setting gt Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting Set Process value scaling upper limit value 2 Set P lue PV li limit value Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Scaling setting gt Process value PV scaling upper limit value 3 Set Process value PV scaling lower limit value XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Scaling setting gt Process value PV scaling lower limit value Point e Even though the lower limit value has been set to be equal to or larger than the upper limit value in the above settings an error does not occur Scaling is executed
370. oling and water cooling roughly indicate the level of the cooling ability When a device is too cooled even though air cooling has been selected set Water cooling 1H When a device is less likely to be cooled even though water cooling has been selected set Air cooling OH e Generally the ability of water cooling is higher than that of air cooling and cooling may be too strong when the same PID constants as the one for air cooling are used for water cooling It takes time until the control becomes stable upon the first start up disturbance or setting change Therefore the auto tuning calculates PID constants so that the PID constants of when Water cooling 1H is set become larger than the ones of when Air cooling OH is set 1 FUNCTIONS 1 8 Cooling Method Setting Function 1 9 Temperature Conversion Function Using Unused Channels In the heating cooling control normal mode mix control normal mode or position proportional control normal mode only the temperature measurement can be executed using unused temperature input terminals When this function is used the temperature control and alert judgment are not executed inals that can be used Temperature input terminals that can be used for this function differ depending on the control mode to be selected Use the MT20 Monitor CH2 MT30 Monitor CH3 and MT40 Monitor CH4 terminals in the following table
371. ollowing figure shows the timing of turning on off of this flag to CH1 Feed forward value memory read command Un G441 For CH1 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 CH1 Read completion flag Un G46 b0 CH1 Read failure flag OFF Un G46 b8 Kw Read completion Read failure Read completion CH1 Read failure flag Un G48 b8 turns off after reading of data in the channel 1 is completed successfully When reading of data from the memory has failed CH1 Read failure flag Un G48 b8 turns on and the temperature control module operates with the feed forward value before reading of data The LED status remains APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 209 Set the interrupt factor mask to be used 0 Mask interrupt not used 1 Clear mask interrupt used Change the setting of Interrupt factor mask n Un G124 to Un G139 to Clear mask interrupt used 1 When an interrupt factor occurs an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module The setting value of 2 or larger is handled as Clear mask interrupt used 1 n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Interrupt factor mask n 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 Interrupt factor mask n in 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041
372. ollowing shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward control forced start status 415 615 815 1015 CHO Feed forward control forced start status in the Q compatible mode 1450 1451 1452 1453 CH1 Feed ard value tuning flag The feed forward value tuning status can be checked in this area When CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 is set to No automatic setting 0 all bits of this flag turn off 0 Off e 1 On b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b2 bi bO 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SO 1 AA Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 bO Feed forward value change flag This bit turns on when the feed forward value is automatically set b1 Feed forward value tuning execution status This bit turns on when the feed forward value tuning starts b2 to b7 Fixed to 0 Not used b8 Feed forward value tuning error flag This bit turns on when the feed forward value after the tuning is abnormal b9 to b15 Fixed to 0 Not used Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward value tuning flag 416 616 816 1016 CHO Feed forward value tuning flag in the Q compatible mode 1454 1455 1456 1457 230 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Feed forward control READY flag When one of the following conditions is met while the action conditions of the disturbance suppression function have been A met thi
373. ommand System area 0 Control 1201 to 1215 System area 4B1H to 4BFH 1216 4COH CH2 Feed forward value memory read Feed forward System area 0 Control command value memory read command 1217 to 1231 System area 4C1H to 4CFH 1232 4D0H CH3 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Control value memory value memory value memory read command read read command command 1233 to 1247 System area E 4D1H to 4DFH 1248 4E0H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Control value memory value memory value memory read command read read command command APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 1249 to 1279 System area 4E1H to 4FFH 1280 500H All Inter module System area Monitor SS peak current suppression function state monitor 1281 501H All Inter module System area Monitor SS f peak current suppression function enable disable monitor 1282 502H All Inter module System area Monitor SSS peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor 1283 503H All Number of slave System area Monitor Se ee modules with inter module peak current suppression function enabled 1284 to 1346 All Start I O of slave System area Monitor gt 504H to 542H module with inter module peak current suppression function enabled 1347 to 1349 System area S 543H to 545H 1350 546H All
374. on When the temperature process value PV is within the loop disconnection detection dead band an alert is not output even though the loop disconnection alert conditions have been satisfied Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Loop disconnection detection setting gt Loop disconnection detection dead band Point When this function is not necessary set 0 for Loop disconnection detection dead band of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 87 1 29 Loop Disconnection Detection Function 88 1 30 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function This function detects loop disconnections during AT auto tuning A channel that does not follow the control can be detected by using this function An error channel can be detected faster than the set time in which the auto tuning ends in failure The auto tuning continues even while a loop disconnection detection alert has been issued For details on the loop disconnection detection function refer to the following K Page 86 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Point e This function is enabled even while the peak current suppression function or the simultaneous temperature rise function is being used e The loop disconnection detection dead band setting is disabled for the loop disconnection detection during AT There is no dead band Cond
375. on When the manipulated value MV is stable pulses are repeatedly output in the same cycle Ex When 700 70 has been stored in CH1 Manipulated value MV Un G403 and the value in the following buffer memory area has been set as follows e CH1 Control output cycle setting Un G504 100 100s 100s x 0 7 70 70s The ON time is 70s The transistor output is on for 70s and off for 30s per 100s Control output cycle 100s Control output cycle 100s Control output cycle 100s pi ON Manipulated value MV 70 70s Transistor output OFF Buffer memory address Manipulated value MV 70 70s The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Manipulated value MV 70 70s CHO Control output cycle setting 504 704 904 1104 CHO Control output cycle setting in the Q compatible mode 47 79 111 143 HSetting range In the R mode 0 1s cycle 1 to 100 1 to 100s 1 0 1s cycle 5 to 1000 0 5 to 100 0s In the Q compatible mode 0 1s cycle 1 to 100 1 to 100s 1 0 1s cycle 5 to 1000 0 5 to 100 0s ETwo position control The setting is ignored WEDefault value e 1s cycle 30 30s e 0 1s cycle 300 30s APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 248 CH1 H CH1 g control output cycle setting Set the pulse cycle ON OFF cycle of the transistor output The ON ti
376. on setting 916 394H CH3 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting band setting band setting 917 395H CH3 Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset System area 0 Setting amount setting amount setting amount setting 918 396H CH3 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting mode shift mode shift mode shift 919 397H CH3 MAN output MAN output MAN output System area 0 Setting setting setting setting 920 398H CH3 System area Temperature System area Temperature 0 Setting conversion conversion setting setting 921 399H CH3 System area Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting limit output limiter 922 39AH CH3 System area Cooling control System area 30 15 Setting output cycle 300 16 setting 923 39BH CH3 System area Cooling method System area 0 Setting setting 924 39CH CH3 System area Overlap dead System area 0 Setting band setting 925 39DH CH3 Derivative Derivative Derivative System area 0 Setting action selection action action selection selection 926 39EH CH3 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting time setting time setting 927 39FH CH3 System area Open close 20 Setting output neutral band setting 928 3A0H CH3
377. onal band P setting Un G431 or CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 auto tuning is not executed Input range setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Cooling upper limit output limiter of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting Output Change Amount Limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting Control output cycle setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting in Application Setting CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift Un G518 AT Bias of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting Normal Operation Reverse Operation Setting in Application Setting Auto tuning mode setting of Auto tuning setting in Application Setting Point For the system in which a temperature quickly rises set the upper limit output limiter Set a value twice as large as the manipulated value MV in a stable state as a guide After the completion of the auto tuning the output limiter can be returned to its initial value to start the control Storing the calculation values after auto tuning After the completion of the auto tuning
378. ondition 8 or 9 is satisfied Even though the internal processing of the auto tuning is completed and PID constants are stored CH1 Auto tuning status X4 does not turn off and the auto tuning is not completed Conditions in which the auto tuning ends in failure The following shows the conditions Shifting from the operation mode to the setting mode When the mode is shifted from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off the auto tuning ends in failure Note that an exception is when Continue has been set for PID continuation Flag of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Setting change during auto tuning When the following settings are changed during auto tuning the auto tuning ends in failure Target Value SV Setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Lower limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Cooling upper limit output limiter of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting Sensor Correction Value Setting in Application Setting Control output cycle setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Cooling control output cycle setting of Heating cooling control setting in Application Setting Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting in Application Setting CH1 AUTO MAN mode shift
379. onfigure the setting by the following procedure 1 Set Sensor correction function selection Un G564 to Normal sensor correction one point correction 0 5 Page 289 CH1 Sensor correction function selection 2 Seta value for CH1 Sensor correction value setting Un G565 Page 290 CH1 Sensor correction value setting Sensor two point correction function With this function an error between the temperature process value PV and the actual temperature between the two points selected in advance a correction offset value and a correction gain value is stored Based on this gradient the error between the temperature detected by a sensor and the actual temperature is corrected Configure the sensor two point correction setting in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off Set Monitor for Stop mode setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Temperature 3 process value PV After correction Before correction gt Input temperature 1 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G569 2 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G568 3 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value Un G571 4 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value Un G570 mProcedure for executing the sensor correction two point correction when using the engineering
380. ontrol panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Operating Precautions CAUTION When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction damage to the machines or accidents Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer memory are being written to the flash ROM in the module Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Disposal Precautions N CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details on battery regulations in EU member states refer to the MELSEC
381. onversion conversion setting setting 1 1121 461H CH4 System area Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting Oe Oo limit output limiter 1122 462H CH4 System area Cooling control System area 30 16 Setting OO output cycle 300 16 setting 1123 463H CH4 System area Cooling method System area 0 Setting o O O setting 1124 464H CH4 System area Overlap dead System area 0 Setting OM LO band setting 1125 465H CH4 Derivative Derivative Derivative System area 0 Setting OF Or o action selection action action selection selection 1126 466H CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting O O kO rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting time setting time setting 1127 467H CH4 System area Open close 20 Setting OHIO JO output neutral band setting 1128 468H CH4 System area Control motor 10 Setting 0O IO time 1129 469H CH4 System area Integration 1500 Setting S O Per fo output limiter setting 1130 46AH CH4 System area Valve operation 0 Setting oO O setting during CPU module STOP 1131 46BH CH4 Alert dead band Alert dead band Alert dead band Alert dead band 5 Setting oo setting setting setting setting 1132 46CH CH4 Number of alert Number of alert Number of alert Number of alert 0 Setting O Oo delay delay delay delay 1133 46D
382. or contact may cause malfunction Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable Incorrect wiring connecting the cable to an incorrect interface may cause failure of the module and external device Tighten the terminal screws or connector screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit fire or malfunction When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to preven
383. or correction one point correction OH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 289 CH1 Sensor correction value setting Set the correction value used when there is an error between a measured temperature and the actual temperature For details on the sensor correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor correction value setting 565 765 965 1165 CHO Sensor correction value setting in the Q compatible mode 45 77 109 141 ESetting range e In the R mode Full scale of the input range to Full scale of the input range C F The setting range depends on the setting of CH1 Input range Un G501 In the Q compatible mode Set a value within the range of 5000 to 5000 50 00 to 50 00 to the full scale of the set input range Setting unit in the R mode The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Enabling the settings This setting is enabled when CH1 Sensor correction function selection Un G564 has been set to Normal sensor correction one point correction 0 Default value The defau
384. or output MEE lanipulated value for heating MVh For details on this area refer to the following lt gt Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value MV Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh 403 603 803 1003 CHO Manipulated value for heating MVh in the Q compatible mode 13 14 15 16 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 221 For details on this area refer to the following lt gt Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value MV Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc 408 608 808 1008 CHO Manipulated value for cooling MVc in the Q compatible mode 704 705 706 707 Temperature rise judgment flag This flag is for checking whether the temperature process value PV is within the temperature rise completion range or not One of the following values is stored in this area e 0 Out of the temperature rise completion range e 1 Within the temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV stays within the temperature rise completion range during the set temperature rise completion soak time Within temperature rise completion range 1 is stored in this buffer memory area Temperature process value PV A Temperature rise 1 completion range Set
385. orm and are set in the buffer memory CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO is turned on When a control response is good CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 bO keeps off and the PID constants are not changed 5 Page 226 CH1 Self tuning flag CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off Page 150 Auto tuning status Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Control start Se gt Time Response measurement evaluation Self tuning in execution ON CH1 PID auto correction status Un G411 b0 OFF Only when PID constants were changed gt i PID constants Before change Only for poor response gt X After change 7 gt CH1 Auto tuning status i OFF Conditions for execution Starting ST is executed under the following conditions e When the mode is shifted from the setting mode to the operation mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned off and on for the first time after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cleared When the mode is shifted from the setting mode to the operation mode for the second time or later after the power is turned off and on or after the CPU module is reset and the reset is cleared only when the temperature process value PV has been stable for two minutes or longer before the mode is shifted e When the set value SV is changed only when the temperature process value
386. orward control forced start READY flag Un G418 on CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 is set to Feed forward control forced start 1 Startup condition of the set value SV restoration adjustment The deviation E exceeds the disturbance judgment position 414 1 FUNCTIONS 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function Normal completion conditions When the following conditions are satisfied the following control or function is completed successfully and the control shifts to the PID control Normal completion conditions of the feed forward control A bottom has been detected The integral time has passed under the condition in which no disturbance has been detected at the disturbance judgment position Normal completion condition of the set value SV restoration adjustment The deviation E at the start of the disturbance suppression is 1 or lower of the maximum deviation or the temperature process value PV has reached the set value SV e The deviation E is within the disturbance judgment position and the temperature process value PV is judged to be stable enough Stop conditions When the operating conditions are not satisfied or one of the following conditions is satisfied the operation is stopped Stop condition for only the feed forward control e CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal Un G559 has been set to Feed forward control forced start 1 the temperature pr
387. ory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Output variation amount limiter 510 710 910 1110 CHO Output variation amount limiter in the Q compatible mode 44 76 108 140 Setting range The setting range is 0 or 1 to 1000 0 1 to 100 0 s When 0 is set the output variation amount is not regulated When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas When CH1 Output variation amount limiter Un G510 has been set to 10 1 0 s and the sampling cycle is 500ms an output value changes by 0 5 per 500ms When the sampling cycle is 250ms an output value changes by 0 2 or 0 3 per 250ms Thus even though the manipulated value MV rapidly changes by 50 the variation amount is regulated to 1 s It takes 50s until the output actually changes by 50 1 1 1 1 I i Manipulated 1 il eo S 100 value MV T Ss 1 i 1 i increased aa as 50 i Soe EEEE by 50 TOON 1 1 aa i 50 4 Penns O ee eerorenre re i 0 5 EPT i 1 1 i 500ms h u mE 1 i E j i i S 4 0 Pz lt SEET f Ps cee Set value SV 1 When CH1 Output variation amount limiter Un G510 has been set to 10 1 0 s APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 253 HTwo position control The setting is ignored Manual control The setting is enabled At the execution
388. ous temperature rise function 0 0 0 0 eae 108 1 34 Proportional Band Setting Function 0 c ccc eee e een eee 110 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function 00 00 e eee 111 1 36 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 0 c ccc e eee een eee 117 1 37 Overshoot Suppression Function 0 000 eee eee eee eee 119 1 38 Error History FUNCION iii idee ee ea dace ere ia ti ania dia Meme eee ww ae armor 120 1 39 Event History Function 0 0 0 02 cece ee ee eee eee teeta 123 1 40 Interrupt FUMCtiOny 22 ice gece cissigcece cece alieceigie aiian EEDE E E EENE EDE RENE Ea gua RORE lee ele doe ere 124 1 41 Q Compatible Mode Function 0 cccseieessec eee nie bie aie ene ee eee ei Re e ean ie ae 127 CHAPTER 2 PARAMETER SETTING 128 2 1 Basic Setting 24 usss4 sceeed id an parta tetan piededdeeedde wie aeded ees weneeeeteeedddwlnae d 128 2 2 Application Seting sese aisa tm terns ein tiny Sea cnc ea E E tsa a acne it end finda ead and ERE RE IER E aA E aes 129 2 3 CT SQtein goerie rase ati ea EEEE A E EEEE E E EE E esa law ncaa EE 130 2 4 Interrupt Settings cc snr ee ciecaie rescence we secu ae ninn Eea EEEE EAE EOE ESEA E Ea ESE 131 2 5 Refresh Settings riore draiepeiecciac kepi dow gate e evens a E E a EOE ka 132 Refresh processing Me prerie si0dccrcageedeedaddgigavete had dea E E a T E a 133 CHAPTER3 TROUBLESHOOTING 134 3 1 Checks Using LEDS irei5 dis aes ecis cs sttesccsa gon eens tna ia E E E E E wi oa meee
389. output flag in the Q compatible mode 21 22 23 24 HRelation with ON delay output flag The following figure shows the relation between Transistor output flag and ON delay output flag LON Transistor output flag 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 ON 1 l 1 1 l 1 1 ON delay 4 output flag 1 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G307 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting Un G307 allows users to configure the setting considering the delay time response delay scan time delay of actual transistor outputs Page 216 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting This flag can be used for the program that judges a disconnection of transistor output by monitoring ON delay output flag and inputs from external sensors For details on the ON delay output function refer to the following K Page 65 ON Delay Output Function CH1 Heating transistor output flag For details on this area refer to the following K5 Page 223 CH1 Transistor output flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Heating transistor output flag 405 605 805 1005 CHO Heating transistor output flag in the Q compatible mode 21 22 23 24 1 In GX Works3 CHO Transistor output flag is displayed as the sample comment of CHO Heating transistor output flag APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 223 e transistor outpu
390. perature process value PV A rh a Set value SV pt ae ne Se w o be Ed gt Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV A o i s Alert set value zt ron L ok r IS nnn T gt Time i i sy ao Alert set value E 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 at 1 i i EO Se cee i Alert status Non alert status Alert status Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value The setting range of the alert set value is 0 to the full scale of the input range Page 68 Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter HWithin range alert When the following condition is satisfied the system issues an alert e Alert set value lt Deviation E lt Alert set value Temperature process value PV A Pi Ra a N Set value SV pt ae Te a KA ra gt Time Deviation E Temperature process value PV set value SV A Alert set value if a i oe Ope ee o Se a gt Time s Z 1 1 s r Alert set value r r z i i rss i i E Soragna i Alert status Non alert status Alert status Depending on the set alert mode this value becomes the set value or the monitored value The setting range of the alert set value is 0 to the full scale of the input range Page 68 Setting the s
391. pling cycle selection 301 Default value The default value is 500ms 4 channels 0 A set value discrepancy error sampling cycle error code 1930H occurs right after the sampling cycle change To clear the error turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and register the parameter after the change in the non volatile memory APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 21 3 c setting at input range change When the setting of CH1 Input range Un G501 was changed this function automatically changes data in the related buffer memory areas to prevent the occurrence of a set value discrepancy error error code 1950H 0 Disable e 1 Enable When Enable 1 has been set the following buffer memory areas are automatically set or initialized when the setting of CH1 Input range Un G501 is changed CH1 Set value SV setting 430 0 CH1 Proportional band P setting 431 30 CH1 Alert set value 1 to CH1 Alert set value 4 434 to 437 0 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 439 30 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 511 Upper limit value of the input range CH1 Lower limit setting limiter 512 Lower limit value of the input range CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise 513 0 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop 514 0 CH1 Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 516 5 CH1 Overlap dead band set
392. ponse to the change of the set value SV have been set the response to the disturbance degrades Conversely when PID constants to improve the response to the disturbance have been set the response to the change of the set value SV degrades In the two degree of freedom PID control a manipulated value MV is determined considering a set value SV and variation amount In the two degree of freedom PID control the response to the change of the set value SV and the response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other Added function for two degree of freedom PID control Object to be controlled i Disturbance D Set value e i Dios ots 1 F A Li O gt kp 1 m SV i ae re Manipulated 6 D value MV Ke Tp Ss gt 1 1 nTp s Temperature process value PV The appropriate setting of a B and y in the above figure can achieve the optimum control However required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be automatically set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of freedom PID control Therefore the temperature control module operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters have been simplified APPENDICES Appendix 4 PID 31 1 PID operation The temperature control module can execute the process value inexact differential PID control Operat
393. pression function multiple module 1AE1H Peak current When the inter module peak current suppression When using the inter module peak current suppression suppression function function has been enabled no module has been setas function set only one of the modules to which the master not exist master module inter module peak current suppression function has been error between e After the inter module peak current suppression enabled as the master module and turn on the power multiple module function was initialized the slave temperature control supply again or reset the CPU module Page 106 modules cannot receive data from the master Inter module peak current suppression function temperature control module 1AE2H Peak current After the inter module peak current suppression function Check that each module has been properly connected suppression function was started Y1 was turned on an abnormal response and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU master has been detected in the data communication between module communication error the master temperature control module and the slave between multiple temperature control modules module 1AE3H Peak current After the inter module peak current suppression function Check that each module has been properly connected suppression function was started Y1 was turned on the slave temperature and turn on the power supply again or reset the CPU slave reception error control modules
394. process value is judged every rate alarm alert detection cycle with the following formulas Present value of the temperature process value PV Last value of the temperature process value PV gt Rate alarm upper limit value A rate alarm upper limit alert occurs e Present value of the temperature process value PV Last value of the temperature process value PV lt Rate alarm lower limit value A rate alarm lower limit alert occurs Checking the occurrence of an alert While a rate alarm has occurred CH1 Alert flag XC turns on and the ALM LED turns on In CH1 Alert definition Un G401 whether an upper limit alert or a lower limit alert has occurred can be checked Page 219 CH1 Alert definition Point P When an error that makes the ALM LED flash such as a loop disconnection has occurred the ALM LED flashes 1 FUNCTIONS 77 1 26 Rate Alarm Function 78 Checking that the alert has been cleared When the temperature process value PV has returned to within the setting range CH1 Rate alarm upper limit Un G401 b4 or CH1 Rate alarm lower limit Un G401 b5 turns off In addition CH1 Alert flag XC turns off and the ALM LED turns off Point For CH1 Alert flag XC and the ALM LED the alert is not cleared when an alert other than rate alarms has occurred Temperature Rate alarm process detection value PV Temperature period process value PV gt
395. program does not properly operate In the Q compatible mode a program that uses FBs and labels cannot be created When using FBs and labels create a program in the R mode Setting method 1 When adding a new module select a module whose name has Q after its module model name SZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click gt Add New Module 2 Set parameters in the same way as in the R mode 3 Write the parameters to the CPU module and restart the module ENA While the module is running the mode cannot be shifted between the R mode and Q compatible mode 1 FUNCTIONS 1 41 Q Compatible Mode Function 1 27 2 PARAMETER SETTING Set the parameters of each channel Setting parameters eliminates the need of a program for setting parameters 2 1 Setting method Basic Setting Configure the settings in Base Setting of the engineering tool 1 Start parameters T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting Setting Item List Input the Setting item to Search Setting Item E HOLD CLEAR setting h Automatic setting at input range change Bb Setting change rate limiter setting Control output cycle unit selection setting f Moving averaging process setting E Application Setting CT setting i Interupt setting f Refresh Automatic setting at input
396. pulated value MV varies within the range of 5 0 to 105 0 The following shows the difference of the actions depending on the proportional gain Kp Condition Proportional action When the proportional gain Kp is small A control action slows down When the proportional gain Kp is large A control action becomes fast However the temperature process value PV tends to fluctuate around the set value The following figure shows an integral action of step responses of when the deviation E is a fixed value Deviation E le i Oo gt Time Manipulated t value MV ti t gt Time Offset The certain amount of an error between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV is called an offset remaining deviation In a proportional action an offset remaining deviation is generated Set value t Offset Set value Offset SV SV Temperature process value PV Ne cect process value PV gt Time gt Time APPENDICES 31 4 Appendix 4 PID Integral action I action An integral action that continuously changes the manipulated value MV to eliminate the deviation E when there is any The A offset caused by a proportional action can be eliminated In an integral action the time taken for the manipulated value MV of the integral action after the generation of the deviation E to become the manipulated value MV of a proportional action is called integral time
397. put flag transistor output flag 406 196H CH1 Set value SV monitor 0 Monitor ita TC 407 197H CH1 Manipulated Manipulated value for heating System area 0 Monitor 0 value MV for MVh for output with another output with analog module another analog module 408 198H CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling System area 0 Monitor Seen PO MVc 409 199H CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling System area 0 Monitor oO MVc for output with another analog module 410 19AH CH1 System area Cooling transistor output flag Close side 0 Monitor 0 transistor output flag 411 19BH CH1 Self tuning flag System area 0 Monitor Oo 412 19CH CH1 Process value PV scaling value 0 Monitor 1 413 19DH CH1 ATsimultaneous System area 0 Monitor temperature rise parameter calculation flag 414 19EH CH1 Simultaneous System area 0 Monitor eet esl enc EE temperature rise status 415 19FH CH1 Feed forward control forced start status System area 0 Monitor call a lineal 416 1A0H CH1 Feed forward value tuning flag System area 0 Monitor N rA EE 417 1A1H CH1 Feed forward control READY flag System area 0 Monitor e 418 1A2H CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag System area 0 Monitor S 10 419 1A3H CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor Se VO 420 1A4H CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor SS se O 421 t
398. r rate limiter rate limiter setting variation setting variation setting variation setting variation rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature rise rise 25 rise rise 29 APPENDICES 174 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 1114 45AH CH4 Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting o D rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter rate limiter temperature temperature temperature temperature drop drop 35 drop drop 1115 45BH CH4 Direct reverse System area Direct reverse Direct reverse 1 Setting Or Op p action setting action setting action setting 1116 45CH CH4 Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment 5 Setting o Os pe sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead sensitivity dead band setting band setting band setting band setting 1117 45DH CH4 Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset System area 0 Setting Or Poo amount setting amount setting amount setting 1118 45EH CH4 AUTO MAN AUTO MAN AUTO MAN System area 0 Setting Ou Oo mode shift mode shift mode shift 1119 45FH CH4 MAN output MAN output MAN output System area 0 Setting o O setting setting setting 1120 460H CH4 System area Temperature System area Temperature 0 Setting Orr Ox Sr c
399. r a load disconnection and externally operable device failure Has b14 of CHO Alert definition turned on 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 1 Checks Using LEDs 1 35 3 2 Checking the Module Status An error code of the temperature control module can be checked in the Module Diagnostics window of the engineering tool XZ Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Right click on the module to be checked gt Module Diagnostics Check whether the terminal block or the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is not disconnected Cycle the power supply If the error occurs again the possible cause is a failure of the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the An alarm code error history and alarm history can be checked in the Event History window of the engineering tool XD Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Event History button Number ofEvers235 i Rene 7 Refine Match All the Conditions Match Any One of the Conditions 7 including Next Occurrence Date Event Type Status Event Code 2015 07 02 18 52 58 410 A 03001 Hardware error 2015 07 02 18 52 43 822 24101 Operating status change STOP 2015 07 02 18 52 39 910 00804 CH4 Process value PV out of input 2015 07 02 18 52 39 910 00803 CH3 Process value PV out of input 2015 07 02 18 52 3
400. r analog cooling MVc for output with another module analog module to control methods The following table shows the parameters related to each control method Input range setting Thermocouple 1 to 4 11 to 28 36 to 52 100 to 117 130 to 132 201 to 205 e Platinum resistance thermometer 5 to 8 53 54 140 to 143 201 to 205 Set value SV setting Set a value within the temperature measuring range of the set input range Proportional band P setting Cooling proportional band Pc setting in the Q compatible mode Fix the setting to 0 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 Integral time I setting in the Q compatible mode A set value is ignored Fix the setting to 0 1 to 3600 s Derivative time D setting in the Q compatible mode A set value is ignored Fix the setting to 0 1 to 3600 s Fix the setting to 0 1 to 3600 s Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting Hin the R mode 0 to Full scale C F Hin the Q compatible mode 0 to 10000 0 0 to 1000 0 A set value is ignored Upper limit output limiter lower limit output limiter standard control only A set value is ignored 50 to 1050 5 0 to 105 0 Upper limit output limiter cooling upper limit output limiter heating cooling control only A set value is ignored 0 to 1050 0 0 to 105 0 Output variation amount limiter A set value is ignore
401. r example heating is controlled by simply turning off the cooling BHeating cooling control The control method is both heating and cooling To heat up the target subject its heating mean is turned on and its cooling mean is turned off To cool down the target subject its heating mean is turned off and its cooling mean is turned on HPosition proportional control The control method is either one of heating reverse action or cooling direct action Fluid flow is controlled with an electric operated valve and the process amount of such as temperature is controlled 1 FUNCTIONS 1 1 Control Mode Selection Function 13 14 ble control mode A control mode can be selected from the following seven modes Select a control mode in Control mode selection of Base Setting Standard control Executes the standard control of four channels Standard control 4 loops Heating cooling control normal mode Executes the heating cooling control CH3 and CH4 cannot be used Heating cooling control 2 loops Heating cooling control expanded mode Executes the heating cooling control The number of loops is expanded Heating cooling control 4 loops using an output module and others in the system Mix control normal mode Executes the standard control and the heating cooling control CH2 e Standard control 2 loops cannot be used e Heating cooling control 1 loops Mix control expanded mode Executes the standard control and the
402. r limit value value 1152 480H CH4 Peak current System area System area System area 0 Setting O 0 0 suppression control group setting 1153 481H CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O JIO JO temperature rise temperature rise group setting group setting 1154 482H CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting OHO temperature rise temperature rise gradient data gradient data 1155 483H CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O Q temperature rise temperature rise dead time dead time 1156 484H CH4 Simultaneous System area Simultaneous System area 0 Setting O temperature rise temperature rise AT mode AT mode selection selection APPENDICES 176 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 1157 485H CH4 Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance System area 0 Setting O O O judgment judgment judgment position position gt position 1158 486H CH4 Set value return Set value return Set value return System area 0 Setting O IO adjustment adjustment adjustment 1159 487H CH4 Feed forward Feed forward Feed forward System area 0 Setting O control forced control forced control forced starting signal starting signal starting signal 1160 488H CH4 Feed forw
403. r memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Loop disconnection detection dead band 538 738 938 1138 CHO Loop disconnection detection dead band in the Q compatible mode 60 92 124 156 Setting range Input range When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas e CH1 Input range Un G501 38 Resolution 0 1 e CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band Un G538 50 Loop disconnection detection dead band setting value x Resolution 50 x 0 1 5 0 C Within the range of the set value SV 5 0 C the loop disconnection detection judgment is not executed Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Default value The default value is 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 271 Rat alarm alert output enable disable setting Set whether to enable or disable alert output of rate alarms For details on rate alarms refer to the following K Page 77 Rate Alarm Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting 539 739 939 1139 CHO Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting in the Q compatible mode 201 217 233 249 ESetting range 0 Enable
404. r reset request n7 0 Control pe i BF8H to CO7H 3080 to 3095 System area St rae e I CO8H to C17H 3096 to 3111 All Interrupt factor generation setting n 0 Control C18H to C27H 3112 to 3127 System area p e een I es C28H to C37H 3128 to 3143 All Condition target setting n 7 0 Setting lo C38H to C47H 3144 to 3159 System area So st es le C48H to C57H 3160 to 3175 All Condition target channel setting n 7 0 Setting lo C58H to C67H 3176 or later System area C68H or later Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Heating cooling control expanded mode 2 When Heating cooling control normal mode 1 is set this area becomes a system area 2 Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Heating cooling control normal mode 1 When Heating cooling control expanded mode 2 is set this area becomes a system area 3 Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Mix control expanded mode 4 When Mix control normal mode 3 is set this area becomes a system area 4 Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Mix control normal mode 3 When Mix cont
405. ram gt Executed by the temperature control module Set CH1 Disturbance judgment position Un G557 and set CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 to Automatic setting 1 When the temperature process value PV is out of the disturbance judgment position the function automatically sets the feed forward value After the automatic setting CH1 Feed forward value change flag Un G416 bO turns on Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Feed forward value tuning selection 561 761 961 1161 CHO Feed forward value tuning selection in the Q compatible mode 1048 1064 1080 1096 Setting range e 0 No automatic setting e 1 Automatic setting Point When No automatic setting 0 is set manually set CH1 Feed forward value Un G560 Default value The default value is No automatic setting 0 APPENDICES 287 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Overshoot suppression level setting Overshoots at the startup and the set value SV change are suppressed Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Overshoot suppression level setting 562 762 962 1162 CHO Overshoot suppression level setting in the Q compatible mode 1050 1066 1082 1098 ESetting range The setting range is 0 to 4
406. rameter after the change in the non volatile memory e A set value discrepancy error sampling cycle error code 1930H occurs right after the sampling cycle change To clear the error turn off and on Setting value backup command Y8 and register the parameter after the change in the non volatile memory Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Sampling cycle and function extension setting in the Q compatible mode 1024 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 309 Appendix 4 PID This section describes PID PID control This section describes the PID control of the temperature control module PID control system The following figure shows a system for executing the PID control Temperature control module Set value Set value data SV storage area PID operation Manipulated lue MV i Temperature value MV Manipulated value data Temperature protes storage area x value PV process value data storage area Controlled object Temperature sensor PID control procedure The PID control is executed in the following procedure p Read the temperature process value PV 7 Import a signal from the temperature sensor and write it to the temperature process value data storage area as a temperature process value PV yY Perform PID operation Perform PID operation using the Set value SV temperature
407. range change Automatic setting at input range change E Setting change rate limiter setting Setting change rate limiter setting E Control output cycle unit selection setting Control output cycle unit selection setting E Moving averaging process setting Moving averaging process setting E Multiple module interaction function CH1 CH2 CH3 Isetthe output of the CPU stop error O CLEAR 0 CLEAR O CLEAR I set the control mode 0 Standard Control Select the automatic setting at input range change O Disable 0 Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Batch Setting Set the unit of the control output cycle 0 1s units You can set the moving average processing 0 Enable Set the multiple module interaction function Peak current suppression function enable disable 0 Disable Peak current suppression function master slave s 0 Slave Simultaneous temperature rise function enable dis 0 Disable Simultaneous temperature rise function master slz 0 Slave Explanation set the output of the CPU stop error a 2 Double click the item to change the setting and enter a setting value Items where a value is selected from a drop down list Clicking the V button of the item to be set displays the drop down list Select the item e Items where a value is entered into a text box Double click the item to be set and enter a value 2 PARAMETER SETTING 2 1 Basic Setting 128 2 2 Application Setting t
408. rbance Suppression Function e 0 Off e 1 On Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward control forced start READY flag 418 618 818 1018 CHO Feed forward control forced start READY flag in the Q compatible mode 1462 1463 1464 1465 Turning off CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag Un G418 At the following timing CH1 Feed forward control forced start READY flag Un G418 turns off e At power on e During the disturbance suppression e When the action conditions of the disturbance suppression function have not been satisfied e When the temperature process value PV has responded in a reverse direction of the disturbance judgment position and goes outside the disturbance judgment width When the setting of CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 is changed from No automatic setting 0 to Automatic setting 1 The tuning is executed on the disturbance after the change CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion When the latch of the sensor two point correction offset value is completed Latch completed 1 is stored in this area When CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un G566 is set to No request 0 No request 0 is stored in this area For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory
409. re A process value PV When the primary delay digital filter is not set 1 gt Time Temperature A i process value PV i When the primary delay i digital filter is set i i 1 gt Time T 1 1 Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting in Application Setting Setting method Configure the setting as follows XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting Ex The following shows the temperature of when 3 3s has been set for Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting in Application Setting and the temperature process value PV is changed from 250 0 C to 260 0 C Temperature input value Measured temperature value PV 262 0 260 0 258 0 256 0 254 0 252 0 Temperature input value C 250 0 Elapsed time s The temperature reaches 256 3 C that is 63 3 of the temperature process value PV in three seconds after the temperature input value has reached 250 0 C 62 1 FUNCTIONS 1 20 Primary Delay Digital Filter 1 21 Moving Average Processing Moving average processing can be set to a temperature process value PV With this function the fluctuation of the temperature process value PV can be reduced in an electrically noisy environment or in the environment where the temperature process value PV fluctuates greatly To hasten the response of the temper
410. re control or not to execute the cold junction temperature compensation Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Cold junction temperature compensation selection 309 Cold junction temperature compensation selection in the Q compatible mode 182 Settable modules e R60TCTRT2TT2 e R60TCTRT2TT2BW Setting range e 0 Use standard terminal block e 1 Use terminal block converter module for temperature control e 2 Do not use cold junction temperature compensation Default value The default value is Use standard terminal block 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 21 T CH1 Decimal point position Depending on the setting of CH1 Input range Un G501 the decimal point position applicable in the following buffer memory areas is stored in this area CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 CH1 Set value SV setting Un G430 CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 in the R mode CH1 Alert set value 1 Un G434 CH1 Alert set value 2 Un G435 CH1 Alert set value 3 Un G436 CH1 Alert set value 4 Un G437 CH1 Cooling proportional band Pc setting Un G439 in the R mode CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Un G511 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Un G512 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter setting variation rate limiter temperature rise Un G513 in the R mode CH1 Setting variation rate limiter temperature drop Un G514
411. re control module operates as follows Operation of the temperature control module CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns on The normal auto tuning is executed and the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated 1 2 A calculation value is stored in the buffer memory when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been properly calculated CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion Un G413 bO is turned on After the auto tuning is completed CH1 Auto tuning status X4 turns off and the module is shifted to the PID control ON CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 OFF 5 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 Auto tuning Control status PID control CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise fe gradient data Un G554 Pi V Calculated and CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise A 0 value dead time Un G555 N ON CH1 AT simultaneous temperature rise parameter calculation completion OFF Un G413 b0 gt Executed in a program Trema gt Executed by the temperature control module Conditions to execute the simultaneous temperature rise AT When all of the following conditions are satisfied after the operations are executed the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated The PID control has been set All of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D are not 0 The temperature pro
412. reas as follows according to the specifications of the current sensor CT to be used Products of CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 Setting not required The production has U R D Co LTD OTL 6 P CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 Setting not required stopped but these products can be used CTL 6 P H CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 Setting not required CTL 12 S36 10 CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 Set 1000 which is the number of second winding turns CTL 12 S56 10 CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 Set 1000 which is the number of second winding turns Other current sensors CT CT ratio setting 0 0 to 100 0A 2 Set the number of second winding turns Current sensors CT depending on the specifications of the whose number of second current sensor CT used winding turns is 600 to 9999 can be used e When using the CTL 12 L 8 current sensor CT set CTL 12 S36 8 0 0 to 100 0A 0 e When using the CTL 6 S H current sensor CT set CTL 6 P H 0 00 to 20 00A 1 Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Occurrence of a write data error When a value out of the setting value is set an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs Error flag X2 turns on and the error code is stored in Latest error code in the Q compatible m
413. reduced The R6EOTCTRT2TT2BW and R60TCRT4BW detect heater disconnections by measuring a heater current Thus an accidental alert may be issued due to the voltage fluctuation caused when a heater voltage drops The heater disconnection correction function corrects the amount of the heater current reduced heater disconnection correction preventing the disconnections from being detected Calculation formula for heater disconnection correction Calculate CHO Heater current value Reference heater current value The largest positive value is used as the correction value When there is no positive value the value with the smallest gap is the correction value The heater current of each channel is corrected using a correction value When the corrected value is larger than the heater disconnection alert setting value a heater disconnection is detected Ex When Heater disconnection alert setting of Heater disconnection detection setting in Application Setting is 80 and the differences between CHO Heater current value and the reference heater current value are the following values e CH1 2 CH2 5 CH3 1 e CH4 17 The following table shows the result CH1 80 2 5 7 2 5 None CH2 5 0 5 5 None CH3 1 6 1 5 None CH4 17 22 17 5 Detected The correction value is 5 and the heater disconnection detection judgment is executed on the
414. request When Interrupt factor generation setting n Un G200 to Un G215 is Interrupt reissue request 0 and an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module again When Interrupt factor generation setting n Un G200 to Un G215 is No interrupt reissue request 1 and an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected no interrupt request is sent to the CPU module e To send an interrupt request to the CPU module set Interrupt factor reset request n Un G156 to Un G171 to Reset request 1 and Interrupt factor detection flag n Un G5 to Un G20 to No interrupt factor 0 When a value other than the above has been set an interrupt factor generation setting error error code 180 AH occurs n indicates an interrupt setting number n 1 to 16 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Interrupt factor generation 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 setting n Interrupt factor generation 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 setting n in the Q compatible mode Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1
415. rol expanded mode 4 is set this area becomes a system area 5 Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Position proportional control expanded mode 6 When Position proportional control normal mode 5 is set this area becomes a system area 6 Enabled only when Control mode selection in the Q compatible mode Un G1025 has been set to Position proportional control normal mode 5 When Position proportional control expanded mode 6 is set this area becomes a system area 7 n in this table indicates an interrupt setting value n 1 to 16 8 This value is displayed only in the master module of the inter module simultaneous temperature rise function When multiple master modules have been set 0 is stored in this area 9 This value is displayed only in the master module of the inter module peak current suppression function When multiple master modules have been set 0 is stored in this area 10 This setting differs depending on whether Setting variation rate limiter setting in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b1 is set to Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop 1 11 Enabled only when the R60TCTRT2TT2BW or R60TCRT4BW is used 12 This setting is for switching the output range of another module s analog output 13 Enabled only when the R60TCRT4 or R60TCRT4BW is used 14 Can be changed only in the setting mode 15 Enabled only when Setting v
416. rol forced start stop 0 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 285 41 Feed forward value Set the value to be added to the manipulated value MV in the feed forward control FF value is added Process value PV Set value SV n ar rere Manipulated value MV lt ple ole gt PID control FF control PID control Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward value 560 760 960 1160 CHO Feed forward value in the Q compatible mode 1047 1063 1079 1095 Setting range The setting range is 1000 to 1000 100 0 to 100 0 Default value The default value is O 0 0 286 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Set whether to execute the tuning of the feed forward value automatically or manually when the disturbance suppression function operates for the first time or when the set value SV or PID constants are changed When the control response after the tuning result is not satisfactory turn off and on Feed forward value tuning selection to generate a disturbance and execute the tuning again ON CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 OFF Disturbance detection ON CH1 Feed forward value tuning status Un G416 b1 OFF CH1 Feed forward value change flag Un G416 b0 OFF Executed in a prog
417. roportional band P setting or Heating proportional band Ph setting the auto tuning cannot be executed 5 Page 39 Conditions in which the auto tuning cannot be executed e When Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off and the mode shifts to the setting mode during the auto tuning the auto tuning stops After that even though Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and the mode shifts back to the operation mode the auto tuning does not restart To restart the auto tuning turn off this command and turn it on again For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K Page 34 Auto Tuning Function MDevice No The following shows the device number of this output signal Auto tuning command Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 APPENDICES Appendix 2 I O Signal 1 55 Setting value backup command Use this signal to write the data in the buffer memory to the non volatile memory Turning off and on this command starts the data writing to the non volatile memory For the buffer memory areas whose data is to be backed up refer to the following lt Page 158 List of buffer memory addresses When the data writing to the non volatile memory has been completed successfully Setting value backup completion flag X8 turns on When the data writing to the non volatile memory has not been completed successfully Setting value backup failure flag XA turns on When Setting value backup failure flag XA has tur
418. roportional control setting in Application Setting for controlling external outputs Depending on an output element failure or an internal circuit failure an abnormal output may occur Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 HOLD CLEAR Function 23 Setting method Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt HOLD CLEAR setting 24 1 FUNCTIONS 1 5 HOLD CLEAR Function 1 6 Overlap dead Band Function In the heating cooling control the temperature process value PV significantly changes due to a slight heating or cooling control output when the heat produced by a controlled object and natural cooling are being balanced Consequently an excessive output may be executed The temperature where the cooling control output starts can be shifted using this function therefore whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is prioritized can be selected Overlap The overlap refers to the temperature area where both of heating control and cooling control are executed In the temperature area where both heating and cooling output overlap both of the outputs negate each other Thus the control gain becomes moderate Consequently the variation amount in the temperature process value PV for the output becomes small improving control stability
419. rupt setting window Item Description Condition target setting Select a target factor to detect interrupts Condition target channel setting When the condition target to detect interrupts has been set to channels select a target channel Interrupt factor generation setting Configure the interrupt request setting for when an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected Interrupt pointer Specify an interrupt pointer number to start when an interrupt factor is detected Condition target setting Select a condition target factor to detect interrupts For details on the detection factors refer to the following K Page 211 Condition target setting n Condition target channel setting When the condition target to detect interrupts has been set to channels select a target channel For details on the setting refer to the following K Page 212 Condition target channel setting n interrupt factor generation setting Configure the interrupt request setting for when an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected e When Interrupt reissue request has been set and an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected an interrupt request is sent to the CPU module again When No interrupt reissue request has been set and an interrupt factor occurs while the same interrupt factor has been detected no interrupt request is sent to the CPU module
420. s Example 1 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Group 4 Example 2 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Not divided CH4 Group 4 The following figure shows the relation between each group and the value of Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Divided into j p 4 groups v v 25 25 25 25 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Divided into p p 4 groups y va 25 25 25 25 CH1 CH2 CH4 100 In case of default value applied CH3 In Example 2 the maximum number of groups is four therefore the timing is divided into four parts Because no channel has been set for Group 3 no channel starts transistor output at the timing of Group 3 92 1 FUNCTIONS 1 31 Peak Current Suppression Function When the timing is divided into three parts The following table shows two examples Example 1 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Group 2 CH4 Group 3 Example 2 CH1 Group 1 CH2 Group 2 CH3 Group 3 CH4 Not divided The following figure shows the relation between each group and the value of Upper limit output limiter of Limiter setting in Application Setting Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Divided into p j 3 groups re ve 33 3 33 3 33 3 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Divided into p p 3 groups y v 33 3 33 3 33
421. s an operation method in which the temperature process value PV is used as a derivative term in a PID operation No deviation is used for the derivative term drastic output changes due to a derivative action can be reduced when the deviation varies along with a set value change APPENDICES 31 2 Appendix 4 PID Actions of the temperature control module The temperature control module executes PID operations with direct actions and reverse actions Direct action In a direct action the manipulated value MV increases when the temperature process value PV is larger than the set value SV A direct action is used for cooling control Manipulated value MV gt Process value PV Reverse action In a reverse action the manipulated value MV increases when the temperature process value PV is smaller than the set value SV A reverse action is used for heating control A Manipulated value MV Process value PV APPENDICES Appendix 4 PID 31 3 Proportional action P action A proportional action is used to obtain the manipulated value MV proportional to the deviation difference between the set value SV and the temperature process value PV Proportional gain In a proportional action the relation between changes in the deviation E and the manipulated value MV can be expressed in the following formula MV KpE Kp is a proportional constant and is called proportional gain The mani
422. s flag turns on The deviation E enters the disturbance judgment position and the process value PV is judged to be stable enough It may take about 60 seconds to judge the stability When the deviation enters within a half range of the disturbance judgment position under the following conditions e The deviation enters the disturbance judgment position due to the rise of the temperature process value PV The deviation enters the disturbance judgment position due to the fall of the temperature process value PV Point This flag is disabled when the deviation E enters within the half range of the disturbance judgment position due to the following causes Changing the set value SV e Changing the setting mode to the operation mode At the completion of auto tuning For details on the disturbance suppression function refer to the following K Page 111 Disturbance Suppression Function 1 1 A AT L A AET A E t Disturbance judgment range CH1 Set value SV setting Un G430 CH1 Disturbance judgment position Un G553 1 2 disturbance judgment range 1 Because the deviation E is within the 1 2 disturbance judgment width CH1 Feed forward control READY flag Un G417 turns on 2 The disturbance suppression function starts Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward control READY flag 417 617 817 1017
423. s not executed CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 is turned on When all PID constants of the target channels turn to a value other than 0 the self tuning is enabled Temperature process value PV A Set value SV v Oscillation detected Time Self tuning disabled i Self tuning in execution gt i4 CH1 Proportional band P setting SOR Setting 0 Un G431 Setting 0 etting CH1 Integral time I setting ae Setti 40 Un G432 Setting 0 etting CH1 Derivative time D setting PORR i A Un G433 Setting 0 Setting 0 ON i CH1 Self tuning disable status Un G411 b8 y OFF ON i CH1 PID auto correction status D d f ti It Un G411 b0 Depends on previous execution result OFF While the auto tuning is being executed While the auto tuning is being executed the self tuning is not executed At this time an error does not occur When the auto tuning is completed the self tuning is enabled The lower limit output limiter value is smaller than the manipulated value MV and the manipulated value MV is smaller than the upper limit output limiter value when the temperature control is started or the set value SV is changed The starting ST does not start However when the following setting has been configured the self tuning is enabled at the time of when a control response becomes oscillatory e Starting ST plus Vibration PID Constant Only has be
424. s on the during AT loop disconnection detection function refer to the following K5 Page 88 During AT Loop Disconnection Detection Function b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 00 o o 0 0 0 0J OJ O 0 cHafcHs cH2 cHt N a Bit data from b15 to b4 are fixed to 0 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable in the Q 571 compatible mode Setting range e 0 Disable 1 Enable Default value The default value is Disable 0 CH1 AT bias The point set as the set value SV of the auto tuning can be rearranged by using this area The auto tuning function determines each PID constant by executing the two position control toward the set value SV and causing hunting of the temperature process value PV Set CH1 AT bias Un G546 when an overshoot caused by the hunting is improper or the process value PV exceeds the set value SV during the auto tuning The auto tuning is executed with having the AT point the point rearranged by the setting as its center When the auto tuning is completed AT bias is not added and a control is executed toward the set value SV For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Ex When a negative value has been set for AT bias reverse action Temperature process value PV A
425. s outside the setting range of Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting in Application Setting Condition Transistor output status The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of the adjustment ON sensitivity dead band The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of the adjustment OFF sensitivity dead band Temperature process value PV Adjustment sensitivity dead band Set value SV gt Time Transistor output OFF 1 FUNCTIONS 4 1 2 Control Method 5 16 BHeating cooling control The module operates as follows outside the setting range of Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting in Application Setting The temperature process value PV is below the lower limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band The temperature process value PV is above the upper limit of the adjustment sensitivity dead band Temperature process value PV A Adjustment sensitivity dead band Set value SV gt Time Heating output L1H OFF ON Cooling output L10 OFF EThree position control Three position control can also be executed by setting a dead band Page 27 Dead band setting in the two position control three position control ESetting method in the R mode Set 0 0 C F in the following buffer memory areas CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Page 233 CH
426. s the set value SV at the specified variation rate The following table shows the application of each set value SV of when a setting variation rate limiter has been set When the deviation alert is used refer to the following Reference target of the set value SV Application when the set value SV has changed CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 This value is used when the temperature process value PV needs to follow the changing set value SV within a certain deviation E When the temperature process value PV does not follow the set value SV and goes out of the set deviation E an alert occurs Target Value SV Setting of Control basic This value is used when the temperature process value PV does not need to follow the changing set value parameters in Application Setting SV and only the deviation E to the set value SV is used for the judgment of an alert Even while the value in CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 is changing an alert is judged based on the deviation E to the set value SV 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function 67 68 Setting the set value SV and the setting variation rate limiter The following figures show the relation of two set values SV depending on whether a setting variation rate limiter has been set or not e When the setting variation rate limiter has not been set The two set values SV are the same Temperature process value PV ee 1 Set
427. s values are changed the set values become effective Monitor data Description Use this data to monitor the status of the temperature control module Write read attribute Reading data is only allowed Writing data is not allowed Setting method Setting timing Point r Among the buffer memory areas do not write data in the system areas or the areas whose data types are monitor data Writing data into these areas can cause the malfunction of the module APPENDICES 1 58 Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas The following table describes the items 1 to 5 in the list of buffer memory addresses 1 Automatic setting target 2 Target saved in the non volatile memory 3 Default setting registration command 4 Setting change command 5 Auto refresh BUn GO to Un G3919 0 0H All Latest error code 0 Monitor 0 1 1H All Error address 0 Monitor PS iO 2 2H All Latest address of error history 0 Monitor Pe OO 3 3H All Latest alarm code 0 Monitor fe iO 4 4H All Latest address of alarm history 0 Monitor Se SS 5 to 20 All Interrupt factor detection flag nyt 0 Monitor SSO 5H to 14H 21 to 36 System area St SS 15H to 24H 37 25H All Control mode selection monitor 0 Monitor Meee I ae 38 26H All Sampling cycle monitor 0 Monitor See ie
428. s with standby and standby second time upper lower limit deviation alert set value SV used within range alert set value SV used When a value out of the setting range is set in this area an out of setting range error error code 1950H occurs and the following operations will be executed e Error flag X2 turns on An error code is stored in Latest error code Un GO 236 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas Setting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 i S Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position A e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Alert set value 2 According to a selected alert mode of Alert 2 set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 2 Un G401 b9 turns on For CH1 Alert definition Un G401 refer to the following K5 Page 219 CH1 Alert definition For details on the alert function refer to the following K Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Alert set value 2 435 635 835 1035 CHO Alert set value 2 in the Q compatible mode 39 71 103 135 mAlert mode Set the alert mode of Alert 2 in the following buffer memory area The alert mode of Alert 2
429. sconnection judgment mode judgment mode 2015 to 2029 System area System area System area System area a 7DFH to 7EDH APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 177 2030 7EEH CT1 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2031 7EFH CT2 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2032 7FOH CT3 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2033 7F1H CT4 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor O 2034 7F2H CT5 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2035 7F3H CT6 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2036 7F4H CT7 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2037 7F5H CT8 Heater current process value System area 0 Monitor IO 2038 7F6H CT1 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2039 7F7H CT2 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O O 2040 7F8H CT3 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2041 7F9H CT4 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting O IO 2042 7FAH CT5 CT input channel assignment sett
430. se Setting has been set the value in CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 follows the set value SV and gradually changes when the set value SV is changed When it is supposed that the re wait function is enabled under such a situation the re wait function would be always active and an alert would not be output even while the temperature process value PV is not following the value in CH1 Set value SV monitor Un G406 To prevent such cases the re wait function is disabled when a setting variation rate limiter is used 1 FUNCTIONS 1 25 Alert Function 73 74 yr alert judgment Whether the occurrence of an alert is judged or not depends on the following settings Setting operation mode command Y1 Page 155 Setting operation mode command PID continuation Flag of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Page 129 Application Setting CH1 PID control forced stop command YC lt Page 157 PID control forced stop command Stop mode setting of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Page 129 Application Setting The following table shows the relation between each setting and the execution of alert judgment O Executed X Not executed x Setting mode at power on Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF ON Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 Operation mode during Stop 0 Continue 1 OFF Stop 0 Monitor 1 Alert 2 operation ON Stop 0 EE O Xx Monitor 1 Al
431. se parameter has been set is completed successfully 282 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection Select an auto tuning mode For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function For details on the simultaneous temperature rise function refer to the following C Page 95 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection 556 756 956 1156 CHO Simultaneous temperature rise AT mode selection in the Q compatible 733 749 765 781 mode Setting range 0 Select normal auto tuning e 1 Select simultaneous temperature rise AT Default value The default value is Select normal auto tuning 0 e This setting can be used with the setting of CH1 Auto tuning mode selection Un G543 e When this setting is changed during the auto tuning the setting will be enabled in the next auto tuning CH1 Disturbance judgment position Set the deviation to detect disturbance The disturbance suppression function starts when the deviation difference between the set value SV and process value PV exceeds the set value Ex When the disturbance judgment position is 5 C Set value SV Nee value Disturbance judgment PV position 5 C 777777777777777 ees he 1 2
432. set value 2 0 Control O 27 636 27CH CH2 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 0 Control O 37 637 27DH CH2 Alert set value 4 Alert set value Alert set value 4 0 Control O 47 638 27EH CH2 Temperature process value PV for Temperature Temperature 0 Control O input with another analog module process value process value PV for input PV for input with another with another analog module analog module 639 27FH CH2 System area Cooling Cooling System area 30 Control O proportional proportional band Pc band Pc setting setting 640 280H CH2 Memory s PID constants read Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Control command constants read constants read command command 641 281H CH2 Feed forward value memory read Feed forward System area 0 Control command value memory read command 642 to 699 System area 282H to 2BBH 700 2BCH CH2 HOLD CLEAR setting 0 Setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 701 2BDH CH2 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting Os 0 O 7 TCRT 702 2BEH CH2 Unused channel setting Unused channel Unused channel 0 Setting OD i setting setting 703 2BFH CH2 Stop mode setting Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting OB setting setting 704 2C0H CH2 Control output Heating control Heating control System area 30 15 Setting Or O S cycle sett
433. setting 87 57H CH2 Upper limit setting limiter Upper limit Upper limit 1300 TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter 6000 TCRT 88 58H CH2 Lower limit setting limiter Lower limit Lower limit O TCTRT Setting setting limiter setting limiter 2000 TCRT 89 59H System area _ 90 5AH CH2 Heater disconnection alert System area 0 Setting setting 91 5BH CH2 Loop System area 480 Setting disconnection detection judgment time 92 5CH CH2 Loop System area 0 Setting disconnection detection dead band 93 5DH CH2 Unused channel setting Unused channel Unusedchannel 0 Setting setting setting 94 5EH CH2 Memory s PID constants read Memory s PID Memory s PID 0 Setting command constants read constants read command command 95 5FH CH2 Automatic backup setting after auto Automatic Automatic 0 Setting tuning of PID constants backup setting backup setting after auto tuning after auto tuning of PID of PID constants constants 96 60H CH3 Input range 2 TCTRT Setting 7 TCRT 97 61H CH3 Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode Stop mode 1 Setting setting setting setting setting 98 62H CH3 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Setting setting setting setting setting 99 63H CH3 Proportional Heating Proportional Proportional 30 Setting band P setting proportional band P setting band P band Ph setting setting 100 64H CH3 Integral time I Integral time I Int
434. setting of the alert mode Input alert Upper limit input alert lower limit input alert e Deviation alert Upper limit deviation alert lower limit deviation alert upper lower limit deviation alert within range alert Input alert When the temperature process value PV is equal to or greater than the alert set value the system issues the upper limit input alert When the temperature process value PV is equal to or smaller than the alert set value the system issues the lower limit input alert Upper limit input alert Lower limit input alert Temperature process value PV Temperature process value PV A A Alert set value f Alert set value T NOS gt Time i i gt Time Alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Non alert status Alert status Setting method Set an alert mode Page 74 Alert mode Upper limit input alert Set Upper Limit Input Alert as the alert mode e Lower limit input alert Set Lower Limit Input Alert as the alert mode Deviation alert When the deviation E between the temperature process value PV and the set value SV meets a particular condition the system issues the deviation alert The set value SV to be referred to is either Set value SV monitor or Set value SV setting depending on the set alert mode When a setting variation rate limiter has been set Set value SV monitor follow
435. signment setting System area 0 Setting Pe 271 10FH CT8 CT input channel assignment setting System area 0 Setting OF Os 272 110H CT1 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO O 273 111H CT2 CT selection System area 0 Setting O o 274 112H CT3 CT selection System area 0 Setting G O O 275 113H CT4 CT selection System area 0 Setting O FO O 276 114H CT5 CT selection System area 0 Setting OOHO 277 115H CT6 CT selection System area 0 Setting O IO O 278 116H CT7 CT selection System area 0 Setting O O 279 117H CT8 CT selection System area 0 Setting O O MO 280 118H CT1 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 281 119H CT2 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 282 11AH CT3 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting G sO i pe 283 11BH CT4 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O sO fr 284 11CH CT5 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting OO a 285 11DH CT6 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting Oe Oe 286 11EH CT7 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting O O 287 11FH CT8 Reference heater current value System area 0 Setting OkO 288 120H CT1 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O O0 289 121H CT2 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting OF j 290 122H CT3 CT ratio setting System area 800 Setting O O 291 123H CT4 CT ratio setting Syste
436. ss value Process value 0 Setting O IO JO limit value PV scaling PV scaling lower limit lower limit value value APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 193 743 2E7H CH2 Process value PV scaling upper Process value Process value 0 Setting limit value PV scaling PV scaling upper limit upper limit value value 744 2E8H CH2 Process value PV scaling value Process value Process value 0 Monitor PV scaling PV scaling value value 745 2E9H CH2 Derivative action selection Derivative System area 0 Setting action selection 746 2EAH CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting temperature rise group setting 747 2EBH CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting temperature rise gradient data 748 2ECH CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting temperature rise dead time 749 2EDH CH2 Simultaneous System area 0 Setting temperature rise AT mode selection 750 2EEH CH2 Simultaneous System area System area System area 0 Monitor temperature rise status 751 2EFH CH2 Setting variation rate limiter unit Setting variation Setting variation 0 Setting time setting rate limiter unit rate limiter unit time setting time setting 752 2FOH CH3 System area Cooling System area 30 Setting proportional band Pc setting 753 2F1H CH3 System area Cooling upper System area 1000 Setting limit output limiter
437. stem area 0 Monitor value tuning flag value tuning value tuning flag flag 1017 3F9H CH4 Feed forward control READY flag System area 0 Monitor Oo 1018 3FAH CH4 Feed forward control forced start READY flag System area 0 Monitor VO 1019 3FBH CH4 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion 0 Monitor Se EE 1020 3FCH CH4 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion 0 Monitor Sl 1021 to 1029 System area S S 3FDH to 405H 1030 406H CH4 Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV Set value SV 0 Control oo 12 setting setting setting setting 1031 407H CH4 Proportional Heating Proportional Proportional 30 Control Or On band P setting proportional band P setting band P band Ph setting setting 1032 408H CH4 Integral time I Integral time I Integral time 1 Integral time 1 240 Control OIO setting setting setting setting 1033 409H CH4 Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time Derivative time 60 Control Oe Or Oo D setting D setting D setting D setting 1034 40AH CH4 Alert set value 1 Alert set value Alert set value 1 Alert set value 0 Control O O TO 1 19 1035 40BH CH4 Alert set value 2 Alert set value Alert set value 2 Alert set value 0 Control O I0 Q 2 2 1036 40CH CH4 Alert set value 3 Alert set value Alert set value 3 Alert set value 0 Control Or PO O 35 3 APPENDICES Appendix 3
438. t CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 to Disable 0 e CH1 Write completion flag Un G47 bO when the automatic backup is completed successfully e CH1 Write failure flag Un G47 b8 when the automatic backup fails If the auto tuning is executed while CH1 Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants Un G547 is Enable 1 CH1 Auto tuning status X4 does not turn off even though PID constants are stored after the completion of the auto tuning Memory s PID constants read write completion flag in Q compatible mode In the Q compatible mode this flag shows whether an operation to the non volatile memory has been completed without errors or has failed depending on the settings in the following buffer memory area e CH1 Memory s PID constants read command in the Q compatible mode Un G62 e CH1 Memory s PID constants read write completion flag in the Q compatible mode Un G63 For details on this area refer to the following In the Q compatible mode read the buffer memory addresses for the Q compatible mode K Page 206 Memory s PID constants read completion flag Page 207 Memory s PID constants write completion flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Memory s PID constants read write completion flag in the Q compatible mode 31 208 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Bu
439. t flag For details on this area refer to the following gt Page 223 CH1 Transistor output flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Open side transistor output flag 405 605 805 1005 CHO Open side transistor output flag in the Q compatible mode 21 22 23 24 1 In GX Works3 CHO Transistor output flag is displayed as the sample comment of CHO Open side transistor output flag C 1e SV monitor The set value SV of each unit time set in CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting Un G526 is stored in this buffer memory area 15 Page 263 CH1 Setting variation rate limiter unit time setting The set value SV can be monitored in real time Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Set value SV monitor 406 606 806 1006 CHO Set value SV monitor in the Q compatible mode 25 26 27 28 ed value MV for output with another analog module The values stored in the following buffer memory areas are converted for other analog modules on the system such as a D A converter module and stored in this buffer memory area CH1 Manipulated value MV 403 Page 221 CH1 Manipulated value MV The range of the values to be stored differs depending on the resolution set in the following buffer memory area 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 0 to 16000 0 to 20000 10 to 32000
440. t foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring refer to the MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual For Ethernet cables to be used in the system select the ones that meet the specifications in the user s manual for the module used If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the shielded cables of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions N WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Also do not expose it to liquid or strong shock Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode ignite or leak resulting in injury and fire Shut off the external power supply all phases
441. ta by setting parameters with the engineering tool To use the set values stored as the backup data of the initial settings of the module select one of the following actions Do not configure the parameter setting of the engineering tool e When configuring the parameter setting of the engineering tool correct the set values of the parameters to the ones stored as backup data and write the parameters to the CPU module 4 4 8 1 FUNCTIONS 1 36 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 1 37 Overshoot Suppression Function This function suppresses overshoots at the startup and the set value SV change Measured temperature C Suppression level Lower Suppression level Higher Setting Fast for Control Response Parameters of Control basic parameters in Application Setting with the overshoot gt Time s suppression function enables the fast temperature rise Ex The following shows an example of temperature changes of when Slow Normal or Fast has been set for Control Response Parameters of Control basic parameters in Application Setting Temperature process value PV A Fast Set value SV 2 gt Change Set value SV 1 gt gt Time Set value SV change point Setting method Configure the setting as follows Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Overshoot control func
442. tails on the inter module peak current suppression function refer to the following lt Page 106 Inter module peak current suppression function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Inter module peak current suppression function enable disable monitor 2101 Inter module peak current suppression function enable disable monitor inthe Q 1281 compatible mode nt le peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor Whether the inter module peak current suppression function has been set to Master or Slave can be checked e 0 Slave e 1 Master For details on the inter module peak current suppression function refer to the following lt Page 106 Inter module peak current suppression function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Inter module peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor 2102 Inter module peak current suppression function master slave selection monitor 1282 in the Q compatible mode 302 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas l nber of slave modules with inter module peak current suppression function enabled The number of slave modules to which the inter module peak current suppression function has been enabled can be checked A Check it with the temperature control module where Inter module peak current suppression function master slave selectio
443. temperature fall bottom is suppressed Precautions This function uses a noise filter to avoid a false detection for the disturbance judgment Thus if the temperature fluctuation caused by disturbance is steep in terms of time the disturbance judgment may delay 1 FUNCTIONS 411 1 35 Disturbance Suppression Function Feed forward control When an external factor that disturbs the control occurs this control executes a corrective action to eliminate the effect to temperatures in advance The temperature fall bottom caused by the disturbance is suppressed by adding the feed forward value to an output The adjustment of the feed forward value can be selected from manually and automatically in CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection Un G561 FF value is added Process value PV Set value SV Manipulated value MV PID control FF control PID control PID control after the bottom control After the bottom has been suppressed by the feed forward control the control is shifted to the PID control In this case overshoots may occur Thus the overshoot value and the recovery time need to be adjusted for the recovery operation to the set value SV Select the set value SV restoration adjustment level from 0 to 10 and adjust the overshoot value and the recovery time 31 0 1 30 5 Set value _ 39 9 SV 29 5 29 0 28 5 28 0 Time s Pid
444. ter cooling Devices such as cooling water piping Soo gee Apo See 0 8 pirt S n a nappa ogee pn nat anse E eee R 4 i ae ee Air cooling Devices such as ee cooling fans Q4 Peeper a fo tos nies Te ESS ene Linear Devices such as electron coolers 0 2 ee ee rr eee Complete linear characteristics ee eee emery Se eee ee ere cer eee oer Sere Coren Va ere Py eee ee een yn MN er eee ig 1 I i 1 i 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 L 1 1 I i 1 I 1 1 I 1 EEEE EEEE SE cfs 20 30 40 50 60 70 Manipulated value for cooling MVc 80 oO jo 100 At the execution of the auto tuning PID constants are calculated based on this setting and the auto tuning is executed Therefore more suitable PID constants can be calculated by the setting according to the cooling characteristics of the device For details on the auto tuning function refer to the following K5 Page 34 Auto Tuning Function Setting method Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Heating cooling control setting gt Cooling method setting Point e An operational expression of the auto tuning for the calculation of PID constants is determined based on this setting Thus always configure this setting before the execution of the auto tuning e Air co
445. ters or incorrect execution timing After the error cause is eliminated as a result of reviewing programs each function can be normally executed 1000H to 1FFFH e Moderate error An error such as a hardware failure The module does not continue the temperature control 3000H to 3FFFH The following table lists the error codes to be stored O in error codes This symbol indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred 0 CH1 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 CH4 A in error codes For what this symbol indicates refer to the Description and cause column Error code Error name Description and cause Action 180AH Interrupt factor A value other than 0 and 1 has been stored in Interrupt Set Interrupt factor generation setting n to 0 or 1 generation setting factor generation setting n range error A indicates that the interrupt setting corresponding to the error is as follows 0 Setting 1 to F Setting 16 181AH Condition target A value other than 0 to 12 has been stored in Condition Set Condition target setting n to a value within the setting range error target setting n range of 0 to 12 A indicates that the interrupt setting corresponding to the error is as follows 0 Setting 1 to F Setting 16 182AH Condition target A value other than 0 to 4 has been stored in Condition Set Condition target channel setting n to a value within channel setting target channel setting n the range of 0 to 4
446. the change of the set value SV However the overshoot and undershoot become the largest among the three settings Temperature process value PV WA Fast 4 Normal Set value SV 2 Prsten Change Slow Set value SV 1 gt gt Time Set value SV change point Using the overshoot suppression function and setting the control response parameter to Fast 2 raise temperatures at a high speed while suppressing the overshoot For the overshoot suppression function refer to the following K5 Page 119 Overshoot Suppression Function APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 249 Default value The default value is Slow 0 re rise completion range setting Set the width of the temperature rise completion range When the temperature process value PV satisfies the following conditions the temperature rise is completed e Set value SV Temperature rise completion range lt Temperature process value PV lt Set value SV Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise completion range Temperature rise Set value SV judgment range Temperature rise completion range When the value set in CH1 Temperature process value PV Un G402 goes within the temperature rise judgment range CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G404 is set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 For the time taken for CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G404 to set
447. the initial setting of the engineering tool 15 Page 128 PARAMETER SETTING e Store the PID constants in the non volatile memory and transfer them when the power is turned off and on or when the CPU module is reset and the reset is cleared Page 117 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function e Write the values directly into the buffer memory using a program Precautions When the auto tuning is executed with the engineering tool the memory having the capacity of 7OOMB or larger is required Check the memory that can be used has the capacity of 700MB or larger and execute the auto tuning 36 1 FUNCTIONS 1 11 Auto Tuning Function When using the engineering tool XZ Tool gt Module Tool List View S Control parameter t Temperature process value PV t Target value SV setting Enable disable the loop disconnection detection f Auto tuning mode selection AT abnormal completion judgment time Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PE gt Disturbance suppuression function View E Control parameter Temperature process value PV Target value SV setting 5 Loop disconnection Loop disconnection detection judement time Loop disconnection detection judement time Vv
448. the magnitude relation between the set values as follows 2 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value gt Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 3 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value gt Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 1A70H CHO Auto tuning The temperature process value PV is out of the input After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 error range execute the auto tuning again considering the following points e Set the AT bias so that the temperature process value PV during AT does not get out of the input range e Check the upper limit output limiter value If the value is 100 or greater change the value For controlled objects with a high speed response the temperature process value PV may get out of the input range when the standard mode has been set in Auto tuning mode selection In this case set the high response mode in Auto tuning mode selection 1A80H CHO Auto tuning The set value SV is out of the upper lower limit setting After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 seta error limiter range set value SV or an upper lower limit setting limiter so that the set value SV is within the upper lower limit setting limiter range and execute the auto tuning again 1A901H CHO Auto tuning The proportional band has been set to 0 After turning on and off Error reset command Y2 set error the proportional band to a value oth
449. the temperature measuring setting range ne corresponding bit oF Alert definition and range that was set as the input range CHO Alert flag XC to XF automatically turn off 0820H CHO Rate alarm upper limit A rate alarm upper limit has After the temperature process value PV is restored from occurred the alert status turn on and off Error reset command Y2 0830H CHO Rate alarm lower limit A rate alarm lower limit has to cigar the alarm codestorediin Latestalamicoue occurred Un G3 After the temperature process value PV is restored from the alert status the corresponding bit of Alert definition and CHO Alert flag XC to XF automatically turn off 0840H CHO Alert 1 Alert 1 has occurred After the temperature process value PV is restored from 0850H CHO Alert 2 Alert 2 has occurred the alert status turn on and off Error reset command Y2 to clear the alarm code stored in Latest alarm code 0860H CHO Alert 3 Alert 3 has occurred Un G3 0870H CHO Alert 4 Alert 4 has occurred After the temperature process value PV is restored from the alert status the corresponding bit of Alert definition and CHO Alert flag XC to XF automatically turn off 088 OH CHO Heater disconnection A heater disconnection has been After the detected disconnection or the detected output detection detected off time current error is resolved turn on and off Error 0890H CHO Loop disconnection A loop disconnection has been ieee command Y2
450. ting 524 0 CH1 Alert dead band setting 531 5 CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band 538 0 CH1 AT bias 546 0 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise gradient data 554 0 CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise dead time 555 0 CH1 Disturbance judgment position 557 0 CH1 Sensor correction value setting 565 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 568 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 569 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 570 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 571 0 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Automatic setting at input range change 302 Default value The default value is Disable 0 j variation rate limiter setting selection When setting the variation amount of the set value SV select whether to set the variation amount limiter setting values in a batch or individually at the temperature rise or temperature drop e 0 Set in a batch at temperature rise temperature drop e 1 Individually set at temperature rise temperature drop Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Setting variation rate limiter setting selection 303 Default value The default value is Set in a batch at temperature rise temperature drop 0 1 4 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas ontrol output cycle unit selection setting Select
451. ting method in the R mode Set each item as follows CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Any value Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Any value Page 235 CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting CH1 Integral time I setting Un G432 0 Os Page 235 CH1 Integral time I setting CH1 Derivative time D setting Un G433 Any value Page 236 CH1 Derivative time D setting Setting method in the Q compatible mode Set each item as follows e Proportion Belt P Setting Any value Integration Time I Setting Os Differentiation Time D Setting Any value XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters 1 FUNCTIONS 1 2 Control Method PID control PID control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to PI control and thereby the temperature shifts to a stable status in a short period of time even when a drastic change has occurred By setting the derivative time D properly the controlled object shifts to a stable status in a short period of time Setting method in the R mode Set each item as follows CH1 Proportional band P setting Un G431 Any value Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting CH1 Heating proportional band Ph setting Un G431 Any value
452. tion 1 FUNCTIONS 1 37 Overshoot Suppression Function 119 1 38 Error History Function The errors or alarms that occurred in the temperature control module are stored in the buffer memory as history Up to 16 errors and 16 alarms can be stored Operation When errors occur error codes and error times of the errors are stored in Error history No 1 Un G3600 to Un G3609 in order When alarms occur alarm codes and alarm times of the alarms are stored in Alarm history No 1 Un G3760 to Un G3769 in order e Error code assignment b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G3600 Error code Un G3601 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G3602 Month Day Un G3603 Hour Minute Un G3604 Second Day of the week Un G3605 Millisecond higher order digits Millisecond lower order digits Un G3606 System area Un G3609 Alarm code assignment b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G3760 Alarm code Un G3761 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G3762 Month Day Un G3763 Hour Minute Un G3764 Second Day of the week Un G3765 Millisecond higher order digits Millisecond lower order digits Un G3766 System area Un G3769 Ex Storage example of error history and alarm history data Item Stored contents Storage example First two digits of the year last two digits of the year Stored in BCD code 2015H
453. tion Page 156 Default setting registration command e Auto tuning Page 34 Auto Tuning Function e When the initial setting of the engineering tool has already been configured in the Q compatible mode backing up PID constants to the non volatile memory after the auto tuning is recommended Turning on this command at the next start up can omits the auto tuning This command is enabled in both the setting mode and operation mode However this command is disabled while CH1 Auto tuning command Y4 is on Default value The default value is Not requested 0 CH1 Feed forward value memory read command A feed forward value is read from the non volatile memory and stored in the buffer memory by using this command Setting this buffer memory area to Requested 1 stores the value backed up in the non volatile memory to the buffer memory Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Feed forward value memory read command 441 641 841 1041 CHO Feed forward value memory read command in the Q compatible mode 1200 1216 1232 1248 Buffer memory areas to store set values in the non volatile memory The following table lists the buffer memory areas from which set values are read CH1 Feed forward value Un G560 Page 286 CH1 Feed forward value MSetting range e 0 Not requested e 1 Requested 240 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas mPrecautions When this command has
454. tion Un G401 refer to the following K Page 219 CH1 Alert definition For details on the alert function refer to the following K5 Page 67 Alert Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Alert set value 4 437 637 837 1037 CHO Alert set value 4 in the Q compatible mode 41 73 105 137 HAlert mode Set the alert mode of Alert 4 in the following buffer memory area The alert mode of Alert 4 corresponds to CH1 Alert set value 4 Un G437 CH1 Alert 4 mode setting Un G536 Setting range For the setting range refer to the following K Page 236 Setting range Setting unit For the setting unit refer to the following K Page 237 Setting unit Default value The default value is 0 238 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas H1 Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module The digital input value of the current or voltage converted in another analog module such as A D converter module on the A system can be used as a temperature process value PV Store the digital input value of the current or voltage converted by another analog module such as A D converter module in this area For details refer to the following lt Page 66 Input When a value out of the set input range is stored the value to be used for control is fixed to the upper limit value or the lo
455. to 40FH 1040 410H CH1 System area Open close 20 Setting OF Or ieO output neutral band setting 1041 411H CH1 System area Control motor 10 Setting Q O O time 1042 412H CH1 System area Integration 1500 Setting G O o output limiter setting 1043 413H CH1 System area Valve operation 0 Setting OFO setting during CPU module STOP 1044 414H CH1 Disturbance judgment position System area 0 Setting O IG 1045 415H CH1 Set value return adjustment System area 0 Setting 1046 416H CH1 Feed forward control forced starting signal System area 0 Setting Oe I 1047 417H CH1 Feed forward value System area 0 Setting OF O 1048 418H CH1 Feed forward value tuning selection System area 0 Setting Sr Oe as 1049 419H CH1 Auto tuning error judgment time 120 Setting Q O O 1050 41AH CH1 Overshoot suppression level setting 0 Setting O 0O 1051 41BH CH1 Heater disconnection judgment mode System area 0 Setting OOO 1052 to 1055 System area SS S 41CH to 41FH 1056 420H CH2 System area Open close 20 Setting OkO O output neutral band setting 1057 421H CH2 System area Control motor 10 Setting G lO O time 1058 422H CH2 System area Integration 1500 Setting g O O output limiter setting APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 1059 423H CH2 System area Valve operation 0 Setting OO Oy se
456. to Un G3176 0 0H All Latest error code 0 Monitor O 1 1H CH1 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor S SS 1 TCRT 2 2H CH2 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor E E S 1 TCRT 3 3H CH3 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor SS Sn a 1 TCRT 4 4H CH4 Decimal point position O TCTRT Monitor SSS 5S 1 TCRT 5 5H CH1 Alert definition 0 Monitor Sf eee LO 6 6H CH2 Alert definition 0 Monitor SO 7 7H CH3 Alert definition 0 Monitor Se YO 8 8H CH4 Alert definition 0 Monitor h Se O 9 9H CH1 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor ee 10 AH CH2 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor m o 11 BH CH3 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor m 12 CH CH4 Temperature process value PV 0 Monitor eSa 13 DH CH1 Manipulated Manipulated value for heating System area 0 Monitor 1 value MV MVh 14 EH CH2 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor Po value MV value for value for heating MVh heating Mv 15 FH CH3 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor a e O value MV value for value MV heating MVh 16 10H CH4 Manipulated Manipulated Manipulated System area 0 Monitor She ic O value MV value for value MV heating MVh 17 11H CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor aS er er 18 12H CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor Se er 19 1
457. to be executed to temperature process values PV For details on the moving average processing to temperature process values PV refer to the following K Page 63 Moving Average Processing This setting is enabled only when Moving average processing setting Un G305 has been set to Enable 0 This setting is disabled when Moving average processing setting Un G305 has been set to Disable 1 For details on Moving average processing setting Un G305 refer to the following K Page 215 Moving average processing setting Point In the Q compatible mode set the number of moving averaging in Moving average processing setting in the Q compatible mode Un G1024 b3 Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Number of moving averaging setting 572 772 972 1172 CHO Number of moving averaging setting in the Q compatible mode 698 699 700 701 Setting range 2 to 10 times Default value The default value is 2 times APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 293 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count Set the limit value for consecutive heater disconnection detections and output off time current error detections so that the number of errors exceeding the limit value triggers an alert judgment For details on the heater disconnection detection function refer to the follo
458. to clear the alarm code stored in detection detected Latest alarm code Un G3 After the detected disconnection or the detected output 08AQH CHO Output off time current error An output off time current error has detection been detected off time current error is resolved the corresponding bit of Alert definition and CHO Alert flag XC to XF automatically turn off 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 5 List of Alarm Codes 143 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Module Label The functions of the temperature control module can be set by using module labels Module labels of I O signals The module label name of an I O signal is defined with the following structure Module name _ Module number Label name R60TC_1 bModuleREADY Module name This part indicates a module model name Module number A number starting from 1 is added to identify modules that have the same module name Label name This part indicates a label name unique to the module E D This string indicates that the module label is for the direct access input DX or direct access output DY A module label without this string is for the input X or output Y of refresh processing Module labels of buffer memory areas The module label name of a buffer memory area is defined with the following structure Module name _ Module number Data type _Ch Channel Data format Label name _D R60TC_1 stnMonitor_Ch 0 wTemperatureProcessValue Modul
459. to enable the settings 292 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value The correction value of the temperature corresponding to the sensor two point correction gain value is stored in this buffer memory area For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K5 Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area A Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 571 771 971 1171 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value in the Q 547 579 611 643 compatible mode ESetting range The temperature measuring range set in CH1 Input range Un G501 Page 242 CH1 Input range ESetting unit The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e No decimal point 0 Set a value in increments of 1 C F or digit e First decimal place 1 Set a value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Number of moving averaging setting Set the number of moving averaging
460. to improve response to the disturbance have been set response to the change of the set value SV degrades Compared to one degree of freedom PID control response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be compatible with each other in the two degree of freedom PID control Note that required parameter settings increase and PID constants can hardly be automatically set by the auto tuning function for complete two degree of freedom PID control Therefore the temperature control module operates in the simple two degree of freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified In the PID control simple two degree of freedom of the temperature control module a form that allows users to use PID constants making good response to the change of the set value SV and response to the disturbance can be selected from the following three types e Fast e Normal e Slow Temperature process value PV Fast A we ri Normal Set value SV 2 P Change Slow Set value SV 1_ gt gt Time Set value SV change point Setting method Configure the setting as follows T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Control basic parameters gt Control Response Parameters 1 FUNCTIONS 4 1 16 Simple Two degree of freedom 5 1 17 Auto setting at Input Range Change When the input range is
461. to tuning setting Overshoot control function 1 Disturbance suppression function f Intemupt setting f Refresh SS tem Uist Find Result In the Q compatible mode CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 a 2 Thermocouple K Measures 2 Thermocouple K Measure 2 Thermocouple K Measure 2 Thermocouple K Measured oc oc oc oc p paramete e eree i Ose sed Used GB Limiter setting f Normal Operation Reverse Operation Setting Cooling proportional band Pc setting GB Adjustment sensitivty dead band setting Integration Time I Setting I acida Differentiation Time D Setting f Derivative action selection A 3 Sensor Correction Value Setting be E Number of moving averaging Cort ataee aa Bp Heating cooiing control setting Seren ee HB Sefturing seting PID continuation Flag Scaling setting Temperature rise completion setting Set the judgment on a temperature rise completion B Simutaneous temperature rise setting Temperature rise completion range setting 1 Peak curent suppression setting Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 min H Postion proportional control setting 5 Limiter setting Setthe limiter Cold Junction Temperature Compensation Selection 100 0 Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting 2 Double click the item to change the setting and enter a setting value e
462. tool XZ Tool gt Module Tool List 1 Select Temperature trace of Temperature Control Module and click the OK button Start the selected module tool Module Series Selection IQR Series E Analog Input Offset gain setting E Analog Output Offset gain setting Create wave output data E Temperature Input Offset gain setting E Temperature Control Module E Pulse I 0 Positioning Preset Positioning monitor Positioning test 1 FUNCTIONS 7 1 19 Sensor Correction Function 5 58 File Setting Operation Option Target module Trace status 0000 REOTCTRTZTT2 Trace stopped Execute sensor correction Target Module 0000 R60TCTR 1 Target Channel CHI ww CH1 2 Module Current StzCH2 CHB Input Range 21CH4 3 Sensor Correction Function Selection Normal Sensor Correction Sensor Two point Correction 2 Module Current Status Input Range 2 Thermocouple K fh Process value 24 C 4 Sensor Two point Correction OfeetVaue Gain Value 0 Gain Setting Execute the Offset Setting Please press Yes after setting the appropriate correction offset value to the target channel 4 Sensor Two point Correction Offset Value 55 Offset Setting Gain Value 400 Gain Setting 1 FUNCTIONS 1 19 Sensor Correction Function 2 Select the module to which the sensor correction is executed and cli
463. trol output is not being executed The temperature control module detects an error because the temperature rises even while control output is not being executed under the following conditions e When input is disconnected e When a contact point of an externally operable device was welded When the temperature does not fall by 2 C F or lower within the set loop disconnection detection judgment time after the control output has reached the lower limit output limiter value an alert is output The operation is reversed for a forward action Page 49 Direct reverse Action Selection Function 1 FUNCTIONS 1 29 Loop Disconnection Detection Function Setting method Configure two settings to use the loop disconnection detection function Setting the unit time to monitor the variation amount in the temperature process value PV Configure the setting as follows W Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Loop disconnection detection setting gt Loop disconnection detection judgment time Point When this function is not necessary set 0 for Loop disconnection detection judgment time of Loop disconnection detection setting in Application Setting Setting a dead band Set the non alert area having the set value SV at the center temperature width in which no loop disconnection is detected to prevent accidental alerts of the loop disconnection detecti
464. tting during CPU module STOP 1060 424H CH2 Disturbance judgment position Disturbance System area 0 Setting oCo D judgment position 1061 425H CH2 Set value return adjustment Set value return System area 0 Setting O adjustment 1062 426H CH2 Feed forward control forced starting Feed forward System area 0 Setting signal control forced starting signal 1063 427H CH2 Feed forward value Feed forward System area 0 Setting Oi OE value 1064 428H CH2 Feed forward value tuning selection Feed forward System area 0 Setting 0 m value tuning selection 1065 429H CH2 Auto tuning error judgment time Auto tuning Auto tuning 120 Setting Ds Or O error judgment error judgment time time 1066 42AH CH2 Overshoot suppression level setting Overshoot Overshoot 0 Setting Or Pp suppression suppression level setting level setting 1067 42BH CH2 Heater disconnection judgment System area 0 Setting O O mode 1068 to 1071 System area coal acacia oes 42CH to 42FH 1072 430H CH3 System area Open close 20 Setting rO O output neutral band setting 1073 431H CH3 System area Control motor 10 Setting Or Oo IO time 1074 432H CH3 System area Integration 1500 Setting O OHE output limiter setting 1075 433H CH3 System area Valve operation 0 Setting OIO 10 J setting during CPU module STOP 1076 434H CH3 Disturbance Disturbance Disturbance System are
465. ture rise judgment flag 222 CH1 Transistor output flag 223 CH1 Unused channel setting 246 CH1 Upper limit output limiter 251 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 254 CH1 Valve operation setting during CPU module STOP 2 2005 265 Cold junction temperature compensation selection a i etaa Ano hota tances detect te Ag beech tnd Aaa aed 217 Cold junction temperature process value 206 Condition target channel setting n 212 Condition target setting n 211 Control method 00000 eee eee 12 Control mode 2200000 eee eee 12 Control mode selection 213 Control mode selection monitor 203 Control output cycle unit monitor 204 Control output cycle unit selection setting 215 CPU module 222 202 2 12 CT monitor method selection 295 CT1 CT input channel assignment setting 298 CT1 CT ratio setting 301 CT1 CT selection 2220005 298 CT1 CT selection Q compatible mode 299 CT1 Heater current process value 297 CT1 Reference heater current value 301 Default setting registration command 156 Default value write completion flag 152 Deviation alert o eaaa aia a raaa a ia d 0c eee 67 During AT loop disconnection detection function enable disable Q compatible mode
466. tures e Required information can be cross searched in multiple manuals e Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual e The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Buffer memory The intelligent function module s memory where the data including setting values and monitored values received sent from to the CPU module is stored Control method The generic term of two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control Control mode The generic term of standard control heating cooling control normal mode heating cooling control expanded mode mix control normal mode mix control expanded mode position proportional control normal mode and position proportional control expanded mode CPU module The generic term of MELSEC iQ R series CPU modules Engineering tool The product name of the MELSEC programmable controller software package PID constants The generic term of the proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D Q compatible mode In this mode the buffer memory map is converted into the one for the MELSEC Q series and the module operates with the buffer memory map R mode In this mode the module operates with the buffer memory map that has been newly assigned for the MELSEC iQ R series
467. uctive parts and electronic components of the module SD memory card extended SRAM cassette or connector Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions N WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before installation and wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and signal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause fire or failure Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Securely connect the connector to the module Po
468. unction Page 81 Heater Disconnection Detection Function 1 FUNCTIONS 8 1 28 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function 5 86 1 29 Loop Disconnection Detection Function This function detects errors that occurs in a control system control loop such as a load heater disconnection an externally operable device such as a magnetic relay failure and input disconnections How an error is detected From the point where the control output has reached the upper limit output limiter value or the lower limit output limiter value the variation amount in the temperature process value PV is monitored every unit time set and heater and input disconnections are detected Examples of the errors detected The following shows the examples of the errors detected When control output is executed The temperature control module detects an error because the temperature does not rise even while control output is being executed under the following conditions e When a heater is disconnected e When input is disconnected or short circuited When a contact point of an externally operable device does not turn on When the temperature does not rise by 2 C F or higher within the set loop disconnection detection judgment time after the control output has reached the upper limit output limiter value an alert is output The operation is reversed for a forward action L Page 49 Direct reverse Action Selection Function When con
469. unction temperature compensation Properly connect the cold junction temperature compensation resistor resistor disconnected or loose for the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R6OTCTRT2TT2BW only 134 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 1 Checks Using LEDs When the ALM LED turns on or flashes When the ALM LED turns on or flashes check the following items Has CHO Alert flag turned on Check CHO Alert definition and take the appropriate corrective action Page 219 CH1 Alert definition Has the temperature process value PV exceeded Change the setting value of CHO Input range to a value within the temperature measuring range to be the temperature measuring range set as the input used Page 242 CH1 Input range range Is there a channel where no temperature sensor has Set the channel where no temperature sensor has been connected to Unused in Unused channel been connected setting of Application Setting Page 246 CH1 Unused channel setting Has a loop disconnection been detected Check for a load disconnection externally operable device failure and sensor disconnection When the HBA LED turns on When the HBA LED turns on check the following items Has a heater disconnection been detected Has e Check the heater has been powered on b12 of CHO Alert definition turned on e Check for a load disconnection and externally operable device failure Has an output off time current error been detected Check fo
470. ure 1 Shift the mode to the setting mode Turn on and off Setting operation mode command Y1 lt Page 155 Setting operation mode command 2 Set CH1 Stop mode setting Un G503 to Monitor 1 Page 247 CH1 Stop mode setting 3 Set CH1 Sensor correction function selection Un G564 to Sensor two point correction 1 Page 289 CH1 Sensor correction function selection 4 Input the correction offset value Enter the value using devices such as a thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer and standard DC voltage generator or based on a general resistance value 5 Setthe temperature process value PV corresponding to the input for CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value Un G569 Page 292 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value corrected value 6 Set CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un G566 to Latch request 1 Page 290 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request 7 Check that CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion Un G419 becomes Latch completed 1 1 Page 232 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion When the latch is completed the temperature process value PV is stored in CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value Un G568 15 Page 291 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset value measured value 8 Set CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch request Un
471. ured temperature of the cold junction temperature compensation resistor is stored in this area The value to be stored differs depending on the temperature unit of CH1 Input range Un G501 Page 242 CH1 Input range e When the temperature unit is C 10 to 100 e When the temperature unit is F 14 to 212 Operations of the temperature control module are guaranteed at the ambient temperature of 0 C to 55 C For the general specifications of the temperature control module refer to the following MELSEC iQ R Module Configuration Manual Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Cold junction temperature process value 45 Cold junction temperature process value in the Q compatible mode 29 Supported modules e R6EOTCTRT2TT2 R60TCTRT2TT2BW Viemory s PID constants read completion flag This flag shows whether an operation to the non volatile memory has been completed without errors or has failed depending on the settings in the following buffer memory area CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Un G440 Page 239 CH1 Memory s PID constants read command Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Memory s PID constants read completion flag 46 MCorrespondence between each bit and flag The following table shows the correspondence between each bit in this buffer memory area and each flag bO CH1 Read
472. us Un G614 1 CH3 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G814 1 and CH4 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G1014 1 Although Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 is set at the start of the simultaneous temperature rise Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 is set before the completion of the temperature rise Point e When the mode is changed from the operation mode to the setting mode Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off during the simultaneous temperature rise the control stops In addition CH1 Simultaneous temperature rise status Un G414 changes from Simultaneous temperature rise in process 1 to Simultaneous temperature rise not in process 0 An error does not occur e When the simultaneous temperature rise function is executed the setting variation rate limiter cannot be used Conditions to execute the simultaneous temperature rise function When all of the following conditions are satisfied the simultaneous temperature rise function can be executed e The control is started The set value SV is larger than the temperature process value PV e Standard Control has been selected for Control mode selection in Base Setting This function cannot be executed in the heating cooling control e The simultaneous temperature rise parameter has been determined or has been set and a value other than 0 default value has been set When a valu
473. using the temperature control module power on a controlled object such as a heater When the temperature control is started while the heater power supply is off the PID constants for the response different from original characteristics are calculated by the self tuning Temperature process value PV A Set value SV Original response Response of when a heater is powered on after the temperature control module starts Control start temperature control oS eee a gt Time Heater powered ON Do not use the self tuning function for controlled objects where a great disturbance uncontrollable disturbance occurs periodically Doing so may cause improper PID constants to be calculated by the self tuning When the self tuning function is used for such objects improper PID constants are set and the response for the set value SV change or disturbance becomes slow Use the disturbance suppression function for the controlled objects where a disturbance occurs periodically Page 111 Disturbance Suppression Function 1 FUNCTIONS 1 12 Self tuning Function 1 13 Direct reverse Action Selection Function Whether to execute a PID operation with a direct action or a reverse action can be selected This function can be used in all the control methods two position control P control PI control PD control and PID control lt Page 15 Control Method For details on the operation refer to the following K Page 313 A
474. ut limiter Changing the output variation limiter setting Changing the control output cycle Changing the sensor correction Changing the primary delay digital filter Shifting AUTO MAN mode e Switching direct reverse action This bit also turns on in the following cases When 6000 seconds 1 hour and 40 minutes or longer have passed after the self tuning was started When the variation speed of the temperature process value PV is slower than 1 125 C min during the self tuning When the temperature process value PV becomes out of the temperature measuring range When required measurement data was not obtained because the manipulated value MV did not reach the upper limit output limiter value or the lower limit output limiter value before the completion of the measurement When the temperature process value PV that was supposed to increase after the self tuning was started with the starting ST and decreased by 1 C F or more instead When the temperature process value PV that was supposed to decrease after the self tuning was started with the starting ST and increased by 1 C F or more instead This bit turns off after one of the following operations is executed A e When Setting operation mode command Y1 is turned on and off and the mode shifts to the setting mode When CH1 Unused channel setting Un G502 is set to Unused 1 When CH1 PID control forced stop command YC is turned off
475. uto setting at Input Range Change 1 18 Setting Variation Rate Limiter Setting Function In the setting variation rate limiter setting set the variation rate of the set value SV per a set unit time for when the set value SV is changed Setting variation rate limiters for the temperature rise and the temperature drop can be set in a batch or individually Setting method Temperature rise fall batch individual setting Configure the setting as follows XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Setting change rate limiter setting BVariation amount setting When setting limiters in a batch Set only Setting change rate limiter XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Limiter setting e When setting limiters individually Set Setting change rate limiter and Setting change rate limiter Temperature drop XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Limiter setting Setting a unit time Set a unit time in Setting change rate limiter unit time setting Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Limiter setting Ex When Temperature Rise Temperature Drop Individual Setting has been set for Setting change rate limiter setting in Base
476. utput 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T a a ea a a a oa oa toot too CH1 i i i 1 CH1 f 1 1 1 I 1 Transistor output i i 4 Transistor output i i A i i TE E nee ee E ee CH2 i i CH2 H l H Temperature Transistor output 1 Temperature Transistor output 1 1 1 control lt 1 i i i i 1 control lt i 1 1 1 i i module 2 i i i i module 2 i i i i i i CH3 1 f 1 1 CH3 1 i 1 1 Transistor output x a k m Transistor output x m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i i i i oi o CH4 CH4 i Transistor output 1 1 Transistor output 1 1 i 106 1 FUNCTIONS 1 33 Inter module Link Function Setting method The following shows the setting method 1 Set Peak current suppression function enable disable between multiple module to Enable T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Base Setting gt Multiple module interaction function gt Peak current suppression function enable disable between multiple module 2 Set only one module of all the temperature control modules that use the inter module peak current suppression function y p p pp to Master in Peak current suppression function master slave selection between multiple module 3 Set the number of divisions in Peak current suppression control group setting T Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Peak current suppression setting
477. utput from the temperature control module an analog output value from another analog module such as a D A converter module can be used as the manipulated value MV Setting method 1 Set the resolution of the manipulated value MV by the following procedure Xf Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module 2 Store the value in CH1 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module Un G407 in the buffer memory of another analog module such as a D A converter module O i e When the manipulated value MV is 5 0 to 0 0 0 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module When the manipulated value MV is 100 0 to 105 0 4000 12000 16000 20000 or 32000 is stored in Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module The manipulated value MV is stored into Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module digital output value in real time 1 FUNCTIONS 1 24 Input output with Another Analog Module Function 1 25 Alert Function This function issues an alert when a temperature process value PV or deviation E meets the condition set in advance Use this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices Alerts of the alert function are classified into input alerts and deviation alerts depending on the
478. value SV gt Time 1 At this time CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag Un G404 is set to Within temperature rise completion range 1 2 CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G507 Set the temperature rise completion range and the temperature rise completion soak time in the following buffer memory areas CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting Un G506 Page 250 CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting e CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Un G507 Page 250 CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature rise judgment flag 404 604 804 1004 CHO Temperature rise judgment flag in the Q compatible mode 17 18 19 20 222 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas CH1 Transistor output flag The on off states of the transistor output and ON delay output are stored in this buffer memory area b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 bO ojojojojojojo ojojojojojojo Le V Bi 3 V F Bit data from b15 to Bit data from b7 to f b9 are fixed to 0 b1 are fixed to 0 Transistor output flag ON delay output flag Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Transistor output flag 405 605 805 1005 CHO Transistor
479. value the value multiplied by 10 in increments of 0 1 C F Enabling the settings Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off to enable the settings Default value The default value is 0 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value The measured value of the temperature corresponding to the sensor two point correction gain value is stored in this buffer memory area The value to be stored differs depending on the value stored in CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 Page 218 CH1 Decimal point position e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is No decimal point 0 A detected temperature value is stored as it is e When CH1 Decimal point position Un G400 is First decimal place 1 A detected temperature value is stored after being multiplied by 10 For details on the sensor two point correction function refer to the following K Page 54 Sensor Correction Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Buffer memory area name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 570 770 970 1170 CHO Sensor two point correction gain value measured value in the Q 546 578 610 642 compatible mode Enabling the stored value Turn on and off Setting change command YB in the setting mode Setting operation mode status X1 Off
480. vel setting 288 CH1 Peak current suppression control group setting A E hase Ged eae bed a Teen aig mas 279 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 288 CH1 Process value PV scaling function enable disable setting 277 CH1 Process value PV scaling lower limit value Site deg RAD Rea ee decd ESE ee al 278 CH1 Process value PV scaling upper limit value site ecatonastg a en a en ee ae Ge 278 CH1 Process value PV scaling value 228 CH1 Proportional band P setting 233 CH1 Rate alarm alert detection cycle 272 CH1 Rate alarm alert output enable disable setting ava Caue aah A Rhee E aeakeeans 272 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 273 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 272 CH1 Self tuning flag 00 226 CH1 Self tuning setting 277 CH1 Sensor correction function selection 289 CH1 Sensor correction value setting 290 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch completion Pie etphe we kia wetland eae aede ee baal ok 232 317 318 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain latch request ee ee ee ee 291 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value corrected value 02000000ee 293 CH1 Sensor two point correction gain value measured value 22220000 eee 292 CH1 Sensor two point correction offset latch completion See Heh See eB de ka oe GON cena Ae aoe G 232 CH1 Sensor two point correction of
481. ver execute it after the temperature has dropped Stopping of the calculation of the simultaneous temperature rise parameter The optimum simultaneous temperature rise parameter may not be able to be calculated depending on the characteristics of a controlled object In addition the temperature control module stops the calculation when the self tuning has not been completed with errors For the conditions in which the self tuning is completed with errors refer to the following K Page 47 Conditions in which the self tuning ends in failure BHow to set the simultaneous temperature rise parameter with self tuning Select one of the following two settings for Self tuning setting in Application Setting e 2 Starting ST Simultaneous temperature rise parameter only e 3 Starting ST PID Constant and simultaneous temperature rise parameter XZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt Target module gt Module Parameter gt Application Setting gt Self tuning setting 1 FUNCTIONS 4 01 1 32 Simultaneous Temperature Rise Function Operation of when the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated When the simultaneous temperature rise AT is started before the simultaneous temperature rise parameter is calculated with self tuning The simultaneous temperature rise parameter is not calculated neither with self tuning nor auto tuning PID constants are changed Temperature process value PV Auto tuning waveform M
482. viced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by th
483. wer limit value of the input range Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module 438 638 838 1038 CHO Temperature process value PV for input with another analog module in 689 690 691 692 the Q compatible mode Default value The default value is 0 H Cooling proportional band Pc setting Set the cooling proportional band Pc to execute the PID control For details on this area refer to the following K Page 233 CH1 Proportional band P setting Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area CHO Cooling proportional band Pc setting CHO Cooling proportional band Pc setting in the Q compatible mode 768 ESetting range In the R mode 1 to the full scale of the input range C F In the Q compatible mode 1 to 10000 0 1 to 1000 0 Default value In the R mode For the R60TCTRT2TT2 and the R60TCTRT2TT2BW the default value is 30 30 C For the R60TCRT4 and the R60TCRT4BW the default value is 30 3 0 C In the Q compatible mode The default value is 30 3 0 H1 Memory s PID constants read command PID constants are read from the non volatile memory and stored in the buffer memory by using this command Setting this buffer memory area to Requested 1 stores the value backed up in the non volatile memory to the buffer
484. wing K Page 81 Heater Disconnection Detection Function For details on the output off time current error detection function refer to the following lt Page 85 Output Off time Current Error Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count 2000 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count in the 166 Q compatible mode Settable modules e R60TCTRT2TT2BW e R60TCRT4BW Setting range The setting range is 3 to 255 times Default value The default value is 3 times Heater disconnection correction function selection Set whether to use the heater disconnection correction function or not For details on the heater disconnection correction function refer to the following lt Page 81 Heater Disconnection Detection Function Buffer memory address The following shows the buffer memory address of this area Heater disconnection correction function selection 2001 Heater disconnection correction function selection in the Q compatible mode 170 Settable modules e R60TCTRT2TT2BW e R60TCRT4BW Setting range 0 Heater disconnection correction function not used 1 Heater disconnection correction function used Default value The default value is Heater disconnection correction function not used 0 294 APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Are
485. ws the buffer memory address of this area CT1 2030 256 CT2 2031 257 CT3 2032 258 CT4 2033 259 CT5 2034 260 CT6 2035 261 CT7 2036 262 CT8 2037 263 Supported modules R60TCTRT2TT2BW R60TCRT4BW To start the measurement of the heater current the following buffer memory areas need to be set e CT1 CT input channel assignment setting Un G2038 Page 298 CT1 CT input channel assignment setting CT1 Reference heater current value Un G2054 lt Page 301 CT1 Reference heater current value When both buffer memory areas have been set to 0 the heater current cannot be measured When either of them has not been set the heater current cannot be measured properly APPENDICES Appendix 3 Buffer Memory Areas 297 hannel assignment setting Set the assignment of each current sensor CT input to the channels Correspondence between each CT input terminal and buffer memory address CT1 2038 264 CT2 2039 265 CT3 2040 266 CT4 2041 267 CT5 2042 268 CT6 2043 269 CT7 2044 270 CT8 2045 271 Setting range e 0 Not used 1 CH1 2 CH2 e 3 CH3 4 CH4 Default value The default value is Not used 0 e When using a three phase heater assign the same channel to two current sensor CT inputs LA MELSEC iQ R Temperature Control Module User s Manual Startup e In the heating cooling control or position proportional control CH3

MELSEC iQ-R Temperature Control Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents